AGENDA · NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN, that a meeting of the Coordination Committee will be held on...

AGENDA

Coordination Committee Meeting

Tuesday 27 June 2017 commencing at 10.30am

Strathpine Chambers 220 Gympie Road, Strathpine

COUNCILLOR: NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN, that a meeting of the Coordination Committee will be held on Tuesday 27 June 2017 commencing at 10.30am in Strathpine Chambers, 220 Gympie Road, Strathpine to give consideration to the matters listed on this agenda. Daryl Hitzman Chief Executive Officer 22 June 2017

Membership = 13 Quorum = 7 Mayor and all Councillors

Agenda for public distribution

Moreton Bay Regional Council

LIST OF ITEMS

1 GOVERNANCE SESSION (Cr Allan Sutherland, Mayor)

ITEM 1.1 7 DELEGATIONS - FOOD ACT 2006 AND FOOD PRODUCTION (SAFETY) ACT 2000 - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL

SUPPORTING INFORMATION

#1 Schedule – Food Act 2006

#2 Schedule – Food Production (Safety) Act 2000

ITEM 1.2 15 COUNCIL REPRESENTATION - COUNCIL OF MAYORS (SEQ) ASIA PACIFIC CITIES SUMMIT ASSOCIATED TRADE MISSION - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL

2 PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SESSION (Cr Mick Gillam)

ITEM 2.1 18 DA/32442/2016/V2U- MATERIAL CHANGE OF USE - DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS FACILITY AND OPERATIONAL WORKS - PRESCRIBED TIDAL WORKS - 1388-1458 PUMICESTONE ROAD, TOORBUL - DIVISION 1

REPORT DETAIL

SUPPORTING INFORMATION #1 Locality Plan

#2 Zoning Map

#3 Proposed Plan

#4 Referral Response

ITEM 2.2 74 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - MAJOR AMENDMENT - PUBLIC NOTIFICATION - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL

SUPPORTING INFORMATION (provided separately)

#1 MBRC Planning Scheme - Major Amendment

ITEM 2.3 78 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - NEW AND MAJOR AMENDMENT TO PLANNING SCHEME POLICIES - PUBLIC NOTIFICATION - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL

SUPPORTING INFORMATION (provided separately)

#1 Amendment to MBRC Planning Scheme - Consultation 2017 Planning Scheme Policies

COORDINATION COMMITTEE MEETING 27 June 2017

PAGE 2 Agenda


PAGE 2 Agenda


ITEM 2.4 82 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - ALIGNMENT AMENDMENT TO NEW PLANNING ACT 2016 - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL SUPPORTING INFORMATION (provided separately)

#1 Alignment Amendment to MBRC Planning Scheme

#2 Alignment Amendment to MBRC Planning Scheme - Planning Scheme Policies

#3 Alignment Amendment to MBRC Planning Scheme - Public Notice

#4 Alignment Amendment to MBRC Planning Scheme - Changes Document

ITEM 2.5 86 ADOPTION OF INFRASTRUCTURE CHARGES RESOLUTION (NO 6) AND IMPLEMENTATION POLICY (NO 6) - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL


#1 MBRC Charges Resolution (No 6) 3 July 2017 #2 MBRC Charges Resolution Implementation Policy (No 6) 3 July 2017

ITEM 2.6 146 INCENTIVISING INFILL DEVELOPMENT POLICY - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL


#1 Incentivising Infill Development Policy

3 CORPORATE SERVICES SESSION (Cr Adrian Raedel)

ITEM 3.1 153 WRITE-OFF OF RATES AND CHARGES - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL

4 ASSET CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE SESSION (Cr Peter Flannery)

ITEM 4.1 155 TENDER - ROAD RESURFACING PROGRAM - REGIONAL - PACKAGE 1 - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL


#1 2017-18 Road Resurfacing Program - Regional - Package 1 - Work Locations

Confidential #2 Tender Evaluation

ITEM 4.2 166 MORAYFIELD - BUCHANAN ROAD - ROAD WIDENING AND CYCLE SAFETY IMPROVEMENTS - DIVISION 3

REPORT DETAIL




PAGE 3 Agenda


PAGE 3 Agenda


ITEM 4.3 172 BURPENGARY - MORETON BAY CENTRAL SPORTS COMPLEX - SOCCER CLUBHOUSE CONSTRUCTION - DIVISION 2

REPORT DETAIL SUPPORTING INFORMATION


ITEM 4.4 180 BUILDINGS PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL


#1 Buildings Portfolio Asset Management Plan

ITEM 4.5 234 PATHWAYS PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL

SUPPORTING INFORMATION #1 Pathway Portfolio Asset Management Plan

ITEM 4.6 266 COASTAL PROTECTION PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL

REPORT DETAIL


#1 Coastal Protection Portfolio Asset Management Plan

ITEM 4.7 306 PROPOSAL TO NAME AN UN-NAMED BRIDGE ‘HERMAN KUHN BRIDGE’ - MT PLEASANT ROAD, MT PLEASANT - DIVISION 11

REPORT DETAIL

5 PARKS, RECREATION & SPORT SESSION (Cr Darren Grimwade)

6 LIFESTYLE & AMENITY SESSION (Cr Matt Constance)

ITEM 6.1 310 KOALA MONITORING PHASE 2 - THE MILL AT MORETON BAY - PREFERRED SUPPLIER ARRANGEMENT - DIVISION 7

REPORT DETAIL



PAGE 4 Agenda


PAGE 4 Agenda


7 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT & TOURISM SESSION (Cr Julie Greer)

ITEM 7.1 315 PROPERTY RATIONALISATION PROJECT - DIVISIONS 1 & 4

REPORT DETAIL


#1 Magnesium St, Narangba

#2 Magnesium St Concept Plan #3 Ross St, Ningi

#4 Excerpt from Local Government Regulation 2012

ITEM 7.2 323 AWARDING OF SERVICE CONTRACT - COMMERCIAL LEASING AND PROPERTY MANAGEMENT - REGIONAL



8 GENERAL BUSINESS

CLOSED SESSION (Confidential items)

ITEM C.1 – CONFIDENTIAL 329THE MILL AT MORETON BAY - PROCUREMENT OF FILL MATERIAL - DIVISION 7

REPORT DETAIL


PAGE 5 Agenda


PAGE 5 Agenda


ATTENDANCE & APOLOGIES Attendance: Committee Members: Cr Allan Sutherland (Mayor) (Chairperson) Officers: Apologies: The Mayor is the Chairperson of the Coordination Committee. Coordination Committee meetings comprise of Sessions chaired by Council’s nominated Spokesperson (or Proxy) for that portfolio, as follows:

Session Spokesperson Proxy 1 Governance Cr Allan Sutherland (Mayor) Cr Mike Charlton (Deputy Mayor) 2 Planning & Development Cr Mick Gillam Cr Adam Hain 3 Corporate Services Cr Adrian Raedel Cr Allan Sutherland (Mayor)/

Cr Mike Charlton (Deputy Mayor) 4 Asset Construction & Maintenance Cr Peter Flannery Cr Allan Sutherland (Mayor)/

Cr Mike Charlton (Deputy Mayor) 5 Parks, Recreation & Sport Cr Darren Grimwade Cr Denise Sims 6 Lifestyle & Amenity Cr Matt Constance Cr Brooke Savige 7 Economic Development & Tourism Cr Julie Greer Cr Allan Sutherland (Mayor)/

Cr Mike Charlton (Deputy Mayor) 8 General Business Cr Allan Sutherland (Mayor) Cr Mike Charlton (Deputy Mayor)


PAGE 6

Agenda


PAGE 6 Agenda


1 GOVERNANCE SESSION (Cr Allan Sutherland, Mayor) ITEM 1.1 DELEGATIONS - FOOD ACT 2006 AND FOOD PRODUCTION (SAFETY) ACT 2000 - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 1 GOVERNANCE Reference: A9918955 : 21 June 2017 - Refer Supporting Information A9919104 Responsible Officer: AM, Director Executive and Property Services Executive Summary This report recommends that Council delegate certain of its powers under the Food Act 2006 and Food Production (Safety) Act 2000 to the Chief Executive Officer (CEO), as listed in the Supporting Information to this report, in order that the CEO may sub-delegate powers as required to appropriately qualified employees or contractors of the Council. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION 1. That Council, pursuant to section 257 of the Local Government Act 2009, delegates to the Chief

Executive Officer its powers under the Food Act 2006 as specified in Supporting Information #1 to this report.

2. That Council, pursuant to section 257 of the Local Government Act 2009, delegates to the Chief Executive Officer its powers under the Food Production (Safety) Act 2000 as specified in Supporting Information #2 to this report.


PAGE 7

Agenda


PAGE 7 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 1.1 DELEGATIONS - FOOD ACT 2006 AND FOOD PRODUCTION (SAFETY) ACT 2000 - REGIONAL - A9918955 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background Council has certain powers under the Food Act 2006 and the Food Production (Safety) Act 2000. It is appropriate to delegate certain of those powers to the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) in order that the CEO may sub-delegate powers as required to appropriately qualified employees or contractors of the Council. 2. Explanation of Item Pursuant to section 257 of the Local Government Act 2009, the Council may resolve to delegate certain statutory powers to the CEO. Section 259 of the Local Government Act 2009 provides that the CEO may delegate his/her powers to appropriately qualified employee/s or contractor/s of the local government. It is recommended that the powers under the Food Act 2006 and the Food Production (Safety) Act 2000 set out in the Supporting Information to this report be delegated to the CEO in order that the CEO may sub-delegate powers as required to appropriately qualified employees or contractors of the Council. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Delegations made under section 257 of the Local Government Act 2009 must be reviewed by the Council annually.

A delegation of the Council’s powers does not prevent the Council from exercising any of those powers itself.

3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan Strengthening Communities: Office of the CEO – overall leadership and co-ordination of Council activities.

3.3 Policy Implications N/A

3.4 Risk Management Implications N/A

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications The CEO will be delegated authority to exercise various powers of Council under the Food Act 2006 and the Food Production (Safety) Act 2000. The CEO may sub-delegate these powers to appropriately qualified employees or contractors of the Council.

3.6 Financial Implications N/A

3.7 Economic Benefit N/A

3.8 Environmental Implications

N/A


PAGE 8

Agenda


PAGE 8 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 1.1 DELEGATIONS - FOOD ACT 2006 AND FOOD PRODUCTION (SAFETY) ACT 2000 - REGIONAL - A9918955 (Cont.)

3.9 Social Implications N/A

3.10 Consultation / Communication Consultation has been carried out with the Chief Executive Officer, Directors and relevant Managers of the Community & Environmental Services and Planning & Economic Development directorates and Legal Services.


PAGE 9

Agenda


PAGE 9 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A9919104 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 1.1 DELEGATIONS - FOOD ACT 2006 AND FOOD PRODUCTION (SAFETY) ACT 2000 - REGIONAL #1 Schedule – Food Act 2006 #2 Schedule – Food Production (Safety) Act 2000


PAGE 10

Agenda


PAGE 10 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 1.1 - DELEGATIONS - FOOD ACT 2006 AND FOOD PRODUCTION (SAFETY) ACT 2000 - REGIONAL (cont.)

#1 Schedule – Food Act 2006

Description of Power Delegated Section of the Act

Power to administer and enforce the following provisions of the Food Act 2006: (a) section 39(1); (b) chapters 3 and 4; (c) chapter 6, other than section 159.

Section 23(1) Food Act 2006

Power to administer and enforce sections 32, 33, 35 and 36 of the Food Act 2006, in conjunction with the State.

Section 24 Food Act 2006

Power to agree with the chief executive that the State may do a thing that is a matter of administration and enforcement for local government under section 23(1) of the Food Act 2006

Section 25(1)(a) Food Act 2006

Power to agree with the chief executive that Council may do a thing that is a matter of administration and enforcement for the State under section 22(1) of the Food Act 2006

Section 25(1)(b) Food Act 2006

Power to consult with the chief executive, and provide information required by the chief executive, about the administration and enforcement of sections 24 and 25 of the Food Act 2006

Section 28

Food Act 2006

Power to consider and grant, or refuse to grant, an application for a licence to carry on a licensable food business.


Power to obtain and consider the written advice of an auditor about whether a food safety program complies with section 98.


Power to decide whether premises are suitable for carrying on a licensable food business.

Section 58

Food Act 2006

Power to make enquiries as to the suitability of the applicant to hold a licence, and the suitability of the premises for carrying on a licensable food business.

Section 59(1)(a) Food Act 2006

Power to require the applicant to give Council further information or documents that Council reasonably requires.

Section 59(1)(b) Food Act 2006

Power to extend the time needed to make a decision about the application. Section 62(2) Food Act 2006

Power to agree with the applicant, at any time prior to the final consideration day, about the day upon which the application must be decided.


Power to issue a provisional licence, at any time prior to deciding an application for a licence.


Power to decide the term of the licence. (Note: not more than 3 years). Section 67

Food Act 2006

Power to decide the term of the provisional licence. (Note: not more than 3 months).


Power to extend, and further extend, the term of a provisional licence (to a total period of not more than 3 months after the provisional licence was issued).



PAGE 11

Agenda


PAGE 11 Agenda



Power to impose reasonable conditions on the licence. Section 69(1)(e) Food Act 2006

Power to consider and renew, or refuse to renew, the licence for an application made under section 72(1) of the Food Act 2006


Power to consider and restore, or refuse to restore, the licence, where application has been made under section 73(1) of the Food Act 2006


Power to consider and amend, or refuse to amend, a licence, where application has been made under section 74(1) of the Food Act 2006


Power to require the applicant to give Council further information or documents Council reasonably requires to decide the application (for an application that is made under Chapter 3, Part 5, Division 2, Subdivision 1, i.e. sections 72(1), 73(1) and 74(1)).


Power to give an information notice where Council has failed to decide an application within 30 days of receipt under Chapter 3, Part 5, Division 2, Subdivision 1, i.e. Sections 72(1), 73(1) and 74(1).


Power to give a show cause notice. Section 79(2) Food Act 2006

Power to consider representations about a show cause notice. Section 80(2) Food Act 2006

Power to end the show cause process after considering representations made by the licensee.


Power to suspend a licence after considering representations (if any). Section 82(2)(a) Food Act 2006

Power to cancel a licence after considering representations (if any). Section 82(2)(b) Food Act 2006

Power to suspend a licence immediately. Section 83(1) Food Act 2006

Power to give an information notice and show cause notice, as required, before suspending a licence pursuant to section 83(1).


Power, as the second local government, to take the same action as the first local government (except the power to cancel, suspend impose conditions or other similar action in relation to the licence).


Power, as the second local government, to advise the first local government of the thing done or omitted to be done by a licensee of a mobile food business.


Power, as the first local government, to take action, in relation to a thing done or omitted to be done by the licensee in the second local government area.


Power to consider and grant, or refuse to grant, an application for a replacement licence.


Power to consider an application and to accredit, or refuse to accredit, the food safety program.


Power to obtain and consider the written advice of an auditor about whether or not the food safety program complies with the criteria in section 104.



PAGE 12

Agenda


PAGE 12 Agenda



Power, before deciding the application, to require the applicant to give further information or documents reasonably required to decide the application.


Power to give an information notice to the applicant where the application is refused under section 107.


Power to decide that more time is needed to make a decision about the application.


Power to agree with the applicant, at any time prior to the final consideration day, about the day upon which the application must be decided.


Power, after accrediting an applicant’s food safety program, to decide how often the program must have compliance audits.


Power to determine changes to the frequency of compliance audits for a food safety program accredited by Council.


Power to consider an application and approve, or refuse to approve, the amendment of an accredited food safety program.


Power, before deciding the application, to require the applicant to give further information or documents reasonably required to decide the application.


Power, by notice, to direct the holder of a Council accredited food safety program to amend the program.


Power to give the holder of a food safety program a show cause notice, and to decide the term of the show cause period.


Power to consider representations about a show cause notice. Section 119 Food Act 2006

Power, after considering written representations by the holder of the accredited food safety program, to take no further action.


Power to cancel the accreditation of a food safety program. Section 121(2) Food Act 2006

Power to conduct a non-conformance audit of a food safety program. Section 160(2) Food Act 2006

Power to approve an improvement notice where remedying the contravention would be likely to stop the food business from operating.


Power, as the ‘reviewer’, to review an original decision under Chapter 3 or Chapter 4 of the Food Act 2006


Power, as reviewer, to, at any time, extend the time to apply for a review. Section 238(2) Food Act 2006

Power, as reviewer, to, after reviewing the original decision, make a further decision to: (a) confirm the original decision; or (b) amend the original decision; or (c) substitute another decision for the original decision.



PAGE 13

Agenda


PAGE 13 Agenda


#2 Schedule – Food Production (Safety) Act 2000


Power to approve the appointment of an employee of Council as an authorised officer by Safe Food Production (QLD).

Section 83 Food Production (Safety) Act 2000


PAGE 14

Agenda


PAGE 14 Agenda


ITEM 1.2 COUNCIL REPRESENTATION - COUNCIL OF MAYORS (SEQ) ASIA PACIFIC CITIES SUMMIT ASSOCIATED TRADE MISSION - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 1 GOVERNANCE Reference: A15469867 : 21 June 2017 Responsible Officer: CM, Executive Officer - Mayor's Office and Media (CEOs Office) Executive Summary At its meeting of 18 April 2017, Council approved Mayor Allan Sutherland to participate in the 2017 Asia Pacific Cities Summit (APCS) and Mayors’ Forum in Daejeon, South Korea (including the Pre-APCS Business Mission), as a guest of the Council of Mayors (SEQ) from 6-13 September 2017. During its deliberations, Council noted that the 2017 APCS and the associated pre-business mission included a complimentary package of financial support provided by the Council of Mayors to support SEQ Mayors attending the 2017 APCS and the associated pre-business mission. This package of financial support includes air travel, transfers, accommodation and registration as well as some incidental expenses. It is proposed that while in the Asia Pacific region and on route to APCS, Council can utilise the financial support provided by the Council of Mayors and maximise additional trade and investment opportunities for our region. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION 1. That Mayor Allan Sutherland be authorised to participate in a business mission to Singapore and

Japan from 26 August to 6 September 2017 while on-route to the 2017 Asia Pacific Cities Summit (APCS) in Daejeon, South Korea.

2. That the Chief Executive Officer be authorised to arrange appropriate officer attendance.


PAGE 15

Agenda


PAGE 15 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 1.2 COUNCIL REPRESENTATION - COUNCIL OF MAYORS (SEQ) ASIA PACIFIC CITIES SUMMIT ASSOCIATED TRADE MISSION - REGIONAL - A15469867 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background The Council of Mayors (SEQ) has extended an invitation for Mayor Allan Sutherland to attend a delegation of Mayors travelling to the 2017 Asia Pacific Cities Summit (APCS) in South Korea during September 2017. 2017 APCS and the associated pre-business mission is a Council of Mayors (SEQ) initiative to provide Mayors with an opportunity to participate in a delegation of Mayors to promote trade and investment opportunities for their regions. Council approval was provided on 18 April 2017 for Mayor Allan Sutherland to represent Moreton Bay Regional Council at the 2017 APCS and associated pre-business mission from 6-13 September 2017. Mayor Sutherland has since been invited by the University of the Sunshine Coast to participate in a business mission to Singapore from 26 August - 30 August 2017 while the Mayor is on route to APCS. Council officers have also liaised with Trade and Investment Queensland to maximise any other trade and investment opportunities for the region while the Mayor is on route to APCS. It is proposed that while in the Asia Pacific region and given its close proximity to South Korea, Mayor Sutherland and possible representatives from University Sunshine Coast visit Japan to tour university facilities and undertake economic promotion of the Moreton Bay Region. This is proposed from 30 August 2017 to 6 September 2017 and would be in-lieu of Mayor Sutherland participating in the Brisbane City Council’s Lord Mayoral Business Mission of Mayors travelling from South Korea to China following APCS. 2. Explanation of Item It is proposed that while in the Asia Pacific region for 2017 APCS, Council maximise on the financial support provided by the Council of Mayors (SEQ) and explore additional trade and investment opportunities for our region while on route to APCS. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Details of this trade and investment mission will be included in Council’s 2017-18 Annual Report as per section 188 of the Local Government Regulation 2012.

3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan Creating Opportunities: Local jobs for residents - an innovative and thriving economy.

3.3 Policy Implications Council approval of this travel will be consistent with Council’s Professional Development Policy 2150-089.

3.4 Risk Management Implications There are no direct risk management implications arising from this report.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications There are no direct policy implications arising from this report.

3.6 Financial Implications A complimentary package of financial support will be provided by the Council of Mayors (SEQ) to support SEQ Mayors attending the 2017 APCS and pre-business mission. This package of financial support will include air travel, transfers, accommodation and registration as well as some incidental expenses.


PAGE 16

Agenda


PAGE 16 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 1.2 COUNCIL REPRESENTATION - COUNCIL OF MAYORS (SEQ) ASIA PACIFIC CITIES SUMMIT ASSOCIATED TRADE MISSION - REGIONAL - A15469867 (Cont.)

It is proposed that while in the Asia Pacific region, Council can maximise on the financial support provided by the Council of Mayors (SEQ) and explore additional trade and investment opportunities for our region while on route to APCS.

Funds are available in Council’s budget for additional expenses incurred and staff attendance in line with Council’s Professional Development Policy 2150-089.

3.7 Economic Benefit Participation in this trade and investment mission will promote trade and investment opportunities in our region.


There are no direct environmental implications arising from this report. 3.9 Social Implications

The business missions will increase the Moreton Bay Region’s international visibility and support economic development, job creation for our region.

3.10 Consultation / Communication Council were consulted in this matter and resolution of Council has been prepared as per Council’s Professional Development Policy 2150-089.


PAGE 17

Agenda


PAGE 17 Agenda


2 PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SESSION (Cr Mick Gillam) ITEM 2.1 DA/32442/2016/V2U- MATERIAL CHANGE OF USE - DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS FACILITY AND OPERATIONAL WORKS - PRESCRIBED TIDAL WORKS - 1388-1458 PUMICESTONE ROAD, TOORBUL - DIVISION 1 APPLICANT: NBN OWNER: MS BETTY MAE LONG (OWNER AT TIME OF APPLICATION

LODGMENT) Meeting / Session: 2 PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT Reference: A15421378 : 14 June 2017 – Refer Supporting Information A15421608 Responsible Officer: RG, Planner (PED Development Planning) Executive Summary

Applicable Planning Scheme Moreton Bay Regional Council Planning Scheme Applicant NBN Owner(s) Ms Betty Mae Long (owner at time of application lodgement) Site Address 1388-1458 Pumicestone Road, TOORBUL QLD 4510 Property Description Lot 2 RP 156158, Lot 1 RP 156158, Lot 1 RP 136583 Area 47.627 ha Proposal Material Change of Use - Development Permit for

Telecommunications Facility and Operational Works - Prescribed Tidal Works

Proposal Plans Refer to proposal plan in Appendices of this report. Assessment Level Impact Assessable Requested Approvals Material Change of Use - Development Permit for

Telecommunications Facility and Operational Works - Prescribed Tidal Works

Consistent / Inconsistent proposal

Yes

Planning Scheme Details

Rural Zone and Limited Development Zone and Rural Zone (Agricultural Precinct)

Relevant Codes Rural Zone Code Coastal Hazard Flood Hazard

Application ‘properly made’ 30 August 2016 Information Request Issued 16 September 2016; Final response received 2

November 2016 Referral Agencies Concurrence Agencies:

Department of Infrastructure Local Government and Planning Advice Agencies Nil

Public Notification (Notice of Compliance received)

30 August 2017

Submissions Received Properly Made: Zero (0) Not Properly Made: Zero (0)

Decision Stage ends 12 July 2017 Is a Notation to the Planning scheme required?

Not Applicable

Number of Existing Lots Three (3)


PAGE 18

Agenda


PAGE 18 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.1 DA/32442/2016/V2U- MATERIAL CHANGE OF USE - DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS FACILITY AND OPERATIONAL WORKS - PRESCRIBED TIDAL WORKS - 1388-1458 PUMICESTONE ROAD, TOORBUL - DIVISION 1 - A15421378 (Cont.)

Further Development Permits that may be required • Development Permit for Building Work

This application seeks a Material Change of Use - Development Permit for Telecommunications Facility and Operational Works - Prescribed Tidal Works situated at 1388-1458 Pumicestone Road, Toorbul, on land described as Lot 2 RP 156158, Lot 1 RP 156158 and Lot 1 RP 136583. The applicant proposes to establish a new Telecommunications Facility to service the locality surrounding the site. The facility is proposed as a 41 metre high (including all structures) monopole located towards the centre of the site. The subject site is located within the Rural Zone and Limited Development Zone and Rural Zone (Agricultural Precinct) and has an area of 47.627 ha. Locality plan attached. The site is identified as being located within the Regional Landscape and Rural Production Area in the South East Queensland Regional Plan. The application was publicly advertised with zero (0) submissions received. The proposed development is considered to accord with the intent of the Moreton Bay Regional Council Planning Scheme, and is recommended to be approved, subject to conditions. The proposal was lodged with Council and deemed to be “Properly Made” on 30 August 2016. Accordingly, this application has been assessed in accordance with the Sustainable Planning Act 2009. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION A. That Council, in accordance with Sustainable Planning Act 2009, approves the development

application for a Material Change of Use - Development Permit for Telecommunications Facility and Operational Works - Prescribed Tidal Works at 1388-1458 Pumicestone Road, Toorbul, described as Lot 1 and Lot 2 RP156158 and Lot 1 RP 136583, subject to the following plans/documents and conditions.:

Approved Plans and Documents Plan / Document Name

Reference Number Prepared By Dated

Overall Site Plan 4NIN-51-05-MELD-C2-1 Revision 02

Aurecon Australia Pty Ltd 04.05.2016

Site Setout Plan 4NIN-51-05-MELD-C3 Revision 02


Site Elevation and Details

4NIN-51-05-MELD-C4 Revision 02


NBN Antenna Configuration

4NIN-51-05-MELD-A1 Revision 01


MATERIAL CHANGE OF USE - DEVELOPMENT PERMIT

CONDITIONS TIMING

DEVELOPMENT PLANNING

1. Approved Plans and/or Documents


PAGE 19

Agenda


PAGE 19 Agenda



CONDITIONS TIMING

Undertake development generally in accordance with the approved plans and/or documents. These plans and/or documents will form part of the approval, unless otherwise amended by conditions of this approval.

Prior to commencement of use and to be maintained at all times.

2. Amenity of the Area

Carry out the use so that there is no detrimental effect on the amenity of any person or property, resulting from the emission of noise, vibration, odour, air pollutants, glare, waste water, waste products, grit, oil or otherwise.

At all times.

3. Colour of Telecommunication Facility

Ensure that the telecommunication facility and associated equipment shelter is painted with a colour that blends with the adjacent bushland vegetation and complies with the colour range detailed as follows unless otherwise approved by Council in writing:

(a). Registered Colourbond ‘Pale Eucalypt’ non-reflective paint;

OR

(b). Acceptable colours from Australian Standard AS2700s

- 1996 or equivalent that are appropriate for highly visible surfaces as they are considered to be harmonious with the natural landscape listed below.

G52 - Eucalyptus G53 - Banksia N45 - Koala Gray N32 - Green Gray G54 - Mist Green Y63 - Khaki N - 35 Light Grey G56 - Sage Green G55 - Lichen

Prior to commencement of use and to be maintained at all times.

4. Warning Sign

A warning information sign is to be provided at the entrance to the lease area to prevent unauthorised entry.

To be maintained at all times after the commencement of use.

5. Security Fencing


PAGE 20

Agenda


PAGE 20 Agenda



CONDITIONS TIMING

Erect a security fence, with a maximum height of 2.4m, along all sides of the lease area.

Prior to commencement of the use and to be maintained at all times.

6. Noise

Air conditioning equipment must be located, designed, installed and maintained to achieve a component noise level of 0dB(A) above background noise level when measured at an affected building for a noise sensitive use. Notes: The component noise level for the equipment is to be measured as an LA90, T. ‘Background Noise Level’ means LA90, T being the A-weighted sound pressure level exceeded for 90 percent of the time period not less than 15 minutes using fast response.

Prior to commencement of the use and to be maintained at all times.

7. Vegetation Management Plan

(a) Submit a Vegetation Management Plan prepared by a suitably qualified person and include scaled plans and supporting documentation that provides for the following: (i) Retention of all vegetation other than those trees

required for removal (ii) Retention of habitat trees and healthy trees throughout

the development; (iii) Control measures, maintenance procedures and

monitoring programs; (iv) On site compensatory replanting of native vegetation

cleared (b) Obtain approval from Council for the Vegetation Management Plan in accordance with (a) above. (c) Carry out works in accordance with the approved Vegetation Management Plan.

(a) Prior to works commencing on site. (b) Prior to works commencing on site. (c) At all times.

8. Management of Wildlife - Minor


PAGE 21

Agenda


PAGE 21 Agenda



CONDITIONS TIMING

Tag all trees to be removed and inspect for any signs of wildlife. Should any wildlife be identified, removal of the tree must not occur until the animal has vacated the area of immediate danger. Work must be suspended overnight if possible. If the animal does not move from the area of danger, the relevant State Government Agency must be notified, and a qualified handler employed at the developer’s cost to transport the animal to a safe place approved by the relevant State Government Agency.

Prior to any clearing on the site.

9. No Net Loss of Fauna Habitat

Development does not result in the net loss of fauna habitat. Where development does result in the loss of a Habitat Tree, development will provide replacement fauna nesting boxes at the following rate: (a) One (1) nest box for every hollow removed; or (b) Where hollows have not yet formed in trees greater than

80cm in diameter at 1.3m height, three (3) nest boxes are required for every habitat tree removed.

Prior to the commencement of use.

DEVELOPMENT ENGINEERING

10. DE136 Acid Sulfate Soil Management

(a) Thoroughly mix all excavated soil with aglime (fine

ground (<1mm) calcium carbonate or calcite) at the rate of 80 kg of lime per cubic metre of soil, and treat any exposed sediment or soil surfaces in excavation pits or trenches at a rate of 5 kg of lime per square metre. Soil is to be thoroughly mixed with lime before it is backfilled into trenches.

(b) Manage site runoff through bunding and prevent or

treat infiltration passing through acid sulfate soils to groundwater.

(c) The discharge of groundwater or surface water from

the subject site must only occur when it meets the Queensland Water Quality Guidelines 2009 and the Australian and New Zealand Guidelines for Fresh and Marine Water Quality (the ANZECC 2000) Guidelines.

(a) While site

works are occurring.

(b) While site

works are occurring.

(c) Prior to discharge to an aquatic environment.


PAGE 22

Agenda


PAGE 22 Agenda



CONDITIONS TIMING

11. DE302 Replace Existing Council Infrastructure

Replace existing Council infrastructure (including but not limited to street trees and footpaths) that is damaged as part of construction works, to a standard which is consistent with Council’s standards.

Prior to commencement of use.

12. DE303 Alterations and Relocation of Existing Services

Any alteration or relocation in connection with or arising from the development to any service, installation, plant, equipment or other item belonging to or under the control of the telecommunications authority, electricity authorities, the Council or other person engaged in the provision of public utility services is to be carried with the development and at no cost to Council.

Prior to commencement of use.

13. DE507 Access, Internal Roadways, Parking and Servicing Areas

Design, construct and maintain all accesses, internal roadways, parking and servicing areas, in accordance with the approved plan(s) of layout. The works must be designed, constructed and maintained in accordance with good engineering practices and Council’s Planning Scheme requirements unless conditioned otherwise.

(a) Prior to

commencement of use and to be maintained.

14. DEU Equipment Cabinets

Cabinets containing equipment are to be elevated to a level above the Defined Flood Event. Notes:

• The Define Planning Level used for development can be obtained from the relevant section of the Flood Check Development Report available via Council’s website: (www.moretonbay.qld.gov.au).

Prior to commencement of use and to be maintained.

CONCURRENCE AGENCY

15. Concurrence Agency Conditions

(a) Comply with the conditions of Department of

Infrastructure, Local Government and Planning

(a) At all times.


PAGE 23

Agenda


PAGE 23 Agenda

http://www.moretonbay.qld.gov.au/



CONDITIONS TIMING

response dated 10 February 2017 (reference: SDA-1016-034721) or as amended.

(b) Provide certification to Council prepared by a suitably

qualified person or the agency demonstrating the requirements of the Department of Infrastructure, Local Government and Planning have been met.

(b) At all times.

ADVICE

1. Aboriginal Cultural Heritage Act 2003

The Aboriginal Cultural Heritage Act 2003 commenced in Queensland on April 16, 2004. Under the Act, indigenous parties are key in assessing cultural heritage significance. The Aboriginal Cultural Heritage Act 2003 establishes a Duty of Care for indigenous cultural heritage. This applies on all land and water, including freehold land. The Cultural Heritage Duty of Care lies with the person or entity conducting the activity. Penalty provisions apply for failing to fulfil the Cultural Heritage Duty of Care. Those proposing an activity that involves additional surface disturbance beyond that which has already occurred on the proposed site need to be mindful of the Duty of Care requirement. Details of how to fulfil the Duty of Care are outlined in the Duty of Care Guidelines gazetted with the Act. Council strongly advises that you contact the relevant state agency to obtain a copy of the Duty of Care Guidelines and further information on the responsibilities of developer under the terms of the Aboriginal Cultural Heritage Act 2003.

B. That all external Referral Agencies for the application be provided with a copy of Council’s Decision

Notice.


PAGE 24

Agenda


PAGE 24 Agenda


REPORT DETAIL 1. Background On the 7 October 2009, Council’s Delegate approved an Operational Works application for Tidal Works for a proposed pipeline and two (2) pump stations (DA/21356/2009/OPW). 2. Explanation of Item 2.1 Proposal Details The applicant proposes to establish a new Telecommunications Facility to service the locality surrounding the site. The facility is proposed as a 41 metre high (including all structures) monopole located towards the centre of the site. The site is to be accessed via an existing access point off Bishop Parade connected via a new service track though adjoining lots. Vegetation removal (approximately 250sqm) is required to construct the proposed facility compound and access track. The majority of vegetation will remain and the construction area is outside the area of existing dense vegetation. The facility and its ancillary components will be housed in a 10m x 12m lease area, constructed on Lot 2 RP 156158 with a new access track over Lot 1 RP 156158 and Lot 1 RP 136583. The proposed Telecommunications Facility includes a monopole, one (1) parabolic antenna affixed to the monopole, three (3) panel antennas affixed to the headframe, a 2.4m high chainlink security compound fence and small outdoor equipment unit. The proposed facility is a part of the NBN network and is a “transmission hub site”. The facility will provide wireless internet connectivity (broadband) to the surrounding residences as well as providing a critical connection point between multiple adjoining fixed wireless facilities via the transmission network. 2.2 Site and Locality

2.2.1 Existing Use There is an existing dwelling house on the site. 2.2.2 Topography

The sites topography is relatively flat and low-lying with ground levels ranging from R.L.2.0mAHD at the highest point near the southern property boundary, to R.L.0mAHD at the lowest point near the northern boundary. The site comprises undeveloped rural land with existing vegetation varying in density across the site. 2.2.3 Surrounding Land Use The site is subject to Coastal Hazard Overlays as it is mapped in both the Storm Tide and Coastal Erosion Prone areas. Additionally the site is mapped within the Flood Hazard Overlay - Medium Risk area. The site also contains MSES and MLES environmentally significant areas over the site. The northern property boundary runs adjacent to Elimbah Creek, while the southern boundary borders Pumicestone Road (State Controlled Road). Adjoining allotments to the east and west of the subject site, comprise of similar undeveloped rural land. The nearest Dwellings are located in land corridors zoned ‘General Residential’ within Coastal Communities Precinct. These pockets exist to the north-east and south-east of the subject site, with the nearest dwelling located approximately 500m from the proposed facility. Access to the site is via an existing access point off Bishop Parade.


PAGE 25

Agenda


PAGE 25 Agenda


2.3 State Planning Instrument Assessment

2.3.1 State Planning Regulatory Provisions (SPRPs)

An assessment against each of the State Planning Regulatory Provisions is set out as follows:

Name Designation Applicable Requirements

State Planning Regulatory Provision (Adopted Charges)

None Not Applicable to Development Assessment however the SPRP has informed the Council’s Adopted Infrastructure Charges Resolution, and this is discussed in section 5 of this report.

State Planning Regulatory Provisions (Adult Stores)

None The development proposal is not for an Adult Store and therefore the State Planning Regulatory Provisions do not apply.

South East Queensland Koala Conservation State Planning Regulatory Provisions

None The development proposal is not located in a Priority Koala Assessable Development Area or Koala Assessable Development Area and therefore the State Planning Regulatory Provisions do not apply.

Southeast Queensland Regional Plan 2009-2031 (SEQRP) State Planning Regulatory Provisions - May 2014 Version

Regional Landscape and Rural Production Area

The development proposal is for a Material Change of Use in the Regional Landscape and Rural Production Area. An assessment against the applicable assessment criteria of the SEQRP has been undertaken, and the proposal is consistent. The proposal is not for an Urban Purpose and therefore complies.

2.3.2 State Planning Policy

On 16 November 2015, notification was given to Council that all State Interests had been integrated into the Moreton Bay Regional Council Planning Scheme with the exception of the State Interest - natural hazards, risk and resilience (coastal hazards - erosion prone areas). Accordingly, the interim development assessment requirements set out within the State Planning Policy (SPP) for coastal hazards - erosion prone areas is to be applied by Council in the assessment of development applications until this State Interest has been appropriately integrated into Council’s planning scheme. Assessment against the SPP for this one State Interest is as follows;

State interest - Natural Hazards

Applicable to Development SPP Requirement Comment

Yes

No

All Natural Hazards Trigger (specific only to coastal hazards - erosion prone areas) (1) avoids natural hazard areas or

mitigates the risks of the natural hazard to an acceptable or tolerable level, and

(2) supports, and does not unduly burden, disaster management

An assessment of the proposed development has been undertaken against the applicable SPP requirements, and the proposal has been determined to comply.


PAGE 26

Agenda


PAGE 26 Agenda




response or recovery capacity and capabilities, and

(3) directly, indirectly and cumulatively avoids an increase in the severity of the natural hazard and the potential for damage on the site or to other properties and

(4) avoids risks to public safety and the environment from the location of hazardous materials and the release of these materials as a result of a natural hazard, and

(5) maintains or enhances natural processes and the protective function of landforms and vegetation that can mitigate risks associated with the natural hazard,

Coastal Hazards Trigger Development: (6) is not located in an erosion prone

area within a coastal management district unless (a) it cannot feasibly be located

elsewhere, and (b) is coastal-dependent

development, or temporary, readily relocatable or able-to-be-abandoned development, and

(7) that is the redevelopment of existing permanent buildings or structures, is located outside an erosion-prone area or, where this is not feasible redevelopment: (a) is located:

i. as far landward from the seaward property boundary as possible, or

ii. landward of the seaward alignment of the neighbouring buildings, and

(b) provides space seaward of the development within the premises to allow for the future construction of erosion control structures, such as a seawall, and

(8) proposes to undertake coastal protection work (excluding beach

The proposal mitigates the risk as it is a non-habitable use and where necessary, the proposed telecommunication components are located above the defined flood event. The use does not increase the number of persons living or working on the site on a regular basis and does not increase the severity of the natural hazard. A large portion of the site is mapped as being within the Erosion Prone area and the proposed facility will not increase the risk. The proposed facility was considered most appropriate of the three sites investigated. Other potential sites were not preferable due to proximity to dwellings and service performance from those locations. N/A N/A


PAGE 27

Agenda


PAGE 27 Agenda




nourishment) only as a last resort where coastal erosion presents an imminent threat to public safety or existing buildings and structures, and all of the following apply: (a) the property cannot

reasonably be relocated or abandoned, and

(b) any coastal protection work to protect private property is located as far landward as practicable and on the lot containing the property to the maximum extent reasonable, and

(c) the coastal protection work mitigates any increase in coastal hazard risk for adjacent areas.

2.4 Local Planning Instrument Assessment – Moreton Bay Regional Council Planning Scheme

An assessment against the relevant parts of the planning scheme is set out below.

2.4.1 Strategic Framework An assessment against the Strategic Framework is not required. 2.4.2 Assessment of Applicable Codes

2.4.2.1 Code Compliance Summary

The assessment below identifies how the development proposal complies (subject to the application of any recommended conditions of approval) with the applicable codes and where the development proposal; (a) proposes an alternative outcome to an Acceptable Outcome, satisfying or not

satisfying the corresponding Performance Outcome; and (b) proposes an outcome where no Acceptable Outcome is stated in the code and the

proposed Outcome does not satisfy the corresponding Performance Outcome.

Applicable Codes Compliance with Overall Outcomes

Performance Outcomes assessment is required

against Zone/ Local Plan Code

Rural Zone Code Yes No

PO1, PO3, PO10, PO26, PO76, PO77, PO78, PO99,

Overlay Codes


PAGE 28

Agenda


PAGE 28 Agenda


Coastal Hazard Yes

No

PO11 , PO14, PO28

Flood Hazard Yes

No

PO9, PO10, PO12, PO25

The assessment of the development proposal against the Performance Outcomes of the applicable code(s) is discussed below in section 5.2.2.

2.4.2.2 Performance Outcome Assessment

Performance Outcome Acceptable Outcome

Rural Zone Code

PO1 Development:

a. adds value to an existing rural activity, the natural environment, or a tourism attraction;

b. does not prejudice the ongoing operation of an existing or approved rural activity;

c. is adequately serviced with necessary infrastructure to meet on-site needs and requirements;

d. ensures adequate on-site stormwater and waste disposal is provided to avoid adverse impacts on water quality;

e. is a size and scale that maintains the low density, low intensity and open area landscape character anticipated in the Rural zone;

f. is designed, located and operated in a manner that avoids nuisance impacts on sensitive land uses;

g. requires minimal filling or excavation. Where this occurs, visual impacts are reduced through screening;

h. avoids being obtrusive or visually dominant by achieving low-set built form;

i. uses natural and non-reflective materials and colours consistent with existing and surrounding rural buildings and rural environment, except where materials such as netting, shade cloth and similar coverings are necessary for agricultural operations;

j. is not subject to a development constraint such as, but not limited to, flood, steep slope, waterway setback and significant vegetation; and

k. does not result in any instability, erosion or degradation of land, water, soil resource or

No acceptable outcome provided.


PAGE 29

Agenda


PAGE 29 Agenda



loss of natural, ecological or biological values.

Performance Outcome Assessment

The proposed facility is sited within the Medium Risk Coastal hazard area and the erosion prone area (as mapped under the Overlay) and as such, the proposed development is subject to a constraint being flooding and cannot comply with PO1 (j) above. Additionally the height of the monopole does not achieve a low built form as PO1 (h) requires. The proposal therefore requires assessment against the Overall Outcomes of the Rural Zone Code. Refer to section 5.2.3 PO3 Height of buildings and structures:

a. is consistent with the existing low rise, open area and low density character and amenity of the Rural zone and its precincts;

b. does not unduly impact on access to daylight, sunlight, overshadowing or privacy experienced by adjoining premises;

c. for buildings in the Hamlet precinct, the height of buildings reflect the individual character of the area;

d. does not adversely affect the operation of aviation facility at Mt Glorious by adopting design or on-site management measures that:

i. ensures a physical line-of-sight between transmitting or receiving devices.

ii. ensure electromagnetic fields do not interfere with the functioning of the aviation facility.

ensure electromagnetic fields do not interfere with the functioning of the aviation facility.

AO3 Building height and all structures do not exceed the maximum height identified on Overlay map - Building heights; except in the Hamlet precinct, where outbuildings, free standing car ports or garages do not exceed 3.5m


The applicant proposes an alternative solution to Acceptable Outcome AO3 of the Rural Zone Code. The proposed facility is 41 metres to the top of the overall height of the facility in lieu of the mapped maximum 8.5 metres building height limit (note: the Code does provide for Telecommunication Facilities up to 35m in the land use specific criteria of the Code AO76.2). The proposal includes a 41 metre (overall height) monopole construction facility, with panel antennas mounted on the headframe at the top of the tower and parabolic antennas located towards the top of the tower. The structure will not cause an impact in preventing access to daylight, sunlight, or introduce overshadowing to adjoining properties given the slim construction of the tower. The facility does not affect the operation of the aviation facility at Mt Glorious. The existing dense vegetation provides screening to the lower portion of the facility reducing the visual impact is with the remaining portion that is visible is being slimline. The proposed facility is part of the NBN network and is a “transmission hub site”. The facility will provide wireless internet connectivity to the surrounding residences as well as providing a critical


PAGE 30

Agenda


PAGE 30 Agenda



connection point between multiple adjoining fixed wireless facilities via the transmission network. To this end, the proposed facility is required to exceed the height of the existing vegetation to ensure line-of-sight to other facilities within the NBN network. Although the height of the structure is above that in the surrounding area this height and increased visibility is not considered to have a detrimental impact on the character of the surrounding area. As the proposal is not consistent with the existing low rise character, it cannot comply with aspects of Performance Outcome PO3. The proposal therefore requires assessment against the Overall Outcomes of the Rural Zone Code. Refer to section 5.2.3 below. PO10 On-site car parking associated with an activity provides safe and convenient on-site parking and manoeuvring to meet anticipated parking demand. Note - Refer to Planning scheme policy - Integrated transport assessment for guidance on how to achieve compliance with this outcome.

AO10 On-site car parking is provided in accordance Schedule 7 - Car parking.


The applicant does not propose to include any formalised car parking on site. Schedule 7 of the Planning Scheme requires one (1) space to be provided for visiting staff to the site. The proposed tower will not have regular visitors as it is unstaffed and only requires maintenance visits approximately 3-4 times a year. An access track is to extend off the existing assess way off Bishop Road. This access track may accommodate any vehicle that visits the site for maintenance and servicing of the facility. It is noted that the facility is only required to be visited a limited number of times a year and this is typically by a smaller service vehicle. . The proposed site layout allows adequate access and manoeuvring area and allows options for safe parking that meet anticipated demand. The alternative solution complies with Performance Outcome PO10 and is accepted in this instance. PO26 Safe access is provided for all vehicles required to access the site.

AO26.3 Access driveways, manoeuvring areas and loading facilities provide for service vehicles listed in Schedule 8 Service vehicle requirements for the relevant use. The on-site manoeuvring is to be in accordance with Schedule 8 Service vehicle requirements


Schedule 8 in the MBRC Planning Scheme specifies service vehicle requirements for a Telecommunications Facility as a Heavy Rigid Vehicle (HRV).The proposal has not provided for the use of a HRV. The applicant has advised that the facility will function on a continuously unstaffed basis and will generally require maintenance vehicles to attend three (3) times a year. This is typically performed with a 4WD or utility vehicle. Development Engineering considers that the proposed service vehicle is suitable for the proposed facility given that it is to function as an unmanned facility, infrequent maintenance (approximately 3-4 times per year) is necessary by smaller service vehicles, and adequate access and maneuvering area is available on site.


PAGE 31

Agenda


PAGE 31 Agenda



The alternative solution complies with Performance Outcome PO26 and is accepted in this instance. PO76 The Telecommunications facility(81) does not have an adverse impact on the visual amenity of a locality and is:

a. high quality design and construction; b. visually integrated with the surrounding

area; c. not visually dominant or intrusive; d. located behind the main building line; e. below the level of the predominant tree

canopy or the level of the surrounding buildings and structures;

f. camouflaged through the use of colours and materials which blend into the landscape;

g. treated to eliminate glare and reflectivity; h. landscaped;

otherwise consistent with the amenity and character of the zone and surrounding area.

AO76.2 In all other areas towers do not exceed 35m in height.


The proposal includes an overall height of 41 metres for the proposed NBN facility, being 6 metres taller than the 35 metres identified in Acceptable Outcome AO76.2. The tower protrudes above the level of the predominant tree canopy to ensure that a network connection to the surrounding transmission sites can be achieved. The recommendations of this report include a condition requiring the facility to be painted/treated to reduce glare and camouflage with the surrounding visual amenity The proposal includes a monopole construction for the proposed tower that assists in ensuring that the design of the development is not visually dominant or intrusive. Existing dense vegetation provides some screening and reducing visual dominance. This vegetation does not require any additional landscaping given the facility is to be located in the centre of the site. The facility, by its nature to deliver a signal to surrounding properties, cannot achieve a low set built form as it requires line-of-sight to surrounding NBN facilities in the regional network, and to the dwellings it may service. Given that the nature of a telecommunications facility requires clearance over vegetation in order to provide and maintain a reliable signal, the proposal cannot comply with part (e) of the Performance Outcome. An assessment against the Overall Outcomes is included in part 5.2.3 of this report (below). PO77 Lawful access is maintained to the site at all times that does not alter the amenity of the landscape or surrounding uses.

AO77 An Access and Landscape Plan demonstrates how 24 hour vehicular access will be obtained and maintained to the facility in a manner that is appropriate to the site’s context.



PAGE 32

Agenda


PAGE 32 Agenda

http://consult.moretonbay.qld.gov.au/portal/mbrcplanningschemeadopted?pointId=s1332743658181%23target-d160857e492290



The application did not include an access and landscape plan to demonstrate the 24hr vehicle access to the site. The proposal does include constructed access to the facility that will allow for lawful access at all times. The surrounding area will not be altered to accommodate the access. The alternative solution complies with Performance Outcome PO77 of the Rural Zone Code and is accepted in this instance PO78 All activities associated with the development occur within an environment incorporating sufficient controls to ensure the facility generates no audible sound at the site boundaries where in a residential setting.

AO78 All equipment comprising the Telecommunications facility(81) which produces audible or non-audible sound is housed within a fully enclosed building incorporating sound control measures sufficient to ensure no noise from this equipment can be heard, or felt at the site boundary.


The applicant proposes an alternative solution to Acceptable Outcome AO78 of the Rural Zone Code. The proposed air-conditioning units are to be housed within “outdoor equipment units” within the NBN lease area in lieu of buildings. The recommendations of this report include a condition requiring all equipment including air-conditioners to be attenuated to ensure noise emitted by the facility is suitably attenuated. The proposal, subject to the inclusion of the recommended conditions, complies with Performance Outcome PO78. PO99 Development avoids locating in a High Value Area or a Value Offset Area. Where it is not practicable or reasonable for development to avoid establishing in these areas, development must ensure that:

a. the quality and integrity of the biodiversity and ecological values inherent to a High Value Area and a Value Offset Area is maintained and not lost or degraded;

b. on-site mitigation measures, mechanisms or processes are in place demonstrating the quality and integrity of the biodiversity and ecological values inherent to a High Value Area and a Value Offset Area are maintained. For example, this can be achieved through replacement, restoration or rehabilitation planting as part of any proposed covenant, the development of a Vegetation Management Plan, a Fauna Management Plan, and any other on-site mitigation options identified in the Planning scheme policy - Environmental areas*.

* Editor's note - This is not a requirement for an environmental offset under the Environmental Offsets Act 2014.



PAGE 33

Agenda


PAGE 33 Agenda

http://consult.moretonbay.qld.gov.au/portal/mbrcplanningschemeadopted?pointId=s1332743658181%23target-d160857e492290




The application proposes an access track to the facility which requires a small amount of vegetation clearing within the mapped MSES area. As the proposal does not comply with this Performance Outcome, an assessment against the Overall Outcomes is required and discussed below in section 5.2.3 of this report.


Coastal Hazard Overlay Code

PO11 Development is:

a. limited in the High risk storm tide inundation area to avoid the intolerable risk of the coastal hazard;

b. managed in the Erosion Prone Area and Medium risk storm tide inundation area to mitigate the tolerable risk of the coastal hazard.

Note - The overall outcomes of this code identify the development outcomes which are intended so as to avoid the intolerable or tolerable risk of the coastal hazard applicable to the premises in the relevant sub-categories of the Coastal planning area.

No acceptable outcome provided


The proposal is located within the Erosion Prone and Medium Risk storm tide inundation area. The proposal demonstrates compliance of the proposal with the Performance Outcome PO11 to manage development in these areas to mitigate tolerable risk of the coastal hazard. It demonstrates compliance through the following: • The nbn compound will have a gravel finish to aid in the dissipation of stormwater on site. • The proposed external cabinets will be located on a raised platform above the defined flood

level. • The proposed development does not involve the storing or manufacturing of hazardous

materials and will not increase the risk or impact of natural hazards. • No filling is required or proposed. • The proposed facility is not a vulnerable use. • The proposed facility has been strategically located on relatively flat land, where no filling is

required. The proposal will not adversely impact on water or soil resources as it will not cause the contamination or degradation of these resources

PO14 Development is resilient to a coastal hazard event by ensuring design and built form account for the potential risks of the coastal event (including storm tide inundation, wave action and coastal erosion).

AO14.1 Development in the Erosion Prone Area, High risk storm tide inundation area and Medium risk storm tide inundation area is in accordance with the following: a. a site based coastal engineering report from

a suitably qualified Registered Professional Engineer Queensland which identifies the


PAGE 34

Agenda


PAGE 34 Agenda



Note - New buildings not on land already filled to the flood planning level will require a structural engineering design capable of withstanding the nature of the hazard(s) to which the building will be subject, to be supported a report (or multiple reports) prepared by a Registered Professional Engineer Queensland that identifies the coastal hazard and the structural approach to be utilised. Information on the risk of a coastal hazard for premises in the Coastal planning area is available on Council’s Flood Check website via https://www.moretonbay.qld.gov.au/floodcheck/. Note - Reporting to be prepared in accordance with Planning scheme policy - Flood hazard, Coastal hazard and Overland flow.

coastal hazard and the structural approach to be utilised for the building work;

b. a structural engineering design which ensures that the building work and any associated earthworks are capable of withstanding the nature of the coastal hazard event to which the building will be subject.

Note - New buildings not on land already filled to the flood planning level will require a structural engineering design capable of withstanding the nature of the hazard(s) to which the building will be subject, to be supported a report (or multiple reports) prepared by a Registered Professional Engineer Queensland that identifies the coastal hazard and the structural approach to be utilised. Information on the risk of a coastal hazard for premises in the Coastal planning area is available on Council’s Flood Check website via https://www.moretonbay.qld.gov.au/floodcheck/. Note - Reporting to be prepared in accordance with Planning scheme policy - Flood hazard, Coastal hazard and Overland flow.


The applicant proposes an alternative solution to Acceptable Outcome AO14.1 as the facility is located within the mapped Erosion Prone Area and a report prepared by a Coastal engineer was not submitted with the application. The proposal presents the following however, which demonstrates compliance of the proposal with the Performance Outcome PO14: • There are no adverse local drainage impacts, flooding and coastal impacts on other

premises, public land, watercourses, roads or infrastructure or impacts on natural riverine and coastal processes or flood warning times given the proposal is for the construction of a pole and elevated platform and the foundation will be flush with the ground level and therefore no changes in the contours are proposed and mitigates the coastal erosion risk;

• The proposed external cabinets will be located on a raised platform above the defined flood level.

• The proposed facility has been strategically located on relatively flat land, where no filling is required. The proposal will not adversely impact on water or soil resources as it will not cause the contamination or degradation of these resources.

• The proposed development is a non-habitable use and will not increase the number of people living or working in the area. Following construction, the proposed facility would operate unmanned and remotely, with the exception of infrequent maintenance visits (approximately 3-4 times per year).

• All works will be undertaken in accordance with the erosion and sediment control measures detailed in nbn’s construction specifications.

• The proposed development does not involve the storing or manufacturing of hazardous materials.

• The facility is not a vulnerable land use.


PAGE 35

Agenda


PAGE 35 Agenda

https://www.moretonbay.qld.gov.au/floodcheck/

https://www.moretonbay.qld.gov.au/floodcheck/



PO28 Development involving community infrastructure is not located in the Erosion Prone Area or High risk storm tide inundation area.



The proposal does not comply with Performance Outcome PO28 of the code as Community Infrastructure is defined as (contained with Administration definitions) the following: “A use that provides essential services vital to the wellbeing of the community, including:

a. police and emergency services facilities including emergency shelters; b. hospitals and associated institutions; c. facilities for the storage of valuable records or items of cultural or historical

significance; d. State controlled roads; e. railway lines, stations and associated facilities; f. aeronautical facilities; g. communication network facilities; h. works of an electricity entity under the Electrical Safety Act 2002,

Electricity Act 1994 and Electricity Regulation 2006; i. water cycle management infrastructure.”

As such, the proposed facility constitutes a development that is “community infrastructure” within the Erosion prone area. The proposal cannot comply with the Performance Outcome. An assessment against the Overall Outcomes is included in 5.2.3 of this report (below).


Flood Hazard Overlay Code

PO9 Development is:

a. limited in the High risk flood hazard area included in the Limited development zone to avoid the extremely unacceptable intolerable risk of the flood hazard;

b. managed in the High risk flood hazard area not included in the Limited development zone to mitigate the unacceptable intolerable risk of the flood hazard;

c. managed in the other sub-categories of the Flood planning area to mitigate the tolerable risk of the flood hazard.

Note - The overall outcomes of this code identify the development outcomes which are intended so as to avoid or mitigate the intolerable or tolerable risk of the flood hazard applicable to the premises in the relevant sub-categories of the Flood planning area.

No acceptable outcome provided



PAGE 36

Agenda


PAGE 36 Agenda



The site is identified as being subject to the Medium Risk Hazard and performance criteria requires that development is managed to mitigate the tolerable risk of the flood hazard. The overall outcome (c) of the code identifies development outcomes that manage and mitigate tolerable risk of the flood hazard. The proposed development achieves the intent of this overall outcome as it is a Material Change of use for a non-residential use not involving a vulnerable land use. Furthermore development does not increase risk to people, property or infrastructure as external cabinets are to be located on raised platforms above the defined flood level, proposed development does not involve storing of manufacturing of hazardous material and being a non-habitable use the number of people living or working in the area will not increase. The proposal demonstrates compliance with PO9. PO10 Development maintains personal safety at all times, such that:

a. a vulnerable land use (flood and coastal) is not located in the High risk flood hazard area or Medium risk flood hazard area;

b. new buildings are not located in the High risk flood hazard area included in the Limited development zone;

c. a residential accommodation building is located in the following:

i. Balance flood planning area; or ii. the Medium risk area where

located in the Medium risk storm tide inundation area of the Coastal hazard overlay or Balance coastal planning area of the Coastal hazard overlay ;

d. evacuation capability from the development or other premises is not hindered or made more complicated and there is no significant additional burden placed on emergency services personnel;

e. the isolation of persons in the Defined Flood Event is avoided.



The proposed development demonstrates compliance with PO10 through the following: • Proposed development is not considered a vulnerable land use • The subject site is not located in the limited development zone • No residential building is proposed • No significant burden is placed on emergency service personnel, nor does development

impact on evacuation capabilities\ • Proposed development will not result in isolation in Defined flood Event PO12 Development ensures that where earthworks alone cannot ensure the development achieves the flood planning level in Table 8.2.2.3 ‘Flood planning level for a habitable floor (residential development) and a non-habitable floor (non-

No acceptable outcome specified.


PAGE 37

Agenda


PAGE 37 Agenda

http://consult.moretonbay.qld.gov.au/portal/mbrcplanningschemecommenced?pointId=s1414726382511%23ID-571945-TABLE-8.2.2.3





residential development) and levels for hazardous chemicals’, a building is designed and constructed using pier and pole construction to achieve the required flood immunity in the Defined Flood Event.


Compliance with PO12 is achieved as the proposed development utilises pier and pole construction techniques to meet storm tide immunity.

PO25 Development for community infrastructure is not located in the High risk flood hazard area or Medium risk flood hazard area.

No acceptable outcome specified.


The proposal does not comply with Performance Outcome PO28 of the code as Community Infrastructure is defined as (contained with Administration definitions) including community network faculties. As such, the proposed facility constitutes a development that is “community infrastructure” within the Medium Risk Flood Hazard Area. The proposal cannot comply with the Performance Outcome. An assessment against the Overall Outcomes is included in 5.2.3 of this report (below).

2.4.2.3 Overall Outcome Assessment

The development proposal does not comply with Performance Outcome PO1, PO3, PO76, PO99 of the Rural Zone Code, PO28 of the Coastal Hazard Overlay Code and PO25 of the Flood Hazard Overlay Code. Therefore, the proposal is required to be assessed against the applicable Overall Outcomes of the code as follows;

Rural Zone Code - Section 6.2.10

Overall Outcomes - Rural Zone Complies Y/N Comments

a. A wide range of rural uses, as identified in the table below, are established.

Y A telecommunications facility is identified in the table of uses contemplated for the Rural zone.

b. Rural activities and primary production activities are protected from intrusion by incompatible development.

Y The site is currently used for a domestic residential dwelling house, which will be maintained as part of the development. The proposal does not impact on the rural activities or primary production activities that may be carried out in the surrounding area.


PAGE 38

Agenda


PAGE 38 Agenda




c. Intensive rural activities such as animal keeping, aquaculture, and intensive animal industry:

i. provide appropriate separation distance to sensitive land uses;

ii. avoid odour, dust, noise and visual impacts on sensitive land uses;

iii. avoid adversely affecting water quality in waterways and water catchments; and

iv. are not located adjacent to sensitive land uses or land zoned for residential and rural residential purposes.

N/A Intensive animal keeping, aquaculture and intensive animal husbandry are not proposed.

d. Residential uses are limited to a single dwelling house per allotment. A secondary dwelling is permitted provided it functions and appears subordinate to the principal dwelling house.

Y The existing residential dwelling is lawful and no additional dwellings are proposed. The existing dwelling will be maintained as part of the development.

e. A range of housing options provide short-term accommodation for tourists in proximity to tourist attractions.

N/A Not proposed.

f. Accommodation for rural workers is provided on or in close proximity to rural activities.

N/A Not proposed.

g. Active and passive outdoor recreational opportunities for residents and visitors to the region are established.

N/A Not proposed and will not impact on the operation of surrounding existing uses.

h. Intensification of existing and new commercial and retail development does not occur.

N/A Not proposed.

i. Development maintains the open area character and scenic amenity, including the low density, low intensity and dispersed built form which defines the rural place type.

Y The proposed facility consists of a 40m tower (when measured from the pad) with a total overall height of 41m (when measured from the ground) inclusive of the panel antennas, that is of a slim monopole construction that allows for visual permeability and a reduction of recognition within the landscape. It is acknowledged that the structure is significantly taller than the existing surrounding built form, however this impact has been reduced by the siting of the facility in proximity to the


PAGE 39

Agenda


PAGE 39 Agenda


existing mature trees to help reduce the visual recognition. The proposed facility does not alter the open area character and is located so as to maintain the form and amenity that defines the rural place type.

j. Development does not adversely affect the operation of aviation facilities at Mt Glorious (See Overlay map - Infrastructure buffers). This aviation facility comprises a VHF beacon.

N/A Development will not compromise the facility.

k. Development does not result in adverse or nuisance impacts on adjoining properties or the wider rural environment. Any adverse or nuisance impacts are contained and internalised to the lot through location, design, operation and on-site management practices.

Y The proposal contains all impacts on-site including traffic access and parking. The proposed tower has been designed in the form of a slim monopole construction that allows for visual permeability and reduces recognition within the landscape. While the proposed tower may be visible from some surrounding vantage points, given the varied topography of the surrounding area combined with the existing dense vegetation, the visual impact is consistent with a low density character of the Rural Zone.

l. Development generating high volumes of traffic or involving heavy vehicle traffic movements is located on roads of a standard and capacity to accommodate traffic demand.

N/A The proposal will not have high traffic volumes and the existing roads are of sufficient standard.

m. Development does not result in the establishment of industrial activities, other than rural industry.

N/A Industry uses are not proposed.

n. General works associated with the development achieves the following:

i. a high standard of electricity, telecommunications, roads, sewerage, water supply and street lighting services is provided to new developments to meet the current and future needs of users of the site;

ii. the development manages stormwater to:

Y The proposed works include the provision of a new underground electricity line that will maintain the amenity on site. Stormwater is not impacted by the development.


PAGE 40

Agenda


PAGE 40 Agenda


A. ensure the discharge of stormwater does not adversely affect the quality, environmental values or ecosystem functions of downstream receiving waters;

B. prevent stormwater contamination and the release of pollutants;

C. maintain or improve the structure and condition of drainage lines and riparian areas;

D. avoid off-site adverse impacts from stormwater.

iii. the development does not result in unacceptable impacts on the capacity on the capacity and safety of the external road network;

iv. the development ensures the safety, efficiency and useability of access ways and parking areas;

v. site works including earthworks are managed to be safe and have minimal impacts on adjoining or adjacent premises, the streetscape or the environment.

The development will not generate traffic numbers that will unacceptably impact the safety and capacity of the external road network. The proposed access to and from the site is safe and efficient. A detailed outline of the construction process has been included within the application and complies.

o. Activities associated with the use do not cause a nuisance by way of aerosols, fumes, light, noise, odour, particles or smoke.

N/A The proposed telecommunications tower will not emit fumes, light, odour, particles or smoke. The recommendations of this report include a condition to ensure the ongoing compliance with this requirement.

p. Noise generating uses are designed, sited and constructed to minimise the transmission of noise to appropriate levels and do not cause environmental harm or nuisance.

N/A The use is not a noise-generating use.

q. Noise sensitive uses are designed, sited and constructed so as not to be subject to levels of noise expected from rural activities.

N/A The use is not a noise-sensitive use.

r. Development in a Water supply buffer is undertaken in a manner which contributes to the maintenance and enhancement where possible of water quality to protect the drinking water and

N/A Development is not within a water supply buffer.


PAGE 41

Agenda


PAGE 41 Agenda


aquatic ecosystem environmental values in those catchments.

s. Development avoids areas subject to constraint, limitation, or environmental value. Where development cannot avoid these identified areas, it responds by: i. adopting a 'least risk, least impact'

approach when designing, siting and locating development in any area subject to a constraint, limitation or environmental value to minimise the potential risk to people, property and the environment;

ii. ensuring no further instability, erosion or degradation of the land, water or soil resource;

iii. when located within a Water buffer area, complying with the Water Quality Vision and Objectives contained in the Seqwater Development Guidelines: Development Guidelines for Water Quality Management in Drinking Water Catchments 2012.

iv. maintaining, restoring and rehabilitating environmental values, including natural, ecological, biological, aquatic, hydrological and amenity values, and enhancing these values through the provision of planting and landscaping, and facilitating safe wildlife movement and connectivity through:

A. the provision of replacement, restoration, rehabilitation planting and landscaping;

B. the location, design and management of development to avoid or minimise adverse impacts on ecological systems and processes;

C. the requiring of environmental offsets in accordance with the Environmental Offsets Act 2014.

v. protecting native species and protecting and enhancing species habitat;

vi. protecting and preserving the natural, aesthetic, architectural

Y The development cannot avoid an area of constraint as the entire site is mapped with bushfire hazard and environmental areas overlays. The development requires the removal of approximately 250sqm of vegetation and the majority of this clearing would be required to site the proposed compound which is located outside of the area mapped as MSES.. The siting of the access track and the facility has sought to reduce the amount of clearing required. Given the relatively small footprint of the nbn compound, it is not considered to adversely impact on the environmental values of the site and wider area. The proposal incorporates appropriate measures to reduce the risk of natural hazards


PAGE 42

Agenda


PAGE 42 Agenda


historic and cultural values of significant trees, places, objects and buildings of heritage and cultural significance;

vii. establishing effective separation distances, buffers and mitigation measures associated with identified infrastructure to minimise adverse effects on sensitive land uses from odour, noise, dust and other nuisance generating activities;

viii. establishing, maintaining and protecting appropriate buffers to waterways, wetlands, native vegetation and significant fauna habitat;

ix. ensuring it promotes and does not undermine the ongoing viability, integrity, operation, maintenance and safety of identified infrastructure;

x. ensuring effective and efficient disaster management response and recovery capabilities;

xi. where located in an overland flow path:

A. development siting, built form, layout and access responds to the risk presented by the overland flow and minimises risk to personal safety;

B. development is resilient to the impacts of overland flow by ensuring the siting and design accounts for the potential risks to property associated with the overland flow;

C. development does not impact on the conveyance of the overland flow for any event up to and including the 1% AEP for the fully developed upstream catchment;

D. development directly, indirectly and cumulatively avoid an increase in the severity of overland flow and potential for damage on the premises or other premises, public lands, watercourses, roads or infrastructure.


PAGE 43

Agenda


PAGE 43 Agenda


t. Development in the Rural Zone includes

one or more of the following: ….Telecommunications Facility

Y Contemplated as a use to be included within the zone.

Coastal Hazard Overlay Code - Section 8.2.1

Overall Outcomes - Coastal Hazard Overlay

Complies Y/N Comments

a. Development in the Erosion Prone Area manages and mitigates the tolerable risk of the coastal hazard by ensuring that: i. a material change of use is only

for a use which: A. avoids the coastal erosion

risk; or B. manages the coastal

erosion risk through a strategy of planned retreat; or

C. mitigates the coastal erosion risk if there are no adverse local drainage impacts, flooding and coastal impacts on other premises, public land, watercourses, roads or infrastructure or impacts on natural riverine and coastal processes or flood warning times;

ii. reconfiguring a lot for boundary realignment only occurs if the tolerable risk of coastal hazard to people, property and infrastructure located on the premises and other premises is not increased and where practicable the tolerable risk of coastal hazard for future occupants is mitigated;

iii. reconfiguring a lot for creating lots by subdividing another lot is only for the purposes of Park or Permanent plantation unless all resultant lots provide the required minimum lot size outside the Erosion Prone Area;

iv. building work complies with the flood planning level, engineering design and resilient materials requirements;

v. earthworks are avoided as far as practicable and are only for the purpose of mitigating the coastal

Y

N/A

N/A

N/A

Y

The proposal is located within the Erosion Prone Area. There are no adverse local drainage impacts, flooding and coastal impacts on other premises, public land, watercourses, roads or infrastructure or impacts on natural riverine and coastal processes or flood warning times given the proposal is for the construction of a telecommunication tower on an elevated platform. The foundation will be flush with the ground level and therefore no changes in the contours are proposed and the coastal erosion risks are mitigated. Earthworks will only be required for the installation of piers for the elevated platform and foundation for the pole, which will have no adverse impact on the coastal erosion risk as these disturbed areas will be stabilised upon completion of works.


PAGE 44

Agenda


PAGE 44 Agenda


Coastal Hazard Overlay Code - Section 8.2.1 Overall Outcomes - Coastal Hazard Overlay


hazard or where associated with a previous approval;

b. Development in the High risk storm tide inundation area included in the Limited development zone avoids the extremely unacceptable intolerable risk of the coastal hazard by ensuring that: i. a material change of use is only

for the following uses if the intolerable risk of coastal hazard to people, property and infrastructure located on the premises and other premises is avoided: A. Outdoor sport and

recreation; or B. Park; or C. Permanent plantation; or D. Cropping (where involving

forestry for wood production);

ii. reconfiguring a lot for boundary realignment only occurs if the intolerable risk of coastal hazard to people, property and infrastructure located on the premises and other premises is not increased and where practicable the intolerable risk of coastal hazard for future occupants is mitigated;

iii. reconfiguring a lot for creating lots by subdividing another lot is only for the purposes of Park or Permanent plantation or ensures that lots have sufficient area outside of the zone for development consistent in the adjoining zone and precinct;

iv. building work is less than 50m2 in area and associated with a use in paragraph (i);

v. earthworks do not occur except where associated with a previous approval.

N/A The facility is not sited within the mapped High Risk Storm tide area or included within the limited development zone.

c. Development in the High risk storm tide inundation area not included in the Limited development zone, avoids the unacceptable intolerable risk of the coastal hazard by ensuring that:

N/A The facility is not sited within the mapped High Risk Storm tide area.


PAGE 45

Agenda


PAGE 45 Agenda




i. a material change of use is only for the following uses if consistent with the overall outcomes of the applicable zone and precinct and the intolerable risk of coastal hazard to people, property and infrastructure located on the premises and other premises is avoided: A. Dwelling house; or B. Outdoor sport and

recreation; or C. Park; or D. Permanent plantation; or E. Cropping (where involving

forestry for wood production); or

F. Tourist park; or G. Home based business;

ii. reconfiguring a lot for boundary realignment only occurs if the intolerable risk of coastal hazard to people, property and infrastructure located on the premises and other premises is not increased and where practicable the intolerable risk of coastal hazard for future occupants is mitigated;

iii. reconfiguring a lot for creating lots by subdividing another lot is only for the following: A. if in the Rural zone, where

consistent with the overall outcomes of the applicable zone and precinct; or

B. if in the Rural residential zone , residential lots provide the required minimum lot size outside the Erosion Prone Area, High risk storm tide inundation area or Medium risk storm tide inundation area of the Coastal planning area; or

C. if in any other zone, for the purposes of Park or Permanent plantation;



PAGE 46

Agenda


PAGE 46 Agenda





d. Development in the Medium risk storm tide inundation area manages and mitigates the tolerable risk of the coastal hazard by ensuring that: i. a material change of use is only

for uses consistent with the overall outcomes of the applicable zone and precinct if the use is not a vulnerable land use (flood and coastal) and the risk to people, property and infrastructure located on the premises and other premises is avoided or mitigated;

ii. reconfiguring a lot for boundary realignment only occurs if the risk of coastal hazard to people, property and infrastructure located on the premises and other premises is not increased and where practicable the risk of coastal hazard for future occupants is mitigated;

iii. reconfiguring a lot for creating lots by subdividing another lot is only for the following: A. in the Rural zone, where

consistent with the overall outcomes of the applicable zone and precinct; or

B. in the Centre zone, Industry zone, or Recreation and open space zone, where not for the purpose of a vulnerable use (flood and coastal) and consistent with the overall outcomes of the applicable zone and precinct; or

C. in the Rural residential zone, where the minimum lot size for each rural residential lot is provided outside the High risk storm tide inundation area or Medium risk storm tide inundation area; or

D. in all other zones, where:

Y

N/A

N/A

The proposed Material Change of use is for a Telecommunications Facility that is consistent with the Rural Zone Code and does not constitute a vulnerable use.


PAGE 47

Agenda


PAGE 47 Agenda




i. all resultant lots are located outside the High risk storm tide inundation area or Medium risk storm tide inundation area other than those for the purposes of Park or Permanent plantation; or

ii. for a lot on a building format plan under the Land Title Act 1994 which is subject to a community titles scheme under the Body Corporate and Community Management Act 1997 and is associated with a material of use.


v. earthworks only occur if: A. in the General residential

zone, Centre zone, Community facilities zone, Recreation and open space zone, Industry zone, Township zone or Emerging community zone;

B. filling raises the ground level to as a minimum the Year 2100 Highest Astronomical Tide level;

C. there are no adverse local drainage impacts, flooding and coastal impacts on other premises, public land, watercourses, roads or infrastructure or impacts on natural riverine and coastal processes or flood warning times.

N/A

Y

Earthworks are required only for the installation of piers for the elevated platform and foundation for the pole, which will have no adverse impact on the coastal erosion risk as these disturbed areas will be stabilised upon completion of works.

e. Development in the Balance coastal planning area manages and mitigates the tolerable risk of the coastal hazard by ensuring that: i. a material change of use is only

for uses consistent with the overall outcomes of the applicable zone and precinct if

N/A The site is not mapped within the balance area.


PAGE 48

Agenda


PAGE 48 Agenda




the risk to people, property and infrastructure located on the premises and other premises is avoided or mitigated;

ii. reconfiguring a lot is consistent with the overall outcomes of the applicable zone and precinct;

iii. building work complies with the flood planning level and resilient material requirements;

iv. earthworks only occur if: A. in the General residential

zone, Centre zone, Community facilities zone, Recreation and open space zone, Industry zone, Township zone or Emerging community zone;

B. filling raises the ground level to as a minimum the Defined flood event;

C. there are no adverse local drainage impacts, flooding and coastal impacts on other premises, public land, watercourses, roads or infrastructure or impacts on natural riverine and coastal processes or flood warning times.

f. Development in the Coastal planning area: i. supports and does not unduly

burden the disaster management response and recovery capacity and capabilities during and after a significant coastal hazard event;

ii. provides for efficient evacuation of on-site persons and facilitates direct and simple access for evacuation personnel and resources during a coastal hazard event, while ensuring development does not hinder or place additional complexities upon evacuation activities for other premises;

iii. avoids isolation of persons during a coastal hazard event up to and including the Defined Flood Event;

Y

Y

Y

The proposal does not obstruct the current evacuation methods of the site or surrounding area. The development does not hinder any evacuation activity. The proposal does not increase the number of persons living within the area.


PAGE 49

Agenda


PAGE 49 Agenda




iv. adopts siting, built form, layout, and access (including evacuation access) arrangements that respond to the risk of the coastal hazard and minimise risk to personal safety in all coastal hazard events up to and including the Defined Flood Event;

v. is resilient to a coastal hazard event by ensuring the siting and design of development accounts for the potential risks to property associated with the coastal hazard event;

vi. directly, indirectly and

cumulatively avoids an increase in the severity of a coastal hazard event and potential for damage on the premises or to other premises;

vii. involving essential community

infrastructure remains functional during and immediately after a coastal hazard event up to and including the Defined Flood Event;

viii. ensures that essential building

services or services essential for the development are designed, located and operated to minimise the risk of the coastal hazard to people, damage to property, disruption to building function and the re-establishment time after a coastal hazard event;

ix. avoids the accidental release of hazardous materials as a result of a coastal hazard event;

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N/A

There are no adverse local drainage impacts, flooding and coastal impacts on other premises, public land, watercourses, roads or infrastructure or impacts on natural riverine and coastal processes or flood warning times given the proposal is for the construction of a telecommunications facility on an elevated platform. The components of the facility are elevated to the defined flood level with materials of high water resistance to be utilised. Therefore, the facility is able to remain functional during and after a coastal hazard event. The facility will be constructed from materials of high water resistance to ensure it remains functional during and after a coastal hazard event. The facility does not rely upon services other than electricity. The facility is in proximity to the existing electricity supply and minimal disruption to the existing service is likely. The siting of the facility is within an existing cleared area and can be accessed up to and immediately after being subject to a coastal hazard event. The facility location does not impact the carrying out of future coastal hazard mitigation measures.


PAGE 50

Agenda


PAGE 50 Agenda




x. maintains natural processes and the protective function of landforms and vegetation;

xi. does not impact adversely on the ability for future coastal hazard mitigation measures to be implemented on other premises.

Y

Y

Flood Hazard Overlay Code Section 8.2.2

Overall Outcomes Complies Y/N Comments

a. Development in the Medium risk area manages and mitigates the tolerable risk of flood hazard by ensuring that: i. a material change of use is only for

the following uses if consistent with the overall outcomes of the applicable zone and precinct and the risk to people, property and infrastructure located on the premises and other premises is avoided or mitigated: A. Dwelling house; or B. Outdoor sport and recreation;

or C. Park; or D. Permanent plantation; or E. Cropping (where involving

forestry for wood production); or

F. Tourist park; or G. Home based business; or H. Non-residential uses where not

involving a vulnerable land use (flood and coastal).

ii. reconfiguring a lot for boundary realignment only occurs if the risk of flood hazard to people, property and infrastructure located on the premises and other premises is not increased and where practicable the risk of flood hazard for future occupants is mitigated;

iii. reconfiguring a lot for creating lots by subdividing another lot is only for the following: A. in the Rural zone, Centre zone,

Industry zone, Recreation and open space zone, or Township zone, where not for a residential purpose or

Y N/A N/A N/A

The development is sited within the Medium Risk area and is for a Material Change of Use for a non-residential use that does not involve a vulnerable land use. Proposal does not seek approval of a Reconfiguring a Lot. Proposal does not seek approval of a Reconfiguring a Lot.


PAGE 51

Agenda


PAGE 51 Agenda


vulnerable use (flood and coastal) and consistent with the overall outcomes of the existing zone and precinct;

B. in the Rural residential zone, where the minimum lot size for each rural residential lot is provided outside the High risk or Medium risk area;

C. in any other zone, where all resultant lots are located outside the High risk or Medium risk area other than those for the purposes of Park or Permanent plantation.



N/A Yes

The site is located within the General Residential Zone. Proposal does not seek approval of a Building Work. Filling not proposed within the mapped medium risk flood area.

Based on the assessment above, the proposal is consistent with all of the Overall Outcomes of the code(s) and is therefore taken to be consistent with the purposes of the code(s).

2.4.3 Non Standard Conditions None proposed.

2.5 Other Relevant Assessment

2.5.1 Infrastructure Charges

2.5.1.1 Trunk Infrastructure In accordance with section 4 of the Moreton Bay Regional Council Planning Scheme, the subject site is not located in the identified Priority Infrastructure Area. Infrastructure charges applying to the land, where applicable, are to be applied in accordance the Council’s Infrastructure Charges Resolution No. 4 commencing on 1 February 2016 (ICR).

2.5.1.1.1 Levied Charge In accordance with section 7 of the ICR, a Levied Charge is not applicable for Council’s Trunk Infrastructure Networks as the development proposal is Exempt. A Telecommunications Facility is classified as a Minor Use in accordance with the ICR 5. In accordance with the ICR 5, a Minor use has a nil charge. As such, an Infrastructure Charges Notice will not be issued with any development approval.

2.5.1.1.2 Levied Charge Offset or Refund As no charge is applicable, no credit will be applied.


PAGE 52

Agenda


PAGE 52 Agenda


2.5.1.1.3 Additional Trunk Infrastructure Costs

In accordance with section 650 of the Sustainable Planning Act 2009, an additional payment condition may be imposed if the proposed development; (a) generates infrastructure demand of more than what is required to service the

type or scale of the development assumed in the ICR, or (b) requires new trunk infrastructure earlier than when identified in the ICR; or (c) is located completely or partly outside the Priority Infrastructure Area and the development will impose additional trunk infrastructure costs on Council after taking into account the levied charge and any trunk infrastructure provided, or to be provided by the development. In this instance, having assessed the proposed development, it does not warrant the imposition of an additional payment condition.

2.5.2 Planning Scheme Policies None applicable. 2.5.3 Conflicts with Laws and Policies Not applicable in this instance. 2.5.4 Recording of particular approvals on the Moreton Bay Regional Council Planning Scheme Not Applicable in this instance. 2.5.5 Other Matters Further Approvals A building approval will be required for the erection of the monopole and associated footings. EME Report An Environmental Electromagnetic Energy (EME) Report was provided with the development application. This report demonstrates the maximum EME level calculated for the proposed systems at the site is 0.072% of the public exposure limit. This estimate is based on a worst-case scenario and in practice, exposures are usually lower due to factors such as location of buildings, trees and or features of the environment. The maximum EME levels are estimated in 360゜circular bands out to 500 metres from the base station. The nearest residence to the proposed facility is approximately 500 metres away. At a distance of 400 metres to 500 metres from the proposed facility, the estimated EME level is 0.044% of the public exposure limit. The EME report also details the estimated EME levels at the surrounding residences. These range from 0.0049% to 0.022% of the Public Exposure Limit. The EME report demonstrates the proposed facility will be operating within the allowable parameters in accordance with current practice guidelines.


PAGE 53

Agenda


PAGE 53 Agenda


2.6 Referrals

2.6.1 Concurrence Agencies Department of Infrastructure, Local Government and Planning The application was referred to the Department of Infrastructure, Local Government and Planning (DILGP) for the following; Matters relating to state controlled roads. Council was advised on 10 February 2017 that DILGP has no objection to the development application subject to a number of conditions being attached to Council’s Decision Notice. 2.6.2 Advice Agencies There were no Advice Agencies involved in assessing this application. 2.6.3 Third Party Agencies There were no Third Party Agencies involved in assessing this application. 2.6.4 Internal Referral

2.6.4.1 Development Engineering Service Vehicles PO26 refers to providing safe access for vehicles required to access the site. In particular, the related Acceptable Outcome requires access driveways, manoeuvring areas, and loading facilities to provide for service vehicles listed in Schedule 8 - Service vehicle requirements for the relevant use. Schedule 8 in the MBRC Planning Scheme specifies that the service vehicle requirements for a Telecommunications Facility is a Heavy Rigid Vehicle (HRV).The proposal has not provided for the use of a HRV. The applicant has advised that the facility will function on a continuously unstaffed basis and will generally require maintenance vehicles to attend three (3) times a year. This is typically performed with a 4WD or utility vehicle. Development Engineering considers that the proposed service vehicle is suitable for the proposed facility given that it is to function as an unmanned facility, infrequent maintenance (approximately 3-4 times per year) is necessary by smaller service vehicles, and adequate access and manoeuvring area is available on site and is not in conflict with the overall outcomes of the Rural zone. Flood hazard overlay The proposed telecommunications facility is located within the Medium risk flood hazard area in the Flood Hazard Overlay Code. The defined flood level for the specific facility location is 3.3m AHD. A Flood Planning Level is not applicable for the steel platform. The existing ground level is approximately 1.5m AHD and the applicant advises that the platform housing the cabinet will be elevated above the defined flood level. Given the infrastructure proposed (pole and elevated platform on piers), that no filling is required, the materials utilised for construction will be of high water resistance, and that upon completion of the foundation works disturbance to the area will be alleviated, Development Engineering considers that there will be minimal impacts on the water flow velocity or level, potential for erosion, scour or flood damage and any adverse impacts on drainage or flood storage capacity. Therefore, it is considered that the proposal complies with the Flood hazard overlay code.

2.7 Public Consultation

2.7.1 Public Notification Requirements under the Sustainable Planning Act 2009


PAGE 54

Agenda


PAGE 54 Agenda


(a) Public Notification was served on all adjoining landowners on 9 December 2016. (b) The development application was advertised in the Caboolture News on the 14 December 2016. (c) A notice in the prescribed form was posted on the relevant land on 14 December 2016 and

maintained for a period of 30 business days until 17 February 2017. 2.7.2 Submissions Received There were no submissions received against this application. 2.7.3 Notice of Compliance The Notice of Compliance was received by Council on 20 February 2017. The Notice of Compliance identifies that the public notification requirements for the development application were correctly undertaken in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 6, Part 4, Division 2 of the Sustainable Planning Act 2009.

3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

The applicant has appeal rights in accordance with the Sustainable Planning Act 2009. 3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan

Creating Opportunities: Well-planned growth - a sustainable and well-planned community.

3.3 Policy Implications The proposal is consistent with the existing MBRC Planning policies and relevant policies.

3.4 Risk Management Implications

Not applicable. 3.5 Delegated Authority Implications

Not applicable. 3.6 Financial Implications

a) In the event that an appeal is made to the Planning & Environment court against Council’s decision, the Council will incur additional costs in defending its position.

b) Permit conditions require infrastructure contributions to Council.

3.7 Economic Benefit Not applicable.


Not applicable. 3.9 Social Implications

Not applicable.

3.10 Consultation / Communication Refer to clause 2.7.


PAGE 55

Agenda


PAGE 55 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15421608 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 2.1 DA/32442/2016/V2U- MATERIAL CHANGE OF USE - DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS FACILITY AND OPERATIONAL WORKS - PRESCRIBED TIDAL WORKS - 1388-1458 PUMICESTONE ROAD, TOORBUL - DIVISION 1 #1 Locality Plan #2 Zoning Map #3 Proposed Plan #4 Referral Response


PAGE 56

Agenda


PAGE 56 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.1 - DA/32442/2016/V2U- MATERIAL CHANGE OF USE - DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS FACILITY AND OPERATIONAL WORKS - PRESCRIBED TIDAL WORKS - 1388-1458 PUMICESTONE ROAD, TOORBUL - DIVISION 1 (cont.)

#1 Locality Plan


PAGE 57

Agenda


PAGE 57 Agenda


#2 Zoning Map


PAGE 58

Agenda


PAGE 58 Agenda


#3 Proposed Plan


PAGE 59

Agenda


PAGE 59 Agenda



PAGE 60

Agenda


PAGE 60 Agenda



PAGE 61

Agenda


PAGE 61 Agenda



PAGE 62

Agenda


PAGE 62 Agenda


#4 Referral Response


PAGE 63

Agenda


PAGE 63 Agenda



PAGE 64

Agenda


PAGE 64 Agenda



PAGE 65

Agenda


PAGE 65 Agenda



PAGE 66

Agenda


PAGE 66 Agenda



PAGE 67

Agenda


PAGE 67 Agenda



PAGE 68

Agenda


PAGE 68 Agenda



PAGE 69

Agenda


PAGE 69 Agenda



PAGE 70

Agenda


PAGE 70 Agenda



PAGE 71

Agenda


PAGE 71 Agenda



PAGE 72

Agenda


PAGE 72 Agenda



PAGE 73

Agenda


PAGE 73 Agenda


ITEM 2.2 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - MAJOR AMENDMENT - PUBLIC NOTIFICATION - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 2 PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT Reference: A15359105 : 5 June 2017 - Refer Supporting Information A15413763

(provided separately) Responsible Officer: LF, Senior Strategic Planner (PED Strategic Planning) Executive Summary Council is expecting to receive approval from the Deputy Premier and Minister for Infrastructure, Local Government and Planning in early July 2017 to proceed to consultation on the proposed major amendment to the MBRC Planning Scheme. Once advised that it may proceed to consultation, Council must complete Step 6 of Statutory Guideline 01/16 Making and amending a local planning instrument. This includes complying with any conditions attached to the Minister’s approval to publicly consult, carrying out public consultation in accordance with the communication strategy provided to the Minister as part of state interest review and preparing a public notice to be placed in a locally circulating newspaper, on Council’s website and in Council’s Customer Service Centres. This report recommends Council comply with any specific conditions and proceed to public consultation on the proposed major amendment to the Planning Scheme as soon as possible after having been advised by the Minister to proceed to consultation. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION 1. That Council comply with any conditions provided by the Deputy Premier and Minister for

Infrastructure, Local Government and Planning.

2. That Council publicly consult on the proposed major amendment to Planning Scheme, in accordance with Statutory Guideline 01/16 Making and amending local planning instruments.

3. That the public consultation period for the proposed major amendment start the day after the notice

of the amendment appears in a local paper and run for a period of 30 business days (six weeks).

4. That the Chief Executive Officer be authorised to do all things specified in Statutory Guideline 01/16 Making and amending local planning instruments, to complete Step 6 of the process for making or amending a planning scheme.


PAGE 74

Agenda


PAGE 74 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.2 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - MAJOR AMENDMENT - PUBLIC NOTIFICATION - REGIONAL - A15359105 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background Council resolved to prepare a major amendment to the MBRC Planning Scheme at its meeting on 1 December 2015 and at its meeting on 30 August 2016 resolved to request a state interest review. State interest review comments were received on Friday 7 October 2016 and were responded to. Matters raised were outlined in a Council Briefing Note (A14255601) on 27 October 2016. All matters were resolved with a final response provided to the Department of Infrastructure, Local Government and Planning on 21 February 2017. The advancement of work relating to Emerging Community areas resulted in additional amendments being proposed and subsequently considered by the Department of Infrastructure, Local Government and Planning. These additional amendments were outlined in a Council workshop on 6 June 2017. 2. Explanation of Item With the receipt of advice from the Minister for Infrastructure, Local Government and Planning that Council may publicly consult on the proposed major amendment, Council must complete the actions, under Step 6 Process for making and amending a planning scheme of Statutory Guideline 01/16 Making and amending a local planning instrument, prior to commencing consultation. The actions under Step 6 Process for making and amending a planning scheme include: a. complying with any conditions imposed by the Minister;

b. carrying out consultation in accordance with any proposed communication strategy;

The communication strategy included: • placing ads in local newspapers; and • having a dedicated project page on Your Say Moreton Bay engagement website; and • PD News alerts; and • engagement with our Industry Reference Group; and • kiosks in the Council service centres; and • dedicated mailbox to take enquiries.

c. consulting for a period of not less than 30 business days; placing a notice including details of the proposed amendment, where the proposed amendment is available for inspection and purchase, that written submissions can be made, the timing of the consultation period, how further information can be obtained and the requirements of a properly made submission;

d. displaying the notice in the Council’s public office/s; and e. the notice being available on the Council’s website. The proposed amendments appear in a ‘track changes’ consultation version of the MBRC Planning Scheme and have been documented in tables that will be available during public consultation. Refer to the attachments to this report. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

The work to date on the major amendment has been undertaken in accordance with the Sustainable Planning Act 2009 and process prescribed in previous Statutory Guideline 04/14 and current Statutory Guideline 01/16. On 3 July 2017 the Planning Act 2016 (the Act) will commence and the SPA will be repealed. Section 286 of the Act specifies that if a process for making or amending a statutory instrument had started under the old Act (SPA) but had not ended before SPA was repealed, SPA continues to apply to the making or amending of the statutory instrument. However, the statutory instrument may be made or amended to include matters, or in a form, that the Minister is satisfied is consistent with the Act if the Minister is also satisfied the matters or the form does not substantially change the effect of the instrument. The Act applies to the statutory instrument as made or amended when the process has ended, as if the statutory instrument had been made or amended under the Act.


PAGE 75

Agenda


PAGE 75 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.2 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - MAJOR AMENDMENT - PUBLIC NOTIFICATION - REGIONAL - A15359105 (Cont.)

3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan

Creating Opportunities: Well-planned growth - a sustainable and well-planned community.

3.3 Policy Implications The proposed major amendment to the MBRC Planning Scheme update information, provide current policy direction and further guidance and clarity on how to interpret the intended scope and intent of provisions of the MBRC Planning Scheme.

3.4 Risk Management Implications Keeping the MBRC Planning Scheme up to date reduces the risk of inappropriate development occurring within the Region.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications Not applicable.

3.6 Financial Implications The consultation costs of the proposed amendments are provided for in the current budget.

3.7 Economic Benefit Keeping the MBRC Planning Scheme up to date assists in attracting appropriate development into the Region.

3.8 Environmental Implications Keeping the MBRC Planning Scheme up to date assists in maintaining the appropriate balance between protecting the environment and accommodating growth within the Region.

3.9 Social Implications

Keeping the MBRC Planning Scheme up to date assists in facilitating optimum social outcomes.

3.10 Consultation / Communication The proposed amendments have been discussed internally, with Council and with State Agencies. They are now proposed to go on public consultation for community feedback.


PAGE 76

Agenda


PAGE 76 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION (provided separately) Ref: A15413763 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 2.2 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - MAJOR AMENDMENT - PUBLIC NOTIFICATION - REGIONAL #1 MBRC Planning Scheme - Major Amendment (due to size constraints this document is provided separately)


PAGE 77

Agenda


PAGE 77 Agenda


ITEM 2.3 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - NEW AND MAJOR AMENDMENT TO PLANNING SCHEME POLICIES - PUBLIC NOTIFICATION - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 2 PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT Reference: A15360571 : 5 June 2017 - Refer Supporting Information fA638209

(provided separately) Responsible Officer: LF, Senior Strategic Planner (PED Strategic Planning) Executive Summary Concurrently with proposed major amendment, new Planning Scheme Policies (PSPs) and major amendments to existing PSPs are also proposed. These PSPs were presented at a Council workshop on 11 January 2017. As required by the Statutory Guideline 01/16 Making and amending a local planning instrument it is required for the new and proposed PSPs to go onto public notification. It is proposed that the PSPs will go on public consultation with the proposed major amendment to the planning scheme. This report recommends Council resolve to make new PSPs and amend existing PSPs, and publicly consult on these in accordance with Statutory Guideline 01/16 Making and amending local planning instruments. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION 1. That Council, in accordance with Step 1 for making and amending a planning scheme policy under

Statutory Guideline 01/16 Making and amending local planning instruments, decide to make new planning scheme policies and amend existing planning scheme policies as identified in this report.

2. That Council, in accordance with Step 3 publicly consult on the proposed new and amended planning scheme policies, in accordance with Statutory Guideline 01/16 Making and amending local planning instruments.

3. That the public consultation period for the proposed new and amended planning scheme policies run concurrently with the major amendment to the planning scheme and for a period of 30 business days.

4. That the Chief Executive Officer be authorised to do all things specified in Statutory Guideline 01/16 Making and amending local planning instruments, to complete Step 3 of the process for making or amending a planning scheme policy.


PAGE 78

Agenda


PAGE 78 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.3 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - NEW AND MAJOR AMENDMENT TO PLANNING SCHEME POLICIES - PUBLIC NOTIFICATION - REGIONAL - A15360571 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background On 1 December 2015 Council decided to commence a major amendment to the MBRC Planning Scheme. Since this time, planning officers have been working on the amendment which has included several workshops with Council as well as the State. On 1 September 2016, the amendment was sent to the Minister for consideration of a state interest review and to seek approval for Council to progress to public notification of the proposed amendment. Concurrently, officers have been working on proposed new and major amendments to existing planning scheme policies (PSPs). PSPs are documents contained in a Planning Scheme that support the Planning Scheme. The proposed new and amended PSPs were outlined in a Council Briefing Note (A14255601) on 27 October 2016. On 11 January 2017, Council officers presented an overview of the proposed new and amended PSPs. New PSPs and major amendments to PSPs are required to be publicly notified. It is intended that notification will be carried out concurrently with the major amendments to the Planning Scheme. 2. Explanation of Item Major amendments are proposed to 11 existing PSPs and 3 new PSPs are also proposed. These new PSPs and amendments to existing PSPs support the proposed major amendments to the Planning Scheme and the general operation of the PSPs. The proposed new and amended PSP requiring public consultation are: • Advertising devices • Centre and neighbourhood hub design • Environmental areas and corridors • Flood hazard, coastal hazard and overland flow • How to prepare a structure plan - New • Integrated design • Integrated transport assessment • Neighbourhood design • Noise • Operational works inspection, maintenance and bonding procedures • Residential design • Stormwater management • Structure Plan - Caboolture West - Area 1 - New • Township character - New The new and amended PSPs form attachments to this report. In accordance with the section 3 Making and amending a planning scheme policy of Statutory Guideline 01/16, there are various actions Council is required to undertake to propose a new PSP or make a major amendment to a PSP. These steps include: • Step 1 - Council decides to make a PSP or amend a PSP. • Step 2 - Council must prepare a proposed PSP and an explanatory statement about the proposed new

PSP and if proposing a major amendment, prepare explanatory statement about the amended PSP. • Step 3 - Council carries out public consultation for new PSP and any major amendments to PSP. Public consultation for a new or major amendment to a PSP is required for a minimum of 20 business days. The PSPs are intended to be on public consultation for the same period as major amendments to the planning scheme (30 business days), this will result in a longer consultation period than that required under Statutory Guideline 01/16. A notice must be prepared that includes details of the new and proposed major amendments, the purpose and general effect of the new and major amendments, where the new and proposed amended PSP are available for inspection and purchase, that written submissions can be made,


PAGE 79

Agenda


PAGE 79 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.3 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - NEW AND MAJOR AMENDMENT TO PLANNING SCHEME POLICIES - PUBLIC NOTIFICATION - REGIONAL - A15360571 (Cont.)

the timing of the consultation period, how further information can be obtained and the requirements of a properly made submission. As with the notice for major amendment to the Planning Scheme, the notice must be displayed in the Council’s public office/s and be available on the Council’s website. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

The work to date on the new and amended planning scheme policies has been undertaken in accordance with the Sustainable Planning Act 2009 (SPA) and process prescribed in previous Statutory Guideline 04/14 and current Statutory Guideline 01/16. On 3 July 2017 the Planning Act 2016 (the Act) will commence and the SPA will be repealed. Section 286 of the Act specifies that if a process for making or amending a statutory instrument had started under the old Act (SPA) but had not ended before SPA was repealed, SPA continues to apply to the making or amending of the statutory instrument. However, the statutory instrument may be made or amended to include matters, or in a form, that the Minister is satisfied is consistent with the Act if the Minister is also satisfied the matters or the form does not substantially change the effect of the instrument. The Act applies to the statutory instrument as made or amended when the process has ended, as if the statutory instrument had been made or amended under the Act.

3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan Creating Opportunities: Well-planned growth - a sustainable and well-planned community.

3.3 Policy Implications The proposed new and amended planning scheme policies update information, provide current policy direction and further guidance and clarity on how to interpret the intended scope and intent of provisions of the MBRC Planning Scheme.

3.4 Risk Management Implications Keeping the MBRC Planning Scheme up to date reduces the risk of inappropriate development occurring within the Region.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications Not applicable

3.6 Financial Implications The consultation costs of the proposed amendments are provided for in the current budget.

3.7 Economic Benefit Keeping the MBRC Planning Scheme up to date assists in attracting appropriate development into the Region.


Keeping the MBRC Planning Scheme up to date assists in maintaining the appropriate balance between protecting the environment and accommodating growth within the Region.


Keeping the MBRC Planning Scheme up to date assists in facilitating optimum social outcomes.

3.10 Consultation / Communication The proposed new and amended planning scheme policies have been discussed internally, with Council and with State Agencies. They are now proposed to go on public consultation for community feedback.


PAGE 80

Agenda


PAGE 80 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION (provided separately) Ref: A15413763 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 2.3 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - NEW AND MAJOR AMENDMENT TO PLANNING SCHEME POLICIES - PUBLIC NOTIFICATION - REGIONAL #1 Amendment to MBRC Planning Scheme - Consultation 2017 Planning Scheme Policies (due to size constraints these documents are provided separately)


PAGE 81

Agenda


PAGE 81 Agenda


ITEM 2.4 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - ALIGNMENT AMENDMENT TO NEW PLANNING ACT 2016 - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 2 PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT Reference: A15325297 : 30 May 2017 - Refer Supporting Information A15325322,

fA639859, A15325327, A15325333 (provided separately) Responsible Officer: LF, Senior Strategic Planner (PED Strategic Planning) Executive Summary From 3 July 2017, the Planning Act 2016 (the new Act) will replace the current Sustainable Planning Act 2009 (SPA). The new legislation will have an impact on Council’s existing planning scheme as well as the operations of its Planning and Economic Development Division (PEDD). Since the announcement of the new legislation, the PEDD has been preparing for this transition including the preparation of an alignment amendment to the current MBRC planning scheme. The purpose of this report is to obtain Council’s agreement as per the Minister’s Rules for making an alignment amendment for the adoption of an Alignment amendment to the MBRC Planning Scheme. All materials required to be submitted to the Minister are included as supporting information to this report. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION 1. That, in accordance with the mandatory process prescribed in the rules made by the Minister under

section 293 of the Planning Act 2016, Council: a) propose to make an alignment amendment to the MBRC Planning Scheme; b) adopt the proposed changes to the MBRC Planning Scheme outlined in the supporting

information to this report as an alignment amendment; and c) resolve that the alignment amendment outlined in the supporting information to this report is to

commence on the day that the Planning Act 2016 comes into effect being 3 July 2017.

2. That, after adoption of the alignment amendment, Council publish a public notice containing all of the information prescribed in the Minister’s alignment amendment rules.

3. That, after publishing the public notice, Council give the chief executive responsible for administering the Planning Act 2016 all of the information prescribed in the Minister’s Alignment amendment rules.


PAGE 82

Agenda


PAGE 82 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.4 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - ALIGNMENT AMENDMENT TO NEW PLANNING ACT 2016 - REGIONAL - A15325297 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background The coming into effect of the Planning Act 2016 will see changes in some planning processes and significant differences in the terminology that had remained relatively unaltered since the Integrated Planning Act was adopted in 1997. The State has acknowledged the need for planning schemes adopted under the Sustainable Planning Act 2009 continue to operate efficiently and effectively under the new regime. As such, it has deliberately made provision for local governments to undertake amendments that are aimed principally at aligning those existing planning schemes with the new processes and terminology of the new Act. Such changes are known as alignment amendments and are restricted in their scope by rules made by the Minister under section 293 of the new Act. The Minister’s rules set out the scope of changes to a planning scheme that can be made as an alignment amendment. Such changes are limited to:

• Improving and clarifying assessment benchmarks to ensure they are sufficiently robust to support the new code assessment decision rules;

• Reformatting or revising the structure of a planning scheme to improve its clarity or operation ; • Replacing terminology or language used in the planning scheme which will be inconsistent with that

used in the Planning Act 2016; • Changes of form not involving substantial changes of substance.

While Council can use the Minister’s rules now to make an alignment amendment to the MBRC Planning Scheme, the changes cannot take effect until after the new Act commences. Council was briefed on the new Act and proposed alignment amendment to the MBRC Planning Scheme at Council workshop held on 6 June 2017. 2. Explanation of Item The rules made by the Minister under section 293 of the new Act set out the abbreviated process to be used when undertaking an alignment amendment. The first of the mandatory process steps requires that Council actually propose to make an alignment amendment. Once a resolution to that effect has been adopted, Council can make and adopt the alignment amendment in accordance with the alignment amendment process stated in the Minister’s rules. The Minister’s rules allow for these steps to be combined. The scope of the proposed alignment amendment comprises the following:

• Replacing terminology or language to be consistent with that used in the Planning Act 2016. • However, it is intentionally proposed not to change the existing zone names and purpose

statements, or the current use and administrative definitions used in the MBRC Planning Scheme as part of this alignment amendment, despite the fact that there will be slight inconsistencies with some of the Regulated Requirements outlined in the Planning Regulation.

It is in both Council’s and the community’s best interests to prepare an alignment amendment to the MBRC Planning Scheme in readiness for commencement of the new Act, (which is currently expected to occur 3 July 2017). The alignment amendment will enable the MBRC Planning Scheme to operate efficiently and effectively without the need to rely on the new Act’s transitional provisions. A further alignment amendment is intended to be undertaken after the major amendment to the MBRC Planning Scheme comes into effect. For clarity, to ensure Council is meeting all of its obligations under the Minister’s rules the following material will be provided to the Minister and form the supporting information to this report.

• A copy of the public notice; • A copy of the alignment amendment; • A copy of the amended planning scheme.


PAGE 83

Agenda


PAGE 83 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.4 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME - ALIGNMENT AMENDMENT TO NEW PLANNING ACT 2016 - REGIONAL - A15325297 (Cont.)


The alignment amendment will be undertaken in accordance with the process prescribed in the Alignment amendment rules - Minister’s rules under section 293 of the Planning Act 2016.


3.3 Policy Implications The alignment amendment will place the MBRC Planning Scheme in an optimal position in readiness for the commencement of the Planning Act 2016. The alignment amendment will enable the MBRC Planning Scheme to operate efficiently and effectively without the need to rely on the new Act’s transitional provisions.

3.4 Risk Management Implications Aligning the MBRC Planning Scheme with the revised terminology and processes under the Planning Act 2016 will reduce risks of misinterpretation of planning scheme requirements and flow-on effects to development assessment.


3.6 Financial Implications The proposed alignment amendment has been undertaken in-house.

3.7 Economic Benefit Pre-emptive aligning of the new Act and the MBRC Planning Scheme will provide necessary clarity for the development industry and development assessment staff, thereby providing corresponding efficiency and economic benefits to those using the planning scheme.


Aligning the MBRC Planning Scheme with the revised terminology and processes under the Planning Act will assist in the protection of the environment through the efficient and effective functioning of the planning scheme.


Aligning the MBRC Planning Scheme with the revised terminology and processes under the Planning Act will assist in facilitating better social outcomes through the efficient and effective functioning of the planning scheme.

3.10 Consultation / Communication The limited nature and scope of alignment amendments made under the Minister’s rules negates the need for mandatory public consultation to be undertaken as part of the amendment process. Council is only required to publish a public notice about the adoption of the alignment amendment.


PAGE 84

Agenda


PAGE 84 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION (provided separately) Ref: A15325322, fA639859, A15325327, A15325333 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 2.4 MBRC PLANNING SCHEME, ALIGNMENT AMENDMENT TO NEW PLANNING ACT - REGIONAL #1 Alignment Amendment to MBRC Planning Scheme #2 Alignment Amendment to MBRC Planning Scheme - Planning Scheme Policies #3 Alignment Amendment to MBRC Planning Scheme - Public Notice #4 Alignment Amendment to MBRC Planning Scheme - Changes Document (due to size constraints these documents are provided separately)


PAGE 85

Agenda


PAGE 85 Agenda


ITEM 2.5 ADOPTION OF INFRASTRUCTURE CHARGES RESOLUTION (NO 6) AND IMPLEMENTATION POLICY (NO 6) - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 2 PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT Reference: A15166339 : 27 June 2017 - Refer Supporting Information A15436643,

A15437612 Responsible Officer: KI, Manager Strategic Planning and Economic Development (PED Strategic

Planning) Executive Summary There are two key documents that make up the infrastructure charging framework of a local government -

1. Local Government Infrastructure Plan (LGIP), and 2. Infrastructure Charges Resolution (ICR).

The LGIP details the planning process that leads to the development of a Priority Infrastructure Area (PIA) and the schedules of future trunk works to support growth within the PIA. The ICR includes the charging framework, including details about offsets, credits and refunds. The ICR has a companion Implementation Policy which provides guidance to applicants and officers on how to interpret parts of the ICR. Council recently resolved (at the Council meeting held 20 June 2017) to adopt the proposed LGIP to commence on 3 July 2017. As a consequence, the ICR and Implementation Policy are required to be amended to align with the new LGIP. The requirement to amend the ICR with the LGIP process presents an opportunity to progress a number of other changes including -

• general implementation amendments discussed with Council at a workshop held on 14 March 2017, • alignment with the new Queensland planning system, and • changes recommended as a result of an internal audit of infrastructure charges and offsets.

This report recommends that Council adopt Infrastructure Charges Resolution (No. 6) and Infrastructure Charges Resolution Implementation Policy (No. 6), which incorporate all the changes outlined above. It is recommended that the new ICR and Implementation Policy commence on 3 July 2017 in parallel with the commencement of Council’s new LGIP. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION That Council adopt the MBRC Charges Resolution (No. 6) 3 July 2017 and MBRC Charges Resolution Implementation Policy (No.6) 3 July 2017, to commence on 3 July 2017.


PAGE 86

Agenda


PAGE 86 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.5 ADOPTION OF INFRASTRUCTURE CHARGES RESOLUTION (NO 6) AND IMPLEMENTATION POLICY (NO 6) - REGIONAL - A15166339 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background At the Council workshop held 14 March 2017, a number of general amendments to the ICR and Implementation Policy were presented to Council. The outcomes of the workshop are summarised below. Compacted gravel surfaces Council agreed to amend the definition of impervious area to clarify that compacted gravel surfaces are considered as impervious area and will therefore incur an adopted charge for stormwater. Rural/rural residential areas will be reviewed on a case by case basis in terms of whether the fee is charged or waived. Valuing District Collector Roads Council agreed with no offset. Active Transport Network It was agreed that Council offset the difference in cost between the two items. Infrastructure charges for camping grounds Council agreed that a defined site would be a single caravan site and that for tents, up to two tents be considered a single site. Council agreed with the proposed charge of a standard rate per tent/caravan site of $4,718.55 (based on 1/3 of the State’s maximum charge). Infrastructure charges for Associated units (under superseded Pine Rivers Plan) Council agreed to amending the ICR to allow Associated units (where not used by a relative) to be exempt from infrastructure charges where of an equivalent size to a self-assessable Secondary dwelling under the MBRC Planning Scheme. Definition of constrained Land Council agreed to amend the Implementation Policy so that small, unusable pockets of land amongst larger areas of constrained land are also considered to be constrained. Instalment payments Council agreed to amend the Implementation Policy to provide greater clarity on Council’s policy regarding instalment payments as outlined in the presentation. Administrative and Minor amendments Council agreed with the Administrative and Minor amendments as listed in the presentation. In addition to the general amendments above, a new planning system for Queensland will commence on 3 July 2017. Amendments to the ICR and Implementation Policy are required to align with this new system. Since the Council workshop in March, there has also been an internal audit of infrastructure charges and offsets. The audit recommended changes to the ICR and Implementation Policy. The four categories of changes proposed as part of this amendment can therefore be summarised as follows: 1. Alignment with the new LGIP; 2. General amendments (workshopped with Council on 14 of March); 3. Alignment with the new Queensland planning system; and 4. Internal audit of infrastructure charges and offsets.


PAGE 87

Agenda


PAGE 87 Agenda


2. Explanation of Item Alignment with the new LGIP The LGIP replaces the Priority Infrastructure Plan in Part 4 of the MBRC Planning Scheme. An amendment to the ICR and Implementation Policy is therefore required to remove outdated references to the Priority Infrastructure Plan. General amendments The ICR and Implementation Policy have now been amended in accordance with the outcomes of the Council workshop held 14 March 2017 (as outlined above). It is noted that a new approach to charging for compacted gravel surfaces has been developed since the Council workshop in March. Council agreed to amend the ICR to clarify that compacted gravel surfaces will incur a charge, however, Council were concerned about the impact of this decision on small scale developments in the Rural and Rural Residential areas. To address this issue, Schedule 3: Adopted Charges of the ICR has been amended to include the following note:

In the Rural and Rural Residential zones, the first 1,000m2 of compacted gravel area will not be levied the adopted charge for stormwater.

This approach will minimise the impact on small scale developments in the Rural and Rural Residential zones whilst also providing greater consistency and transparency as opposed to reviewing applications on a case by case basis. Alignment with the new Queensland planning system The Planning Act 2016 (the new Act) commences on 3 July. To align with the new system a number of changes to the ICR and Implementation Policy are required including updating the ICR to reference the new Act and replacing outdated terminology. It is noted that the new Act introduces automatic indexation of infrastructure charges (on a quarterly basis in accordance with the 3-yearly moving average Producer Price Index). The schedule of infrastructure charges in the ICR has been amended to indicate to applicant’s that the charges will be subject to automatic indexation. The credit calculation methodology has also been amended to clarify that no indexation will be applied for the period between 1 July 2011 and 30 June 2015 as Council received no indexation of infrastructure charges during this period. Internal audit of infrastructure charges and offsets In accordance with the legislation, an applicant that is required to construct trunk works may request Council recalculate the Establishment Cost of those works. The process for this recalculation is included in Appendix 5 of the ICR. As part of the internal audit of infrastructure charges and offsets, it was considered that this process had the potential of Council overpaying an applicant for the required works. The recommendation of the audit committee was to update the ICR to include tailored terms and conditions aimed at minimising the risk that Council would not achieve “value for money” through the process. As a result three changes have been made to the process identified under Schedule 5 of the ICR -

1. The Council will only consider amending the establishment cost for works based on approved Operational Works designs;

2. As a result the amount of contingency and on-costs have been reduced; and 3. Council may require the applicant to undertake a competitive tendering process in particular

circumstances, where the infrastructure item is significant or external to the site. The ICR has been amended to incorporate this recommendation.


PAGE 88

Agenda


PAGE 88 Agenda



An ICR is a requirement under the Sustainable Planning Act 2009 and the soon to commence Planning Act 2016. Council can only levy infrastructure charges if it has an ICR in place.


3.3 Policy Implications The following Policies are affected by this decision:

• MBRC Infrastructure Charges Resolution; and • MBRC Infrastructure Charges Resolution Implementation Policy.


The proposed amendments are intended to provide greater clarity and certainty for developers about Council’s approach to infrastructure charging. There is no legislative requirement for public consultation to be undertaken. Public consultation was undertaken when the ICR and Implementation Policy were originally drafted in 2015. Whilst the changes have implications for industry, they are not considered significant enough to warrant consultation before implementation. Most of these changes are designed to clarify for proponents the direction already provided in the management of recent development applications.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications There are no delegated authority implications arising from this report.

3.6 Financial Implications Council must have an ICR in place to levy infrastructure charges.

3.7 Economic Benefit The ICR and Implementation Policy provide a clear and transparent policy position for the development industry to investigate and plan development within the region.


There are no notable environmental implications. 3.9 Social Implications

There are no notable social implications.

3.10 Consultation / Communication A number of internal departments have been involved in the drafting of amendments including Development Services, Legal Services and Finance. Unitywater have also been consulted in the preparation of amendments to the ICR and Implementation Policy.


PAGE 89

Agenda


PAGE 89 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15436643, A15437612 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 2.5 ADOPTION OF INFRASTRUCTURE CHARGES RESOLUTION (NO 6) AND IMPLEMENTATION POLICY (NO 6) - REGIONAL #1 MBRC Charges Resolution (No 6) 3 July 2017 #2 MBRC Charges Resolution Implementation Policy (No 6) 3 July 2017


PAGE 90

Agenda


PAGE 90 Agenda

Charges Resolution (No 6) 3 July 2017

ITEM 2.5 - ADOPTION OF INFRASTRUCTURE CHARGES RESOLUTION (NO 6) AND IMPLEMENTATION POLICY (NO 6) - REGIONAL (Cont.)


#1 MBRC Charges Resolution (No 6) 3 July 2017


PAGE 91

Agenda


PAGE 91 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council Charges Resolution (No 6) 3 July 2017

Table of Contents

Part 1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1

Part 2 Adopted Charges ......................................................................................................... 2

Part 3 Trunk Infrastructure ...................................................................................................... 6

Part 4 Levied Charges ............................................................................................................ 7

Part 5 Offset and refund for trunk infrastructure ................................................................... 12

Schedule 1: Dictionary .......................................................................................................... 14

Schedule 2: Superseded Planning Scheme Tables .............................................................. 16

Schedule 3: Adopted Charges .............................................................................................. 20

Schedule 4: Method for re-calculating establishment cost (Land Contribution) .................... 22

Schedule 5: Method for re-calculating establishment cost (Work Contribution).................... 24


Moreton Bay Regional Council COORDINATION COMMITTEE MEETING 27 June 2017

PAGE 92

Agenda


PAGE 92 Agenda


Page 1

Part 1 Introduction

1. Short title This resolution is made under section 113 of the Planning Act 2016 and may be cited as Moreton Bay Regional Council Charges Resolution (No 6) 2017.

2. Application to Local Government Area This resolution declares that an adopted charge applies to all of the Local Government area, except, for Local Government Infrastructure Networks, that part covered by the Mango Hill Infrastructure Development Control Plan.

3. When resolution has effect This resolution has effect for applications decided on and from 3 July 2017 and supersedes all previous resolutions relating to infrastructure charging.

The terms of the charges resolution current at the time a development approval is given will apply to any infrastructure charges notice given pursuant to that approval up until the levied infrastructure charges are paid in full. Provided that the terms of the charges resolution current at the time a change application or a request to extend the currency period is approved will apply to any infrastructure charges notice given pursuant to such approvals.

4. Interpretation A term used in this resolution has the meaning assigned to that term in one of the following:

the Act and associated regulations;

the dictionary in Schedule 1; or

the Acts Interpretation Act 1954

the Macquarie Dictionary.

In the event a term has been assigned a meaning in more than one of the instruments listed, the meaning contained in the instrument highest on the list will prevail.

The Moreton Bay Regional Council Charges Resolution has been drafted to work with both the MBRC Planning Scheme and the Relevant Superseded Planning Schemes.

For any levied charge the subject of an application under the MBRC Planning Scheme the methodology in this document applies and Tables 1 and 2 are applicable.

For any levied charge the subject of an application lodged under a Relevant Superseded Planning Scheme the methodology in this document applies and, any references to Table 1 and Table 2 should be read as Table S2.1 and Table S2.2 in Schedule 2 respectively.

Further clarification and direction regarding the interpretation of this resolution is contained in the Moreton Bay Regional Council Charges Resolution Implementation Policy (CR Implementation Policy).



PAGE 93

Agenda


PAGE 93 Agenda


Page 2

Part 2 Adopted Charges

5. Priority infrastructure area The Priority Infrastructure Area for the Local Government is identified in the Local Government Infrastructure Plan.

6. Comparison of planning scheme use categories and adopted charge categories For development under the MBRC Planning Scheme each defined land use stated in Column 2 of Table 1 has the corresponding adopted charge category stated in Column 1 of that table.

For any land use not stated in Column 2 of Table 1, the Local Government will, in consultation with the Distributor-retailer, determine the appropriate adopted charge category based on an assessment of the characteristics of the use and its likely demand on each of the trunk infrastructure networks listed in section 9 of this resolution.

Table 1 Adopted charge category for each defined land use - MBRC Planning Scheme

Column 1 Adopted chargecategory

Column 2 Defined land use under the Planning Scheme

Residential development Residential Uses

Dwelling house Dual occupancy Dwelling unit Caretaker’s accommodation Multiple dwelling

Accommodation (short term)

Hotel (residential component) Resort complex (residential component) Short-term accommodation Tourist park

Accommodation (long term)

Community residence Relocatable home park Retirement facility Rooming accommodation

Non Residential development Places of Assembly

Club Community use Function facility Funeral parlour Place of worship

Commercial (bulk goods)

Agricultural supplies store Bulk landscape supplies Garden centre Hardware and trade supplies Outdoor sales Showroom

Commercial (retail)

Food and drink outlet Service industry Service station Shop Shopping centre

Commercial (office)

Office Sales office



PAGE 94

Agenda


PAGE 94 Agenda


Page 3



Educational Facility

Child care centre Community care centre Educational establishment

Entertainment Hotel (non-residential component) Nightclub entertainment facility Resort complex (non-residential component) Theatre

Indoor Sport and Recreation

Indoor sport and recreation

Industry Low impact industry Marine industry Medium impact industry Research and technology industry Rural industry Warehouse

Other Industry High impact industry Special industry

Low Impact Rural

Animal husbandry Cropping Permanent plantation

High Impact Rural

Aquaculture Intensive animal industry Intensive horticulture Wholesale nursery Winery

Essential Services

Detention facility Emergency services Health care services Hospital Residential care facility Veterinary services

Other Uses Adult store Air services Animal keeping Bar Brothel Car wash Crematorium Environment facility Extractive industry Major electricity infrastructure Major sport, recreation and entertainment facility Motor sport facility Nature-based tourism Non-resident workforce accommodation Outdoor sport and recreation Outstation Parking station Port services Renewable energy facility Rural workers accommodation Substation Tourist attraction Transport depot



PAGE 95

Agenda


PAGE 95 Agenda


Page 4



Utility installation Minor Uses Cemetery

Home based business Landing Market Park Roadside stall Telecommunications facility

7. Development exempt from infrastructure charges An adopted charge will not be levied for Local Government Infrastructure Networks for:

development carried out by the Local Government when creating the uses identified in Table 2 (or Table S2.2 where the development application is lodged under a Relevant Superseded Planning Scheme) and when development is not for commercial gain;

development carried out by the Distributor-retailer solely for the purpose of accommodating Distributor-retailer network infrastructure;

boundary realignment applications;

an Education Establishment for the Flying Start for Queensland Children program;

material change of use and/or carrying out building work which is for a dwelling house on an existing lot;

a change of use that is categorised as accepted development subject to requirements under the MBRC Planning Scheme, in an existing building and that does not increase the gross floor area (GFA);

development that is identified as exempt from charges under section 113 (3) of the Act.



PAGE 96

Agenda


PAGE 96 Agenda


Page 5

Table 2 Development exempt from charges - MBRC Planning Scheme

Defined land use under the Planning Scheme Development undertaken by the Local Government for the following uses:

Animal husbandry Animal keeping Cemetery Community care centre Community use Educational establishment Environment facility Indoor sport and recreation Intensive animal industry Major sport, recreation and entertainment facility Market Office Outdoor sport and recreation Park Parking station Telecommunications facility Tourist park Utility installation

8. Adopted charge The Local Government has resolved to apply the adopted charges in Schedule 3 for the following:

for the Local Government, for the Local Government Infrastructure Networks;

for the Distributor-retailer, for providing the Distributor-retailer Networks.

The Local Government declares that an adopted charge in Schedule 3, applies to that part of the Local Government area mentioned in section 2.



PAGE 97

Agenda


PAGE 97 Agenda


Page 6

Part 3 Trunk Infrastructure

9. Trunk infrastructure Trunk infrastructure for the water supply and sewerage networks is identified within the Netserv Plan. The trunk infrastructure items for the Local Government Infrastructure Networks are identified in the Local Government Infrastructure Plan and described in the CR Implementation Policy.

The desired standards of service for the trunk infrastructure networks are identified within the Local Government Infrastructure Plan and Netserv Plan.

The plans for trunk infrastructure are identified within the Local Government Infrastructure Plan and Netserv Plan.

The establishment cost of trunk infrastructure items is the cost identified within the Local Government Infrastructure Plan and Netserv Plan.



PAGE 98

Agenda


PAGE 98 Agenda


Page 7

Part 4 Levied Charges

10. Application of adopted charges The Local Government or Distributor-retailer will levy an adopted charge (Levied Charge) through the provision of an infrastructure charges notice upon the approval of an application for the following:

reconfiguring of a lot;

material change of use; and

building works that is for a material change of use that is categorised as accepted development subject to requirements under the MBRC Planning Scheme.

The levied charge for a particular type of development cannot exceed the maximum adopted charge for that development allowable under the Act.

11. Payment of levied charges Unless stated otherwise in an infrastructure charges notice or infrastructure agreement, a levied charge is payable at the following time:

if the levied charge applies for reconfiguring of a lot – when the Local Government approves the plan of subdivision for the reconfiguration; or

if the levied charge applies for a material change of use – when the change happens; or

if the levied charge applies for building work – when the certificate of classification for the building or final inspection certificate for the building work is given.

An automatic increase provision will be applied at the time of payment of the levied charge where the where the charge in the charges notice is less than the maximum adopted charge for that development allowable under the Act at the time of the payment of the charge. In this situation, the PPI Index will be applied to the levied charge from the day the charge is levied to the day the charge is paid, or the levied charge will be increased to the maximum adopted charge allowable under the Act for that development at the time of payment under the charge, whichever is lesser.

12. Working out the levied charge A levied charge for the Extra Demand created by reconfiguring a lot for all zones is calculated as follows, proportional to the networks that serve the created lots (refer to Table 4):

LCRaL = (ACRaL x QRaL) - C

Where:

LCRaL is the levied charge for reconfiguring a lot.

ACRaL is the adopted charge for residential development (3 or more Bedroom dwelling) stated in Schedule 3.



PAGE 99

Agenda


PAGE 99 Agenda


Page 8

QRaL is the total number of lots being created, excluding lots being transferred to the Local Government or Distributor-retailer for infrastructure such as roads, drainage and park.

C is the credit stated in section 14.

A levied charge for the Extra Demand created by a material change of use or carrying out building work for residential development as categorised in Table 1, proportional to the networks that serve the created lots (refer to Table 4), is calculated as follows:

LCR = (sum of (ACR x QR) for each use) C

Where:

LCR is the levied charge for a material change of use or carrying out building work for residential development.

ACR is the adopted charge stated in section 13 which corresponds to the adopted charge category for each of the approved residential uses.

QR is the number of demand units corresponding to the approved residential uses.

C is the relevant credit stated in section 14.

A levied charge for the Extra Demand created by a material change of use or carrying out building work for non-residential development as categorised in Table 1, proportional to the networks that serve the created lots (refer to Table 4), is calculated as follows:

LC = (LCNR + LCSW ) - C

Where:

LC is the levied charge for the total development

LCNR = (sum of (ACNR x QNR) for each defined use)

LCSW = (ACSW x QSW)

LCNR is the compound of the levied charge for a material change of use or carrying out building work for non-residential development for the transport, public parks and land for community facilities, water supply and sewerage trunk infrastructure networks.

LCSW is the levied charge for a material change of use or carrying out building work for non-residential development for the stormwater trunk infrastructure network.

ACNR is the adopted charge stated in section 13 for the transport, public parks and land for community facilities, water supply and sewerage trunk infrastructure networks which corresponds to the adopted charge category for each of the approved non-residential uses.



PAGE 100

Agenda


PAGE 100 Agenda


Page 9

ACSW is the adopted charge stated in section 13 for the stormwater trunk infrastructure network which corresponds to the adopted charge category for each of the approved non-residential uses.

QNR is the number of demand units corresponding to the approved non-residential uses.

QSW is the Impervious Area of the development.

C is the relevant credit stated in section 14.

Where the Extra Demand created by a material change of use is the result of an existing residential use to be maintained, and a non-residential use proposed, then the calculation of LCNR includes both the residential and non-residential uses.

13. The adopted charge The adopted charge for:

reconfiguring a lot, is the adopted charge stated for residential development (3 or more Bedroom dwelling) in Schedule 3;

a material change of use or carrying out building work:

for residential development as categorised in Table 1, is stated in Column 3 of Table S3.1 in Schedule 3;

for non-residential development as categorised in Table 1 other than other uses, is stated in Schedule 3, which comprises the following:

(A) the adopted charge for the transport, public parks and land for community facilities, water and sewerage trunk infrastructure networks in Column 3 of Table S3.1; and

(B) the adopted charge for the stormwater trunk infrastructure network in Column 4 of Table S3.1;

for development being other uses or other development not otherwise identified in paragraphs (i) or (ii), the Local Government, in consultation with the Distributor-retailer, shall determine the appropriate adopted charge based on an assessment of the characteristics of the use and its likely demand on each of the trunk infrastructure networks.

14. Credit for existing uses, existing use rights, previous uses or previous payments The credit for the premises, is an amount which is the greater of the following:

the current adopted charge that would apply to the use of the premises for a purpose equivalent to its current use. ;

a previously paid monetary contribution or land contribution for a particular trunk infrastructure network under a previous charging regime listed in the Charges Implementation Policy which has been indexed in accordance with the PPI Index from the date of payment to the date of any new infrastructure charges notice issued over the land, excluding indexation for the period between 1 July 2011 and 30 June



PAGE 101

Agenda


PAGE 101 Agenda


Page 10

2015. To exclude this period, the contribution is held at the 30 June 2011 value and is subsequently escalated using the PPI Index from a base date of 1 July 2015.

where the premises is subject to an existing lawful use, or a previous use that is no longer taking place on the premises if the use was lawful at the time it was carried out, to the extent all infrastructure requirements applying to that use had been complied with:

for residential development, the amount stated for an adopted charge in Schedule 3 for the lawful use, indexed in the same manner as that prescribed in (b);

for non-residential development other than those categorised as other uses, the amount stated for an adopted charge in Schedule 3 for the lawful use indexed in the same manner as that prescribed in (b);

for non-residential development being other uses or other development not otherwise identified in paragraphs (i) or (ii), an amount determined by the Local Government, in consultation with the Distributor-retailer.

other development on the premises if the development may be lawfully carried out without the need for a further development permit (including a development permit for building works), and the acceptable development status was allocated on the basis of a set scale or intensity threshold. To the extent those thresholds have not been exceeded, and all infrastructure requirements associated with the allocation of accepted development status have been complied with:

for residential development, the amount stated for an adopted charge in Schedule 3 for the further use, indexed in the same manner as that prescribed in (a);

for non-residential development other than those categorised as other uses, the amount stated for an adopted charge in Schedule 3 for the further use, indexed in the same manner as that prescribed in (a);

for non-residential development categorised as other uses or other development not otherwise identified in paragraphs (i) or (ii), an amount determined by the Local Government, in consultation with the Distributor-retailer;

the amount stated in Schedule 3 for residential development (3 or more bedroom dwelling).

The applicant is to provide satisfactory evidence as to the extent and lawfulness of any claim for a credit for a previous use no longer taking place or a credit for a past contribution or charge.

The credit will be applied to the levied charge for the relevant infrastructure authority, being either the Local Government or the Distributor-retailer for the relevant infrastructure network, in the proportions identified in Table 3..

Table 3 Proportional split for the calculation of credits

Column 1 Trunk infrastructure networks provided

Column 2 Column 3 Column 4



PAGE 102

Agenda


PAGE 102 Agenda


Page 11

Percentage of credit

MBRCproportion of

credit

Unitywater proportion of

creditParks, transport, stormwater, water and sewer 100% 60% 40%

Parks, transport, stormwater, and water 100% 90% 10% Parks, transport, and stormwater 100% 100% 0%

15. Break up agreement The adopted charge is to be allocated in accordance with the break up agreement between the Local Government and the Distributor-retailer. The adopted charge is to be allocated to the trunk infrastructure networks identified in Table 4 administered by the Local Government and the Distributor-retailer in accordance with. All of the Local Government area is serviced by the Local Government Infrastructure Networks.

The adopted charge is proportional to the trunk infrastructure networks identified by the Local Government and Distributor-retailer to service the planned development. The proportional amounts are stated in Table 4.

Table 4 Charges Breakup

Column 1 Trunk infrastructure networks provided

Column 2 Percentage of

adoptedcharge

Column 3 MBRC

proportion of adoptedcharge

Column 4 Unitywater

proportion of adoptedcharge

Parks, transport, stormwater, water and sewer 100% 60% 40% Parks, transport, stormwater, and water 100% 90% 10% Parks, transport, and stormwater 100% 100% 0%



PAGE 103

Agenda


PAGE 103 Agenda


Page 12

Part 5 Offset and refund for trunk infrastructure

16. Establishment cost The establishment cost of trunk infrastructure items is the cost identified within the schedule of works in the Local Government Infrastructure Plan or Netserv Plan, or, for some land, calculated as an initial valuation of land (refer to the CR Implementation Policy Appendix 1).

17. Offsets and refunds One of the following apply if a water approval under the SEQ Water Act or a development approval contains a necessary infrastructure condition for trunk infrastructure which services or is planned to service premises other than premises the subject of the relevant approval and a levied charge applies to the development the subject of the relevant approval:

an offset – where the establishment cost for the Trunk Infrastructure Contribution is equal to or less than the levied charge; or

a refund – where the establishment cost for the Trunk Infrastructure Contribution is more than the levied charge.

The establishment cost is the cost identified within the schedule of works in the Local Government Infrastructure Plan or Netserv Plan, or calculated as an initial land valuation or, when a notice from the applicant is received under section 137 of the Act, the establishment cost re-calculated in accordance with the process outlined in Schedule 4: Method for re-calculating establishment cost (Land Contribution) and Schedule 5: Method for re-calculating establishment cost (Work Contribution).

The offset will be applied to the levied charge for the relevant infrastructure authority, being either the Local Government or the Distributor-retailer for the relevant infrastructure network of the trunk infrastructure.

The refund will be equal to the difference between the establishment cost of the trunk infrastructure item and the levied charge for the respective Local Government Infrastructure Networks or the Distributor-retailer Networks.

18. Conversion applications This section applies where:

a development approval or water approval requires the construction of non-trunk infrastructure; and

the construction of the non-trunk infrastructure has not commenced.

An applicant may apply, in writing, to the Local Government or Distributor-retailer to have non-trunk infrastructure converted to trunk infrastructure to be eligible for an offset or refund. The Local Government or Distributor-retailer will consider the application, and may request further information, based on the criteria contained within Section 20 below. Unless section 307A if the Act applies, the application must be made within one year after the development approval or water approval starts to have effect. All criteria must be met for a conversion application to be approved. The Local Government or Distributor-retailer will give the applicant notice of the decision.



PAGE 104

Agenda


PAGE 104 Agenda


Page 13

19. Conversion criteria: The infrastructure:

has a function and purpose that is consistent with other trunk infrastructure identified within the Netserv Plan and in the plans and schedule of works for trunk infrastructure shown in the Local Government Infrastructure Plan; and

has an approved design with the capacity to service multiple unrelated developments in the area; and

the infrastructure is not consistent with non-trunk infrastructure for which conditions may be imposed in accordance with section 145 of the Act or section 99BRDJ of the SEQ Water Act; and

is of a type, size and location which is most cost effective option (based on the life cycle cost of the infrastructure to service future urban development in the area at the desired standard of service) for servicing multiple users in the area. The infrastructure is not temporary infrastructure or sacrificial works to be superseded by an ultimate solution unless it can be demonstrated there is cost benefits to the Local Government or Distributor retailer; and

Planning for the LGIP.



PAGE 105

Agenda


PAGE 105 Agenda


Page 14

Schedule 1: Dictionary “Act” means the Planning Act 2016 and all subordinate legislation made under that Act.

“Extra Demand” means the demand placed upon trunk infrastructure that will be generated by the development, consistent with section 120 of the Act.

“Applicable local planning instrument” means the following:

for the Moreton Bay Regional Council Planning Scheme Area - Moreton Bay Regional Council Planning Scheme 2016 and its associated Temporary Local Planning Instruments and planning scheme policies;

for the Caboolture Shire Plan Area - Caboolture Planning Scheme 2005 (Caboolture Shire Plan) and its associated Temporary Local Planning Instruments and planning scheme policies;

for PineRiversPlan Area - Pine Rivers Planning Scheme 2006 (PineRiversPlan) and its associated Temporary Local Planning Instruments and planning scheme policies; and

for Redcliffe City Planning Scheme Area - Redcliffe City Planning Scheme 2005 (Redcliffe City Planning Scheme) and its associated Temporary Local Planning Instruments and planning scheme policies.

“Bedroom” means a habitable room that:

is of sufficient floor area to accommodate the placement and use of a standard single bed; and

incorporates the level of privacy normally associated with private sleeping accommodation or can be modified with minimal effort to incorporate such privacy measures.

However, the term does not include multipurpose spaces such as family rooms, living rooms or similar, or any other room that is only likely to be used on an infrequent basis or by a short term visitor to the premises.

“Caboolture Shire Plan area” means the area to which the Caboolture Planning Scheme 2005 applies.

“Distributor-retailer” means the Northern SEQ Distributor-retailer Authority trading as Unitywater ABN: 89 791 717 472.

“Distributor-retailer Networks” water supply and sewerage infrastructure networks.

“First Principles Estimate” means a cost estimate derived by calculating the cost of each item of a project by multiplying the quantity of work by historical unit rates. The project cost is then determined by the sum of the elemental costs. The unit rate is normally determined from a careful analysis of unit costs from a number of recently completed projects of the same type, with allowances being made for project differences. The cost estimate may be adjusted to consider differences in inflation, site conditions, market conditions, scale of the works, site location, design complexity, risk profile, ground condition, specialised construction methods and standard of material specification.



PAGE 106

Agenda


PAGE 106 Agenda


Page 15

“Impervious area” means the area of the premises that is impervious to rainfall or overland flow, including areas of the premises covered by compacted gravel.

“Land contribution” means land that is transferred to the Crown, the Local Government or the Distributor-retailer as trunk infrastructure in compliance with a condition of a development approval or by an agreement related to the development of land.

“Local Government” means Moreton Bay Regional Council (ABN: 92 967 232 136) and includes its predecessors, successors, transferees and assignees.

“Local Government area” means the area that is governed by the Moreton Bay Regional Council.

“Local Government Infrastructure Networks” means trunk infrastructure for the transport, public parks and land for community facilities and stormwater infrastructure networks.

“Mango Hill infrastructure development control plan” means the Mango Hill Infrastructure Development Control Plan 1998.

“Moreton Bay Regional Council Infrastructure Charges Implementation Policy” means the policy document adopted by the Local Government to define the rules for applying this resolution.

“Netserv Plan” means the Distributor-retailer’s plan for water and sewerage infrastructure as required by the South-East Queensland Water (Distribution and Retail Restructuring) Act 2009.

“PineRiversPlan area” means the area to which the Pine Rivers Planning Scheme 2006 applies. “PPI Index” means the 3 year moving average quarterly average Producer Price Index for construction (6427.0 – index number 3101 - Road and Bridge construction index for Queensland) published by the Australian Bureau of Statistics.

“Local Government Infrastructure Plan” means Part 4 and Schedule 3 of the Moreton Bay Regional Council Planning Scheme.

“Redcliffe City Planning Scheme area” means the area to which the Redcliffe City Planning Scheme 2005 applies.

“Relevant superseded planning scheme” means the Redcliffe City Planning Scheme 2005, the Pine Rivers Planning Scheme 2006 or the Caboolture Planning Scheme 2005.

“Trunk Infrastructure contribution” means a Land Contribution or a Work Contribution, or both.

“Work contribution” means work completed to deliver trunk infrastructure in compliance with a condition of development approval or by an agreement related to the development of land



PAGE 107

Agenda


PAGE 107 Agenda


Page 16

Schedule 2: Superseded Planning Scheme Tables Table S2.1 Adopted charge category for each defined land use - relevant superseded

planning schemes


Column 2 Defined land use under the relevant superseded planning scheme Caboolture Shire Plan Area

PineRiversPlan Area Redcliffe City Planning Scheme Area

Residential development Residential Uses

Dependent Persons Accommodation; Dual Occupancy; Dwelling House; Caretaker’s Residence; Multiple Dwelling.

Associated Unit; Detached House; Duplex Dwelling; Caretaker’s Residence; High Density Multiple Dwelling Units; Infill Housing; Low Density Multiple Dwelling Units; Medium Density Multiple Dwelling Units.

Caretaker’s Residence; Duplex Dwelling; House; Multiple Dwelling; Relative’s Accommodation.


Accommodation Building; Caravan Park; Hotel (residential component).

Accommodation Units; Camping Grounds; Caravan/Transportable Home Park (where predominately caravan sites); Hotel (residential component); Motel; Tourist Cabins.

Accommodation Unit; Caravan Park; Hotel (residential component).


Relocatable Home Park; Retirement Village.

Caravan/Transportable Home Park (where predominately transportable home sites); Pensioner Units; Retirement Village (excluding Nursing Home component).

Special Needs Housing (when not a Hospital or High Aged Care or similar).

Non Residential development Places of Assembly

Funeral Parlour; Place of Worship.

Community Facilities; Funeral Parlour; Place of Worship.

Club.

Commercial (bulk goods)

Landscape Supplies Production; Landscape Supply Centre; Retail Showroom; Sales or Hire Yard; Vehicle Sales and Service.

Bulk Garden Supplies; Hardware Shop; Outdoor Sales; Retail Nursery; Showroom; Vehicle Sales.

Outdoor Sales Premises; Showroom/ Superstore.

Commercial (retail)

Restaurant; Service Station; Shop; Take Away Food Outlet.

Commercial Services; Fast Food Delivery Service; Food Outlet; Service Station; Shop.

Food Service; Service Station; Shop.



PAGE 108

Agenda


PAGE 108 Agenda


Page 17




Commercial (office)

Display Home; Estate Sales Office; Office.

Display Home; Estate Sales Office; Office (where not a medical centre).

Business Premises (where not a medical centre); Display Home/ Estate Sales Office .

Educational Facility

Childcare Centre; Educational Establishment.

Child Care Centre; Educational Establishment.

Community Well- being Facilities (when a Child Care Centre); Education Centre.

Entertainment Hotel (non-residential component).

Hotel (non-residential component); Nightclub.

Hotel (non-residential component).

Indoor Sport and Recreation

Entertainment and Recreation (Indoors).

Indoor Entertainment and Sport.

Indoor Entertainment, Sport or Recreation.

Industry General Industry; Motor Vehicle Repair Station; Rural Service Industry; Service Industry; Storage Facility; Warehouse.

Contractor’s Depot; General Industry; Rural Industry; Service Industry; Warehouse.

General Industry; Service Trade; Warehouse.

Other Industry Fuel Depot; Special Industry.

Concrete Batching Plant; Hazardous and Offensive Industry; Salvage Yard.

Industry with Significant Impacts.

Low Impact Rural

Agriculture; Animal Husbandry (Non Intensive); Farm Forestry.

Agriculture; Animal Accommodation; Dairy; Farm Forestry; Non Intensive Animal Husbandry.

High Impact Rural

Animal Husbandry (Intensive); Aquaculture; Winery.

Intensive Animal Husbandry; Aquaculture.

Essential Services

Hospital; Corrective Institution; Medical Centre; Special Care Facility; Surgery; Veterinary Establishment.

Office (when a Medical Centre); Hospital; Institution; Veterinary Clinic; Veterinary Hospital; Retirement Village (Nursing Home component only).

Business Premises (when a Medical Centre); Special Needs Housing (when a Hospital or High Aged Care or similar).

Other Uses Adult Product Shop; Brothel; Car Parking Facility; Car Wash; Entertainment and Recreation (Outdoors); Extractive Industry; Local Utility; Major Utility;

Airstrip; Car Depot; Car Park; Cattery; Crematorium; Extractive Industry; Kennels; Local Utilities; Motor Sport;

Aerodrome; Car Park; Community Well-Being Infrastructure; Community Well-Being Facilities (when not a Child Care Centre); Entertainment



PAGE 109

Agenda


PAGE 109 Agenda


Page 18




Marina; Recycling Yard; Rural Worker’s Dwelling; Transport Depot.

Outdoor Recreation; Passenger Terminal; Public Utilities; Shooting; Simulated Conflict; Special Use; Stock Sales Yard.

Outdoor; Government Infrastructure; Rural Activities; Sport and Recreation Outdoor; Stable; Transport Interchange; Utility Installation (when not a Telecommunication Facility).

Minor Uses Cemetery; Dam; Home Based Business; Market; Park; Roadside Stall; Telecommunication Facility.

Bed and Breakfast Accommodation; Cemetery; Environmental Park; Domestic Storage; Home Business; Market; Major Telecommunication Facility; Park; Radio Station; Recycling Depot; Road Purposes.

Employment Related Storage; Home Based Business; Market; Park; Utility Installation (when a Telecommunication Facility).



PAGE 110

Agenda


PAGE 110 Agenda


Page 19

Table S2.2 Development exempt from charges - relevant superseded planning schemes

Defined land use under the relevant superseded planning scheme Column 1 Caboolture Shire Plan Area

Column 2 PineRiversPlan Area

Column 3 Redcliffe City Planning Scheme Area

Dependant Persons Accommodation

Associated Units (where used by a relative or of an equivalent size to a Secondary dwelling categorised as accepted development subject to requirements under the MBRC Planning Scheme.)

Relative’s Accommodation

Rural Worker’s Dwelling

Development undertaken by the Local Government for the following uses: Animal Husbandry (intensive) Caravan Parking Facility Cemetery Entertainment and Recreation (Indoors) Entertainment and Recreation (outdoors) Local Utility Major Utility Market Office Park Telecommunications Facility

Car Park Camping Grounds Indoor Entertainment and

Sport Local Utilities Kennels Major Telecommunication

Facility Market Non-Intensive Animal

Husbandry Office Outdoor Recreation Cemetery Community Facilities Environmental Park Park Public Utilities Passenger Terminal Recycling Depot Road Purposes Salvage Yard Special Use

Car Park Caravan Park Community Well-Being

Facilities Community Well-Being

Infrastructure Education Centre Entertainment Outdoor Government Infrastructure Indoor Entertainment, Sport

or Recreation Market Office Park Sport and Recreation

Outdoor Utility Installation



PAGE 111

Agenda


PAGE 111 Agenda


Page 20

Schedule 3: Adopted Charges Table S3.1 Adopted charges

Column 1 Adopted charge category

Column 2 Demandunit

Column 3 Adopted charge

Column 4 Adopted charge for stormwater

The rates in this table are the rates current at 3 July 2017 and will be automatically indexed in

accordance with section 112 of the Act. Residential development

Residential use as 3 or more Bedroom dwelling

Dwelling $28,311.20 per dwelling

n/a

Residential use as 1 or 2 Bedroom dwelling

Dwelling $20,222.30 per dwelling


Tent/ caravan site

For a tent or caravan site in a tourist park:

$4,718.55 per site

Cabin For a cabin in a tourist park: $10,111.15 per 1 or 2 Bedroom cabin, or $14,155.60 per 3 Bedroom cabin

Suite For a hotel or short-term accommodation:

$10,111.15 per suite (1 or 2 Bedrooms) or $14,155.60 per suite (3 or more Bedrooms) or $10,111.15 per Bedroom (for a Bedroom that is not within a suite)


Dwelling site

For a relocatable home park: $20,222.30 per dwelling site (1 or 2 Bedrooms) or $28,311.20 per dwelling site (3 or more Bedrooms)

Suite For a community residence, retirement facility or hostel:

$20,222.30 per suite (1 or 2 Bedrooms) or $28,311.20 per suite (3 or more Bedrooms) $20,222.30 per Bedroom (for a Bedroom that is not within a suite)



PAGE 112

Agenda


PAGE 112 Agenda


Page 21

Column 1 Adopted charge category

Column 2 Demandunit

Column 3 Adopted charge

Column 4 Adopted charge for stormwater

The rates in this table are the rates current at 3 July 2017 and will be automatically indexed in

accordance with section 112 of the Act.

Non-residential development

Places of Assembly

m2 GFA $70.80 per m2 GFA $10.10 per square

metre of impervious

area1 Commercial

(bulk goods) m2 GFA $141.55 per m2 GFA

Commercial (retail)

m2 GFA $182 per m2 of GFA

Commercial (office)

m2 GFA $141.55 per m2 GFA

Educational Facility (excluding “Flying Start for Queensland Children” program)

m2 GFA $141.55 per m2 GFA

Entertainment m2 GFA $220 per m2 GFA (other than areas used as residential accommodation).

Indoor sport and recreation

m2 GFA $202.20 per m2 GFA (for other than court areas), and court areas at $20.20 per m2 GFA

Industry m2 GFA $50.55 per m2 GFA Other industry m2 GFA $70.80 per m2 GFA Essential

services m2 GFA $141.55 per m2 GFA

High impact rural m2 GFA $20.20 per m2 GFA nil Low impact rural n/a Nil charge Minor uses n/a Nil charge Other uses n/a The prescribed amount for another similar use

that the Local Government and/or Distributor-retailer decides to apply to the use. If no other similar use exists, demand and adopted charge to be determined by the Local Government and/or Distributor-retailer prior to issue of the infrastructure charges notice.

1 In the Rural and Rural Residential zones, the first 1,000m2 of compacted gravel area will not be levied the adopted charge for stormwater.



PAGE 113

Agenda


PAGE 113 Agenda


Page 22

Schedule 4: Method for re-calculating establishment cost (Land Contribution) The following methodology will be followed when recalculating the value of a Land Contribution.

1. If the land infrastructure has been identified in the LGIP, a valuation must be undertaken to determine the market value that would have applied on the day the development application, which is the subject of a condition to provide trunk infrastructure, first became properly made.

2. If the land infrastructure has not been identified in the LGIP, the valuation must be undertaken to determine the market value that would have applied on the day the development application that resulted in a condition to provide trunk infrastructure was approved.

3. The valuation of land infrastructure must be undertaken using the before and after method of valuation by:

determining the value of the original land before any land is transferred to a local authority;

determining the value of the remaining land that will not be transferred to a local authority; and

subtracting the value determined for the remaining land that will not be transferred to a local authority from the value determined for the original land.

4. The valuation calculated using the before and after methodology at will be used as the value of the land to be transferred to the local authority.

5. The valuation report must:

include supporting information regarding the highest and best use of the land which the valuer has relied on to form an opinion about the value;

identify the area of land that is above the Q100 flood level and the area that is below the Q100 flood level;

identify and consider all other real and relevant constraints including:

vegetation protection;

ecological values including riparian buffers and corridors;

stormwater or drainage corridors;

slope;

bushfire and landslide hazards;

heritage;

airport environs;

coastal erosion;

extractive resources;

flooding;



PAGE 114

Agenda


PAGE 114 Agenda


Page 23

land use buffer requirements;

tenure related constraints; and

restrictions such as easements, leases, licences and other dealings whether or not registered on title; and

contain relevant sales evidence and clear analysis of how those sales and any other information was relied upon in forming the valuation assessment.

6. The valuation of land must be undertaken by a certified practicing valuer who must act professionally as a neutral and independent expert.



PAGE 115

Agenda


PAGE 115 Agenda


Page 24

Schedule 5: Method for re-calculating establishment cost (Work Contribution)

1. The following methodology will be followed when recalculating the value of a Work Contribution:

The Local Government must provide to the applicant the scope of works including the standard to which the trunk infrastructure is to be provided and the location of the trunk infrastructure (the scope of works).

The applicant must, at their cost, provide to the Local Government:

A bill of quantities for the design, construction and commissioning of the trunk infrastructure in accordance with the scope of works (the bill of quantities). The bill of quantities must be based on approved Operational Works drawings.

A first principles estimate prepared by a qualified and registered Quantity Surveyor or RPEQ for the cost of designing, constructing and commissioning the trunk infrastructure specified in the bill of quantities (the cost estimate) and based on the approved Operational Works drawings.

For larger scale trunk infrastructure works or in circumstances Council deems warranted, Council may advise an applicant that the establishment cost for the required trunk infrastructure works will be based on a competitive tendering process. Guidance will be provided in the CR Implementation Policy.

The Local Government may accept the bill of quantities and cost estimate provided by the applicant.

The Local Government may negotiate with the applicant prior to accepting the bill of quantities and cost estimate provided by the applicant.

If the Local Government accepts the bill of quantities and the cost estimate, the cost estimate is the establishment cost of the infrastructure.

If the Local Government does not accept the bill of quantities and cost estimate provided by the applicant it must, at its cost, have an assessment undertaken by an appropriately qualified person to:

determine whether the bill of quantities is in accordance with the scope of works;

If the bill of quantities is in accordance with the scope of work determine whether the cost estimate is consistent with current market costs calculated by applying a first principles estimating approach to the bill of quantities; and

If the bill of quantities is in accordance with the scope of works, but the cost estimate is either inconsistent with current market costs or does not adopt a first principles estimating approach, provide a new cost estimate using a first principles estimating approach.

If the Local Government rejected the bill of quantities or the cost estimate provided by the applicant, it must provide written notice to the applicant and propose the new bill of quantities or cost estimate and its reasons for doing so.

Where a written notice of the Local Government’s proposed bill of quantities or cost estimate has been given, the applicant may negotiate and agree with the Local Government regarding a cost estimate. The agreed cost estimate is the establishment cost of the infrastructure.



PAGE 116

Agenda


PAGE 116 Agenda


Page 25

If agreement cannot be reached, the Local Government must refer the bill of quantities and the cost estimate to an independent, suitably qualified person (the independent assessor) to:

assess whether the local authority’s bill of quantities is in accordance with the scope of works;

if the local authority's bill of quantities is in accordance with the scope of works, assess whether the local authority’s cost estimate is consistent with current market costs calculated by applying a first principles estimating approach to the bill of quantities;

if the local authority's bill of quantities is not in accordance with the scope of works, prepare a bill of quantities that is, and provide an amended cost estimate using a first principles estimating approach;

if the local authority's bill of quantities is in accordance with the scope of works, but the cost estimate is either inconsistent with current market costs or does not adopt a first principles estimating approach, provide an amended cost estimate using a first principles estimating approach.

The independent assessor is to be appointed by the Local Government, at its discretion, in consultation with the applicant. The cost of this independent assessment is to be equally shared between the Local Government and the applicant.

The amended cost estimate determined by the independent assessor is the establishment cost of the infrastructure.

The Local Government must give an amended ICN to the applicant stating:

The value of the establishment cost of the infrastructure which has been indexed to the date it is stated in the amended ICN using the Producer Price Index – Road and bridge construction index for Queensland.

That the establishment cost of the infrastructure stated in the amended ICN is indexed from the date that it is stated in the amended ICN to the date it is to be offset against the levied charge in accordance with the Producer Price Index – Road and bridge construction index for Queensland.

2. The specific inclusions for determining the value of the work component (works contribution) of an infrastructure contribution are:

limited to the construction of the trunk infrastructure to the standard of the network provider, without any associated works;

the cost of pre-construction and construction period professional services including planning, survey, geotechnical investigations, design, project management, contract administration and environmental studies. The maximum allowance for the professional services shall be 13%:

any cost under a construction contract (excluding for latent conditions, provisional items and sums) for the work not covered by any of the other inclusions listed herein;

contingency of no more than 5% of the value of the supply and installation/construction components of the works;

a portable long service leave payment for a construction contract;

any insurance premium for the work; and



PAGE 117

Agenda


PAGE 117 Agenda


Page 26

the cost of the development approvals for the work.

3. The specific exclusions for determining the value of the work component of an infrastructure item are:

professional fees not associated with planning, survey, geotechnical investigations, design, project management, contract administration and environmental studies;

the cost of carrying out any necessary temporary infrastructure;

the cost of carrying out any other infrastructure which is not part of the required trunk infrastructure item;

the cost of the decommissioning, removal and rehabilitation of infrastructure identified in (b) and (c);

any part of the required Trunk Infrastructure Contribution provided at no cost to the claimant; and

the GST component of the costs for the required trunk infrastructure item.



PAGE 118

Agenda


PAGE 118 Agenda

Charges Resolution Implementation Policy

3 July 2017



#2 MBRC Charges Resolution Implementation Policy (No 6) 3 July 2017


PAGE 119

Agenda


PAGE 119 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council Charges Resolution Implementation Policy (No 6) 3 July 2017

Table of Contents

Part 1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1

Part 2 Adopted Charges ......................................................................................................... 3

Part 3 Trunk Infrastructure ...................................................................................................... 5

Part 4 Levied Charges ............................................................................................................ 8

Part 5 Offset and refund for trunk infrastructure ................................................................... 16

Appendix 1: Initial valuation of establishment cost (land contribution) .................................. 19

Appendix 2: Indicative Scope of Works - Local Parks .......................................................... 24

Appendix 3: Indicative Scope of Works - Trunk Road Corridors ........................................... 25



PAGE 120

Agenda


PAGE 120 Agenda


Page 1

Part 1 Introduction

1. Short title This document, known as the Moreton Bay Regional Council Charges Resolution Implementation Policy, can be cited as CR Implementation Policy.

2. Intent The purpose of the CR Implementation Policy is to state the policy position of the Local Government in relation to the application, interpretation and implementation of the Moreton Bay Regional Council Charges Resolution (No 6) 2017 (the Resolution), to create a consistent and transparent approach to infrastructure charging.

The intent is to update the CR Implementation Policy regularly, to provide a clear policy position consistent approach to infrastructure charging. This CR Implementation Policy is to be read together with the Resolution.

A term used in the CR Implementation Policy has the meaning assigned to that term in accordance with Section 4 of the Resolution.

The Resolution supersedes all previous resolutions relating to infrastructure charging, including, but not limited to, the following:

i. Adopted Charges Resolution for that part of Council’s Local Government Area covered by Caboolture Shire Plan;

ii. Adopted Charges Resolution for that part of Council’s Local Government Area covered by PineRiversPlan;

iii. Adopted Charges Resolution for that part of Council’s Local Government Area covered by Redcliffe City Planning Scheme 2005;

iv. Coordination committee meeting 16 March 2010 relating to dependant person’s accommodation;

v. Coordination committee meeting 13 April 2010 relating to the implementation of 2009 Infrastructure Charges Policies;

vi. Coordination committee meeting 22 February 2011 relating to Trunk Planning Scheme Policy Implementation: Offsetting demands for developer provided infrastructure;

vii. Strategic and Planning meeting 21 June 2011 relating to Adopted Charges Resolution for the Moreton Bay Region;

viii. Coordination committee meeting 28 June 2011 relating to Adopted Charges Resolution for the Moreton Bay Region;

ix. Coordination committee meeting 8 November 2011 relating to Implementation of Council’s Adopted Charges and related matters;

x. Coordination committee meeting 11 December 2012 relating to Recognition of previous approval credits and offsets under Council’s Adopted Charges Resolution;



PAGE 121

Agenda


PAGE 121 Agenda


Page 2

xi. Planning and Development meeting 8 July 2014 relating to Second Detached Houses;

xii. Planning and Development meeting 21 January, 2014 relating to Adopted Charges Resolution for Accommodation Building (Fruit Picker Accommodation);

xiii. Charges Resolution (No 2) 2015;

xiv. Charges Resolution (No 3) 2015;

xv. Charges Resolution (No 4) 2016; and

xvi. Charges Resolution (No 5) 2016.



PAGE 122

Agenda


PAGE 122 Agenda


Page 3

Part 2 Adopted Charges

3. Negotiations during the applicant’s appeal period for a development approval (1) Concurrent with any written representations made by an applicant under section 75 of the

Act about a matter stated in a decision notice during the applicant’s appeal period, an assessment of any proposed changes to the development approval will be undertaken against the provisions of the Resolution as a part of any negotiations.

(2) As a part of the Local Government’s consideration of any representations made, if the representations are intended to be agreed to and will trigger the need for trunk infrastructure that has not previously been identified in the Decision Notice or a condition requiring the payment of extra trunk infrastructure costs, new conditions will be applied to the Negotiated Decision Notice.

(3) In accordance with section 76 of the Act, if the development approved as a result of the representations (stated in a Negotiated Decision Notice) is different from the development approved in the original decision notice in a way that affects the amount of the levied charge originally imposed, a new infrastructure charges notice reflecting that different charge will be issued reflecting the negotiated decision notice and called a replacement infrastructure charges notice.

4. Application of the Resolution to applications for a change and an extension of the currency period

(1) As part of the assessment of any application for:

(a) A change to an existing development approval; or

(b) an extension to the currency period of a development approval,

an assessment of any resulting changes to the development approval (that may or may not be subject to a condition imposed under section 848 of the repealed Sustainable Planning Act 2009) and any associated infrastructure charges notice that might have been issued, will be undertaken against the provisions of the Resolution.1

(2) An amended infrastructure charges notice reflecting a different levied charge will be issued if a change application is subsequently approved and it results in a development approval different from what was approved in the current development approval2 in a way that would otherwise attract a different levied charge to the one that has been levied. The changes to the development approval may also result in the inclusion of additional conditions of

1 If for example a change to an existing development approval is to increase the GFA of a Warehouse, the Local Government will look at imposing an infrastructure charge for the additional GFA. For an extension to the currency period, if when the development was approved it had a certain charge rate however since then the development now has a different charge rate, the Local Government will look at imposing the current charge rate instead of the original charge rate. In addition, repealed Sustainable Planning Act 2009 regarding infrastructure charges and instead issue an infrastructure charges notice. However, development conditions regarding water and sewerage infrastructure charges may need to be preserved in the absence of Unitywater being able to issue an infrastructure charges notice.

2 Current development approval is the most recent approval and may be in the form of the original Decision Notice, a Negotiated Decision Notice that amended the original Decision Notice or a Notice of the Act changing a previous Decision Notice or Negotiated Decision Notice.



PAGE 123

Agenda


PAGE 123 Agenda


Page 4

development approval if those changes trigger the need for additional trunk infrastructure to be constructed or a payment corresponding to extra trunk infrastructure costs.

(3) In the assessment of any application for an extension of the currency period of a development approval, if the development would attract higher levied charges under the current Resolution to those which would be payable under the existing infrastructure contributions conditions or infrastructure charges notice, either the request will be refused or the development approval will be amended to align with the levied charges which would be payable under the current Resolution before or concurrent with the extension being approved. The only exceptions to this are:

a. No change to the contributions or charges payable will apply where any one of the following apply:

(a) the development is under construction and the Local Government is of the view that the subject development has progressed without undue delay, no previous extensions have been given and the request for an extension is limited to a maximum period of 12 months, or

(b) the development is under construction and the development has been delayed by circumstances beyond the control of the applicant, no previous extensions have been given and the request for an extension is limited to a maximum period of 12 months; or

(c) the total amount of a financial contribution or charge required by the approval has been paid before the extension is given.

(4) A change from the contributions or charges previously payable to a levied charge under the Resolution will apply only for the networks listed in the existing development approval (based on an equal split of the levied charge over the Local Government Infrastructure Networks independent of the Distributor-retailer networks) where the following applies:

(a) construction of the development has not commenced; and

(b) no previous extensions to the currency period have been granted; and

(c) the request for an extension is limited to a maximum period of 12 months.

(5) Where the Local Government has previously given an infrastructure charges notice, it may reissue the infrastructure charges notice as an amended infrastructure charges notice with any necessary amendments, including to the amount of the levied charge.

5. Application of the Resolution to short term and long term accommodation (1) For calculating applicable infrastructure charges for Accommodation (short-term), using

the adopted charges in Schedule 3 of the Resolution a site for a tent is an area accommodating up to 2 tents and a site for caravans is an area accommodating a single caravan.

a. for a tent/caravan site in a tourist park within Accommodation (short term), a single caravan is a single site and for tents, up to two tents is a single site;



PAGE 124

Agenda


PAGE 124 Agenda


Page 5

Part 3 Trunk Infrastructure

6. Trunk Infrastructure Table 1 outlines the items which constitute trunk infrastructure for each of the networks in the Local Government Infrastructure Plan.

Table 1 Trunk infrastructure

Network Trunk Infrastructure Items Water Supply Network

As stated in Netserv Plan

Sewerage Network As stated in Netserv Plan Stormwater Network (1) Riparian Corridors:

Land within the Priority Infrastructure Area that is used for stormwater conveyance and quality purposes that fully contains the 1% AEP flows and extends to at least thirty (30) metres out from the top of the geomorphic stream bank3.

(2) Quantity:

Detention basins, pipes, headwalls and culverts for the conveyance of major stormwater flows including any necessary land component, where not required to meet planning scheme requirements for managing on-site impacts as a result of development or stormwater overland flow paths for upstream properties.

(3) Quality:

Works for catchment-wide stormwater treatment, ie; not required as a development specific measure to achieve compliance with other planning scheme requirements, and as identified in the Moreton Bay Regional Council Total Water Cycle Management Implementation Plan (2013).

Excludes all stormwater infrastructure required to meet the internal development requirements for the site as required by the State Planning Policy, Moreton Bay Regional Council Planning Scheme or similar.

Transport Network (1) The road components of the transport network:

Limited access district collector roads carrying greater than 3,500 vehicles per day in any one direction;

Sub-arterial roads; and

3 Stream BankVery short or very wide slope, moderately inclined to precipitous, forming the marginal upper parts of a stream channel and resulting from erosion or aggradation by channelled stream flow. (McDonald et. al. 1990, pg. 35).



PAGE 125

Agenda


PAGE 125 Agenda


Page 6

Arterial roads (excluding State Controlled Roads) including Arterial Main Streets.

(2) The strategic pathway components of the transport network:

the primary and secondary active transport network of formed, multi-function pathways serving a district or regional function and intended for use by commuter and recreational cyclists, walkers and runners, but excluding those pathways designated as recreational trails. Includes associated lighting, culverts, bridges, surface marking, directional and information signage.

Public parks and land for Community Facilities Network

(1) Sports parks:

Regional level; and

District level; and

Includes associated embellishments such as sports fields, shade structures, lighting and car parking.

(2) Recreation parks:

Regional level including Regional Civic Park and Regional Foreshore Park;

District level, including District Civic Park and District Foreshore Park; and

Local Parks (including Foreshore), serving more than 350 dwellings, meeting the DSS;

Includes associated embellishments such as shade structures and playgrounds.

(3) Land for Community Facilities:

Regional; and

District; and

Local; and

Includes minor works associated with making land suitable for its intended use (i.e. grass, service connection), but excludes buildings and other embellishments.

Infrastructure items that are not trunk infrastructure include, but are not limited to:

Infrastructure items required solely to service a single development;

External works that connect a single development to external infrastructure;

Linear linkage park;

Bushland recreation park;



PAGE 126

Agenda


PAGE 126 Agenda


Page 7

;

Stormwater works required to service a single development or works required to manage stormwater flows through a site in accordance with the Planning Scheme requirements and any associated land

Land required to be dedicated to the State (eg. Erosion Prone Land);

Embellishments above the desired standards of service or the value in section 14 (Table 4) below; and

Intersection works that are not between two trunk roads eg. Intersection works between a Local Collector road and a Sub-arterial road.



PAGE 127

Agenda


PAGE 127 Agenda


Page 8

Part 4 Levied Charges

7. Application of levied charges Any infrastructure charges notice for the levied charge is required by section 121 of the Act to include information relating to any applicable credits, offsets or refunds calculated in accordance with Part 5 below.

An applicant can seek agreement to pay a levied charge to the Local Government by instalments under section 123 of the Act. The Local Government’s policy on the payment of levied charges by instalments is:

i. An applicant must enter into an infrastructure agreement which will specify the terms and conditions for the alternative payment schedule;

ii. A request for instalment payments will only be considered where the charge is associated with a Material Change of Use development application; and

iii. The period over which payment by instalments can occur is not to extend beyond 3 years after the day that payment would otherwise be required under section 122 of the Act; and

iv. Interest will be payable on the balance owing after the day that payment would otherwise be required under section 122 of the Act, equivalent to the 3 year Queensland Treasury Corporation (QTC) borrowing rate, plus 2% p.a. The rate is set on 1 July each year, and applies to all payment plans entered into until 30 June the following year. The rate for each payment plan does not change during the time the payment plan is in place. Each payment instalment consists of Principal and Interest components as per the agreed payment plan.

The time for payment of a levied charge for a combined Reconfiguring a lot and Material Change of Use approval will be determined by the Local Government according to the scale of the development and will be stated in the infrastructure charges notice.

The February 2016 CR introduced Building Work as a trigger for levying a charge. An infrastructure charges notice will only be issued for Building Work where the related Material Change of Use is development categorised as accepted subject to requirements under the MBRC Planning Scheme. Council is required to issue an infrastructure charges notice within 20 business days of receiving a copy of the development approval from the building certifier.

There are two exceptions to this rule where no charge will be levied -

1. material change of use and/or carrying out building work which is for a dwelling house on an existing lot;

2. a change of use that is categorised as accepted development subject to requirements under the MBRC Planning Scheme, in an existing building and that does not increase the gross floor area (GFA).

Eligible non-profit community organisations and charitable groups can apply to the Local Government for a remission of infrastructure charges. Refer to the Local Government’s website for the “Remission: Development Fees and Infrastructure Charges for Community Organisations and Charitable Groups” policy.



PAGE 128

Agenda


PAGE 128 Agenda


Page 9

8. Automatic increase provision An automatic increase, or indexing, of a levied charge can occur, but the increased charge must not exceed the maximum adopted charge allowable under the Act at the time of payment. In the situation where the infrastructure charges notice issued at the time of the approval has a lower levied charge than the maximum adopted charge allowable under the Act, the levied charge will be indexed by the PPI Index from the date of the approval to the time of the payment, or to the level of the maximum adopted charge allowable under the Act, whichever is lesser.

This clause only has effect for charges levied after 1 July, 2015.

9. Credits The Resolution allows for a credit to be given for existing rights that have not been exercised, previous uses that had been lawfully established o the land and all previous contributions for the Local Government Infrastructure Networks.

If the land is vacant, a credit equivalent to a 3 bedroom dwelling will be allowed regardless of the fact that it may not be residential land.

The allowable credit is the higher of these potential credits.

For the CR, land contributions made under the former trunk infrastructure policies identified in Table 2 will be recognised where they meet the definition of trunk infrastructure and the desired standard of service under the respective policy. In converting the land contribution to a financial contribution, Council will use a general valuation of the land at the time it was transferred, indexed in accordance with the PPI Index to the date the new application was properly made, excluding indexation for the period between 1 July 2011 and 30 June 2015. However, the financial contribution will be discounted for constrained land in the manner indicated in Schedule 8 of the CR.

The amount of the equivalent financial credit for the land contribution will be evenly distributed across the development as an amount per m² for the total developable area of the original development less the area of the land contribution, unless an alternate methodology is identified in a development approval related to the land.

Table 2 Former Trunk Infrastructure Policies

Policy Year

PineRiversPlan

LP22 - Park Policy 2001PSP26 Development Contributions for Trunk Infrastructure - Local Community Purposes

2006

PSP26 Development Contributions for Trunk Infrastructure - Open Space

2008

PSP26 Open Space Development Contributions

2009

Redcliffe City Plan

PSP4 Part 8.4.1 Development Contributions (Parkland Contributions)

2005

PSP4 Part 8.4.3 Public Open Space Development Contributions

2009

Caboolture Planning Scheme

PSP21C Open Space Development Contributions

2009



PAGE 129

Agenda


PAGE 129 Agenda


Page 10

The credit for previous payments will only be applied to these networks relevant to the payment. For example, if previous payments were made for the water and sewer contributions, the credit would not be applied to the local government levied charges. If the relevant networks are unknown, apply the 60% MBRC/40% Unitywater proportional split.

All examples below apply solely to the levied charges for the Local Government Infrastructure Networks.For further information regarding the formulae refer to the Resolution. All examples in sections 9, 10 and 11 are based on the maximum adopted charges in the State Planning Regulatory Provision (adopted charges) as at the 1 July 2015. Refer to Schedule 3 of the Resolution for the current adopted charges.

The following notes are relevant to the examples listed in sections 9, 10 and 11:

Note 1: The percentages used in the following examples reflect the break-up shown in Table 4 of the CR (eg; 60% is the proportion of the adopted charge allocated to MBRC where all infrastructure networks are available to the premises.

Note 2: All credits applied under these examples will be subject to indexation in accordance with the PPI Index (excluding indexation for the period between 1 July 2011 and the 30 June 2015)

Note 3: A 3 bedroom dwelling has been used in these examples as being the highest use that may be established on the land as acceptable development subject to requirements.

Example 1 – Site X has an existing detached house (3 bedroom), and has access to all 5 networks. The MCU application for Site X is for six 2-bedroom units.

Levied charge calculation for Local Government networks: LC = (ACR x QR) - C

WhereACR x QR = ($20,000 x 60% x 6)

= $72,000

Credit Calculation: C = the greater of 3 bed dwelling or existing use or previous

contributions= the greater of ($28,000 x 60%1) or ($28,000 x 60%) or 0= $16,800

Resultant levied charge: LC = (ACR x QR) - C LC =$72,000 - $16,800

= $55,200



PAGE 130

Agenda


PAGE 130 Agenda


Page 11

Example 2 – Site Y is a large urban parcel (1 hectare) with an existing house, which is subdivided into 10 parcels and has access to all 5 networks.


WhereACR x QR = ($28,000 x 60% x 10)

= $168,000

Credit Calculation: C = the greater of 3 bed dwelling or existing use or previous contributions

= the greater of ($28,000 x 60%) or ($28,000 x 60%) or 0 = $16,800

Resultant levied charge: LC = (ACR x QR) - C LC =$168,000 - $16,800

= $151,200

One of the resulting lots from above (Site Z) is vacant, has access to all 5 networks. The MCU application for Site Z is for a duplex with 2 x 2-bedroom units.


WhereACR x QR = ($20,000 x 60% x 2)

= $24,000

Credit Calculation: C = the greater of 3 bed dwelling or existing use or previous contributions

= the greater of ($28,000 x 60%) or 0 or 0 = $16,800

Resultant levied charge: LC = (ACR x QR) - C LC = $24,000 - $16,800

= $7,200



PAGE 131

Agenda


PAGE 131 Agenda


Page 12

10. Calculation of credit for previously paid infrastructure charges Contributions previously made for development of the land under a previous development approval, or as part of a land transfer connected to that development, are to be converted to the equivalent of the current levied charges.

11. Examples of the calculation of credits The calculation of credits under the Breakup agreement is related to the networks servicing the development both currently and post development.

For the avoidance of doubt, the calculation of credits for Local Government networks is based on the networks servicing the development when completed, not the networks being utilised present at the time of the development application.

Examples of how charges levied by the Local Government are calculated are provided for guidance.

Example 4 – Site A has a current value for previous contributions linked with the land of $30,000 (LG networks only). The MCU application is over a vacant site, Site A, and is for an industrial shed of 1,500 m2 GFA, on a site of 3,500m2, the land has access to all 5 networks.

Levied charge calculation for local government networks: LC = LCNR + LCSW - CLC = (1500m2 x $50/m2 x 60%) + (3,500m2 x 0.9 fraction impervious x $10/m2

imp x 60%) - C = $45,000 + $18,900 - C

= $63,900 - C

Credit Calculation: C = the greater of 3 bed dwelling or existing use or previous

contributions= the greater of ($28,000 x 60%) or 0 or $30,000= $30,000

Resultant levied charge: LC =$63,900 - $30,000

= $33,900



PAGE 132

Agenda


PAGE 132 Agenda


Page 13

Example 5 – all networks are available to the land now and will continue into future Application: Reconfigure a vacant lot into two residential lots. Existing networks: All – parks, transport, stormwater, water, sewer Future networks: All – parks, transport, stormwater, water, sewer

Levied charge calculation: LCRAL = (ACRAL x QRAL) – C

WhereACRAL x QRAL = ($28,000 x 2 x 60%)

= $33,600

Credit Calculation: C = A vacant lot = 3 bedroom dwelling = $28,000 x 60% = $16,800

Resultant levied charge: LCRAL = (ACRAL x QRAL) – C

= $33,600 – $16,800 = $16,800

Example 6 – 4 networks are available to the land Application: Reconfigure a vacant lot into two residential lots. Existing networks: no sewer –parks, transport, stormwater, water available to land Future networks: no sewer –parks, transport, stormwater, water available to land



= $50,400

Credit Calculation: A vacant lot = 3 bedroom dwelling = $28,000 x 90% = $25,200


= $50,400 – $25,200 = $25,200



PAGE 133

Agenda


PAGE 133 Agenda


Page 14

Example 7 – 3 networks are available to the land Application: Reconfigure a vacant lot into two residential lots. Existing networks: no water or sewer –parks, transport, stormwater available to the land Future networks: no water or sewer –parks, transport, stormwater available to the land


WhereACRAL x QRAL = (28,000 x 2)

= $56,000

Credit Calculation: A vacant lot = 3 bedroom dwelling = $28,000


= $56,000 – $28,000 = $28,000

Example 8 – 4 networks currently service the land, 5 networks post-development will be requiredApplication: Reconfigure a vacant lot into two residential lots. Existing networks: no sewer –parks, transport, stormwater, water available to the land Future networks: all –parks, transport, stormwater, water and sewer available to the land



= $33,600


Resultant levied charge: LCRAL = ($ACRAL x QRAL) – C

= $33,600 – $16,800 = $16,800



PAGE 134

Agenda


PAGE 134 Agenda


Page 15

Example 9 – 3 networks currently, 4 networks will be required post-development Application: Reconfigure a vacant lot into two residential lots. Existing networks: no water or sewer – parks, transport, stormwater available to the land Future networks: no sewer – parks, transport, stormwater, water available to the land



= $50,400



= $50,400 – $25,200 = $25,200

Example 10 – 3 networks currently service the land, 5 networks post-development will be requiredApplication: Reconfigure a vacant lot into two residential lots. Existing networks: no water or sewer – parks, transport, stormwater available to the land Future networks: all – parks, transport, stormwater, water and sewer available to the land



= $33,600



= $33,600 – $16,800



PAGE 135

Agenda


PAGE 135 Agenda


Page 16

Part 5 Offset and refund for trunk infrastructure

12. Establishment cost The value of trunk infrastructure required to be provided under a necessary infrastructure condition is included in the infrastructure charges notice and is based on the establishment cost for that infrastructure item in the Schedule of Works in the Local Government Infrastructure Plan, or part of this value if the total project is not required to be constructed under the relevant condition. Where the Local Government has undertaken further or more detailed design work, and/or prepared more detailed estimates, the resultant establishment cost may be applied instead.

Where the Local Government has no estimate of the establishment cost, the ICN will indicate that the establishment cost will be determined using the process identified in Schedule 5 of the Resolution.

For larger scale trunk works or in circumstances Council deems warranted, Council may advise an applicant that the establishment cost for the required trunk works are to be based on a competitive tendering process. To provide guidance for applicants and assessment officers, a competitive tendering process may be required in the following circumstances:

i. The works are external to the development site, and/or

ii. When the scope and scale of the works are substantially different to the other works required under the development approval, and/or

iii. The anticipated establishment cost is in excess of $1,000,000 for any one infrastructure item.

The methodology and amounts listed in Appendix 1 are to be used for calculating the value of the land component of trunk infrastructure to be included in the ICN.

An applicant may require that the local government re-calculate the establishment cost of the required infrastructure following the process outlined in Schedule 4 of the Resolution for the land component of a contribution or Schedule 5 of the Resolution for the works component of a contribution.

13. Contingency allowance for project costs Contingency in infrastructure cost estimating is an allowance for the risks and uncertainties related to the estimate. It is applied to supply and construction elements of project costs to provide a total amount that should not be exceeded for the project (i.e. reduce the risk of project cost overrun). It can be applied as a blanket percentage to the cost estimate or to selected cost items within the cost schedule as well as placing a cost against selected calculated risks. The most common (and least scientific) method is placing a percentage on the total cost estimate. Realistically, the contingency amount applied to preliminary estimates needs to be higher than that applied to construction cost estimates where a design has been produced, the scope of the works is well defined and only limited uncertainties exist.

The contingency allowance will naturally decrease as the project becomes more defined. Typical industry accepted contingency allowances for small projects are shown in Table 3.



PAGE 136

Agenda


PAGE 136 Agenda


Page 17

Table 3 Typical industry accepted contingency allowances for small projects

Phase ContingencyConcept 20% or more* Planning and preliminary design 10 to 15% Detailed design & specification /pre-tender 5 to 8% Construction 3 to 5%

Note * - a more detailed assessment may be appropriate Source: Australian Journal of Construction and Building, Vol 3, No.1

At the construction stage, the cost of design, supervision and project management can be determined to an acceptable level of accuracy due to the defined scope of the work. Consequently, the contingency amount will generally only be applied to cater for risks and unknowns inherent in the type of construction. For example, bridge construction involving deep foundations may still involve considerable uncertainty with regard to that component of the project, but costing of well-defined and low risk components such as the superstructure will have very little risk and uncertainty.

. The percent applied for the purpose of contingency diminishes as a project evolves. Most attributes become more certain and the risks are more able to be quantified. The rates applied in the SOW model area based on the proposed year of delivery and are applied to all types of infrastructure.

With regard to determining trunk infrastructure offset amounts, these should be either pre-tender or construction cost estimates that are based on approved Operational Works drawings with possibly a 3% to 8% contingency allowance dependent on the known risks and uncertainties.

14. Offsets The establishment cost of:

(i) the works component of a trunk infrastructure contribution; and/or (ii) land component of a trunk infrastructure contribution;

is applied as an offset of the levied charge. Offsets are not given for non-trunk infrastructure. Any offset for land that is trunk infrastructure will not include any land area that is necessary for non-trunk infrastructure.

A land component of the public parks and land for community facilities network is to be transferred in fee simple on trust. At the endorsement of the survey plan, a solicitor’s undertaking is to be given to ensure the land is transferred to the Local Government.

The extent of embellishment of public parks is limited to the values listed in Table 4 to ensure a sustainable level of whole of life costs is delivered. The embellishments must meet the requirements of the desired standards of service. For Local Parks, refer to Appendix 2: Indicative Scope of Works - Local Parks.

Table 4: Embellishment value

Park Type Maximum embellishment offset value

Local Recreation Park $267,000District Recreation Park $1,365,390



PAGE 137

Agenda


PAGE 137 Agenda


Page 18

Regional Recreation Park $5,476,085 District Sportsground $24,000,000 Regional Sportsground $72,000,000

The construction of trunk road infrastructure is limited to the trunk items contained in the corridor including associated trunk intersections, traffic lights, lighting, bridges, culverts, kerb and channel, road drainage, pathways and cycle lanes, but excluding the provision of services such as electrical, telecommunications, water supply and sewerage within the corridor. Refer to Appendix 3: Indicative Scope of Works - Trunk Road Corridors.

Where direct vehicular access is permitted to a District Collector road, no offset will be provided for the District Collector road.

Where the Local Government Infrastructure Plan or Active Transport overlay (in the MBRC Planning Scheme) has identified either a Primary or Secondary Active Transport route and the applicant is already obliged to build a pathway to satisfy the infrastructure requirements shown in the standard road cross-section, the Local Government will only offset the difference in cost between the two items.

15. Refunds The Act (section 649) requires that, in instances where the establishment cost of the required trunk infrastructure exceeds the infrastructure charge that would otherwise be levied, the Local Government must refund the difference. The applicant is to provide a notice to the Local Government when the constructed asset has been accepted on-maintenance, or in the case of land, the plan of subdivision and any associated transfer documents are registered in the titles office. The refund, will be paid to the applicant.

An applicant may request that the Local Government consider alternatives to the payment of a refund, such as a transfer to another development site. In those limited circumstances where the Local Government agrees to the request from the applicant, an infrastructure agreement will lay out the terms and conditions for the alternative arrangements.

16. Conversion applications An application to convert non-trunk infrastructure to trunk infrastructure will only be considered where construction of that infrastructure has not commenced and, except for those circumstances listed in section 307A of the Act, the application is made to the local government, in writing, within 1 year after the development approval that imposed the requirement for that infrastructure starts to have effect.

An application for conversion of non-trunk infrastructure to trunk infrastructure will:

i. be assessed against the the conversion criteria in Section 20 of the Resolution; and

ii. processed in the manner prescribed in the Act (sections 138 to 142).



PAGE 138

Agenda


PAGE 138 Agenda


Page 19

Appendix 1: establishment cost (land contribution)

Definitions for Appendix 1:

“Constrained land” means land which, prior to the completion of any works to ameliorate the constraining effects, falls within one or more of the following categories or demonstrates at least one of the following features:

(a) the land is subject to inundation resulting from the runoff of a 1% annual chance average recurrence interval storm over the fully developed stormwater catchment in which it is located;

(b) the development of the land is significantly constrained by environmental legislation related to vegetation management, nature conservation, natural coastal processes or koala conservation such that its intended public use purpose is adversely affected;

(c) the land contains or is to contain development infrastructure such that its intended public use purpose is adversely affected (eg. Stormwater basin or sewerage pump station);

(d) the land is located within a registered easement for power transmission lines or similar development restricting purposes;

(e) the land contains a waterbody;

(f) the land is required for the attenuation of noise, vibration or other hazards pursuant to the impact mitigating provisions of current legislation;

(g) the land has a surface slope in excess of 25%.

For clarity, land that is, in Council’s view, unusable for a residential purpose because of its location adjacent to or within a larger parcel of land affected by (a) to (g), above, is also “Constrained land”.

“Residential area” means land within an Emerging community zone, General residential zone or Rural residential zone under the MBRC Planning Scheme.

Land valuation methodology

(1) For land within a Residential Area, the steps involved in determining the establishment cost of the land component of required trunk infrastructure are as follows:

(a) establish the suburb in which the land is located; and

(b) establish those parts of the land contribution item that are likely to be inundated by flood water for the 1% annual chance using the flood mapping available on the Local Government’s website; and

(c) establish the extent of the land contribution item that is constrained land; and



PAGE 139

Agenda


PAGE 139 Agenda


Page 20

(d) using Table S1.1 and Table S1.2, determine the land value for both the unconstrained and the constrained components of the required land contribution item corresponding to the constraint thresholds listed in the respective table and aggregate the value of each of those components to determine the overall value of that land.

Table S1.1 Suburb based land values (June Qtr 2016)

SUBURBS

LAND VALUES PER M2

Unconstrained Land

ALBANY CREEK $156.48 ARANA HILLS $182.56 ARMSTRONG CREEK $3.13 BANKSIA BEACH $78.24 BEACHMERE $46.94 BELLARA $62.59 BELLMERE $62.60 BELLTHORPE $3.13 BONGAREE $62.59 BOOROOBIN $3.13 BRACALBA $3.13 BRAY PARK $125.18 BRENDALE $125.18 BUNYA $5.22 BURPENGARY $83.46 CABOOLTURE $83.46 CABOOLTURE SOUTH $83.46 CAMP MOUNTAIN $10.43 CAMPBELLS POCKET $4.17 CASHMERE $52.16 CEDAR CREEK $5.22 CEDARTON $2.09 CLEAR MOUNTAIN $5.22 CLONTARF $156.48 CLOSEBURN $5.22 COMMISSIONERS FLAT $3.13D’AGUILAR $5.22 DAKABIN $104.32 DAYBORO $20.86 DECEPTION BAY $114.75 DELANEY’S CREEK $5.22DONNYBROOK $10.43 DRAPER $5.22 EATONS HILL $125.18 ELIMBAH $10.43 EVERTON HILLS $208.64FERNY HILLS $156.48 GODWIN BEACH $62.59 GRIFFIN $125.18 HIGHVALE $5.22 JOYNER $104.32 KALLANGUR $125.18 KING SCRUB $5.22



PAGE 140

Agenda


PAGE 140 Agenda


Page 21

SUBURBS

LAND VALUES PER M2

Unconstrained Land

KIPPA RING $135.62 KOBBLE CREEK $3.13KURWONGBAH $5.22 LACEYS CREEK $2.09LAWNTON $125.18 MANGO HILL $125.18 MARGATE $156.48 MELDALE $10.43 MOODLU $5.22 MOORINA $5.22 MORAYFIELD $83.46 MOUNT DELANEY $3.13 MOUNT GLORIOUS $5.22 MOUNT MEE $3.13 MOUNT NEBO $5.22 MOUNT PLEASANT $3.13MOUNT SAMSON $5.22 MURRUMBA DOWNS $125.18 NARANGBA $93.89 NEURUM $2.09 NEWPORT $156.48 NINGI $62.59 NORTH LAKES $156.48 OCEAN VIEW $5.22PETRIE $114.75 REDCLIFFE $208.64 ROCKSBERG $41.73 ROTHWELL $130.40 SAMFORD VALLEY $5.22SAMFORD VILLAGE $20.86 SAMSONVALE $5.22 SANDSTONE POINT $78.24 SCARBOROUGH $156.48 STANMORE $3.13 STONEY CREEK $2.09STRATHPINE $125.18 TOORBUL $62.59 UPPER CABOOLTURE $62.59 WAMURAN $10.43 WAMURAN BASIN $4.17 WARNER $104.32 WELSBY $2.09 WHITEPATCH $62.59 WHITESIDE $5.22 WIGHTS MOUNTAIN $5.22 WOODFORD $5.22 WOODY POINT $156.48 WOORIM $104.32 YUGAR $5.22



PAGE 141

Agenda


PAGE 141 Agenda


Page 22

Note: this table will be updated by the Local Government annually to reflect land indexation over the previous financial year.

Table S1.2 Constrained land valuations - residential (June Qtr 2016)

Land area more than (m2)

Land area up to (m2)

Base land value

Plus for each m² over

Rate$/m²

0m2 5,000m2 $5.00 5,001m2 10,000m2 $25,000.00 5,001m² to

10,000m²$3.00

10,001m2 50,000m2 $39,997.00 10,001m² to 50,000m²

$2.00

50,001m2 100,000m2 $119,995.00 50,001m² to 100,000m²

$1.00

100,001m2 No Limit $169,994.00 100,001m² $0.50

(2) The steps involved in determining the establishment cost of the land contribution for commercial or industrial land are as follows:

(a) establish the suburb in which the land contribution item is located; and

(b) establish the extent of the land contribution item that is constrained land; and

(c) using Table S1.3 or Table S1.4 or Table S1.5, determine the land value for both the unconstrained and constrained components of the required land contribution item corresponding to the constraint thresholds listed in the respective table and aggregate the value of each of those components to determine the overall value of that land.

Table S1.3 Higher order centre land valuations (June Qtr 2016)

HIGHER ORDER CENTRES

LAND VALUES PER M2

A BUnconstrained Land Constrained Land

CABOOLTURE $300.00 $10.00 MORAYFIELD $300.00 $10.00 NORTH LAKES CORE $400.00 $10.00NORTH LAKES FRAME $300.00 $10.00REDCLIFFE-KIPPA-RING $350.00 $10.00 STRATHPINE $300.00 $10.00

Table S1.4 District centre land valuations (June Qtr 2016)

DISTRICT CENTRES LAND VALUES PER M2


ALBANY CREEK $350.00 $10.00ARANA HILLS $350.00 $10.00BELLARA $250.00 $10.00BURPENGARY $300.00 $10.00



PAGE 142

Agenda


PAGE 142 Agenda


Page 23

DISTRICT CENTRES LAND VALUES PER M2


DECEPTION BAY $250.00 $10.00KALLANGUR $250.00 $10.00 MARGATE $300.00 $10.00PETRIE $250.00 $10.00WARNER $250.00 $10.00

Table S1.5 Major industrial areas (June Qtr 2016)

MAJOR INDUSTRIAL AREAS

LAND VALUES PER M2


BRENDALE $150.00 $10.00BURPENGARY $100.00 $10.00 CABOOLTURE $100.00 $10.00 CLONTARF $150.00 $10.00LAWNTON $150.00 $10.00NARANGBA $100.00 $10.00

(3) Large areas of contiguous land that is to be dedicated for a Community Purpose under the Land Title Act 1994 must be provided to Council in a single allotment unless otherwise agreed by Council. Development with multiple stages should provide the whole connected land parcel in a single stage. Where contiguous land is dedicated in separate parcels, Council’s valuation will be based on an area rate assuming the whole area to be dedicated.

(4) Despite the methodologies stated in clause 1 and 2 above, Council may determine that the establishment cost be determined using the methodology stated in Schedule 4 of the Charges Resolution (before and after methodology).



PAGE 143

Agenda


PAGE 143 Agenda


Page 24

Appendix 2: Indicative Scope of Works - Local Parks WorksServices (water supply/electricity/sewerage) to park boundary Play equipment SoftfallEdgingPathway 1.2 metres wide SeatingTap/bubbler inc meter (+ take off point) BinSignageLandscaping Shade trees (45 litre and caged) BollardsSlip rail Topsoiling and turf/seed EarthworksSite establishment

Note: this is an indicative Scope of Works. The specific Scope of Works associated with any trunk infrastructure item will be determined when recalculating the value of the work contribution.



PAGE 144

Agenda


PAGE 144 Agenda


Page 25

Appendix 3: Indicative Scope of Works - Trunk Road CorridorsWorksDetailed Design Project management, survey, design fee, construction administration

Roadworks Pavements for traffic lanes, on road bike lanes and bus stops Asphalt surfacing Upper sub-base Lower sub-base Prime and seal

Earthworks Filling for corridor Excavation for corridor Excavation of unsuitable material from corridor Imported fill (if required)

Drainage Longitudinal drainage Cross drainage Subsoils inc. kerb connections

Road features Kerb and channel Pedestrian ramps Concrete medians Concrete footpaths

Road furniture and line markingLandscaping Street trees Grass for verge and median

Street lighting

Note: this is an indicative Scope of Works. The specific Scope of Works associated with any trunk infrastructure item will be determined when recalculating the value of the work contribution.



PAGE 145

Agenda


PAGE 145 Agenda


ITEM 2.6 INCENTIVISING INFILL DEVELOPMENT POLICY - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 2 PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT Reference: A15465954 : 21 June 2017 - Refer Supporting Information A15465953 Responsible Officer: KI, Manager Strategic Planning and Economic Development (PED Strategic

Planning) Executive Summary Moreton Bay Regional Council adopted its planning scheme on 1 February 2016. This planning scheme sets a new consolidated vision for the entire region and actively seeks to facilitate development in areas around existing centres and services such as public transport. Development within these identified areas has the potential to put downward pressure on the entire regions rates bill by optimising the utilisation of existing infrastructure rather than requiring further capital outlay. To support this facilitation an incentive policy is proposed, working with applicants within a desired framework to actively facilitate particular developments envisaged by the new plan and needed for the growth going forward. This report seeks Council’s endorsement to adopt the Incentivising Infill Development Policy to support specific developments in three target areas being Strathpine, Caboolture and the Redcliffe Peninsula Line Corridor. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION That the Incentivising Infill Development Policy be adopted, as tabled.


PAGE 146

Agenda


PAGE 146 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.6 INCENTIVISING INFILL DEVELOPMENT POLICY - REGIONAL - A15465954 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background On 8 December 2016 Council was briefed on the intention to prepare a policy with the aim of incentivising infill development within the Moreton Bay region. This follows a body of work that the Planning and Economic Development Division has led to investigate the effectiveness of incentives to bring forward specific development activity within the region in areas already well serviced by infrastructure. In particular, Council is committed to putting downward pressure on the regions rates bill. This policy looks to acknowledge the regions historic infrastructure spend in roads, public transport, drainage and open space, and attempts to incentivise its optimisation. Essentially, accommodating more growth in line with the planning schemes aspirations in locations where the infrastructure already exists. The proposed policy framework includes the waiver of application fees and infrastructure charges for a range of developments for student accommodation, retirement living, aged care, mixed use, short term accommodation development activities within defined graphic areas being the Redcliffe Peninsula Rail Corridor, Strathpine Centre and Caboolture Centre. These areas have been specifically targeted due to the existing capacity within the infrastructure networks therefore its about better utilisation of existing assets reducing the need for further capital outlay. The policy is proposed to commence 1 July 2017 and be effective for two years for any application meeting the use criteria determined under the MBRC Planning Scheme. The exclusions to this are development matters that have been decided by the Planning and Environment Court (ie. Not a Council decision) and it is intended that the total value of the incentive and timing of policy validity be at Council’s discretion. This existing Remission: Development Fees and Infrastructure Charges for Community Organisations and Charitable Groups Policy will remain. 2. Explanation of Item The implementation of a consolidated infill incentives program has the potential to streamline the allocation of incentives and generate increased economic activity in the nominated areas. The policy framework is devised specifically to target uses within areas to benefit the community and economy of the region, and to take advantage of the infrastructure that has been delivered in the region. The implications of not implementing an incentives policy within a market that has access to incentives in other jurisdictions and has a high level of mobility is to create a perception of a non-competitive market for the targeted development outcomes. The implementation of an incentive policy is considered an important element within the framework of the economic development and planning tools available to Council to drive a stronger economic position for the region. The policy has been constructed to be targeted to areas where growth has not occurred as quickly as desired (ie Strathpine / Caboolture) and other areas where we want to capitalise on the infrastructure spend that has already occurred (ie. Redcliffe Peninsula Line). The target uses are those that are in significant demand and support the infrastructure and community need. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

The Policy and Directive have been reviewed by Council’s Legal Services section.



PAGE 147

Agenda


PAGE 147 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 2.6 INCENTIVISING INFILL DEVELOPMENT POLICY - REGIONAL - A15465954 (Cont.)

3.3 Policy Implications Following adoption, the policy will be placed on Council’s internal and external websites.

3.4 Risk Management Implications The Policy will be renewed annually.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications There are no direct delegated authority implications arising from this report.

3.6 Financial Implications The proposed incentives framework has been considered in the budget.

3.7 Economic Benefit This policy has the potential to bring forward new development and benefit the local economy with creation of construction jobs, construction spend and additional expenditure within the region.


There are no direct environmental implications as a result of this policy. 3.9 Social Implications

There are no direct social implications as a result of this policy.

3.10 Consultation / Communication The matter has been workshopped with Council. The introduction of the policy will include communication more broadly.


PAGE 148

Agenda


PAGE 148 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15465953 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 2.6 INCENTIVISING INFILL DEVELOPMENT POLICY - REGIONAL #1 Incentivising Infill Development Policy


PAGE 149

Agenda


PAGE 149 Agenda

Local Government Act 2009 Sustainable Planning Act 2009

Planning Act 2016

ITEM 2.6 - INCENTIVISING INFILL DEVELOPMENT POLICY - REGIONAL (Cont.)


#1 Incentivising Infill Development Policy


PAGE 150

Agenda


PAGE 150 Agenda

Policy: 2150-XXX - Incentivising Infill Development



PAGE 151

Agenda


PAGE 151 Agenda

Policy: 2150-XXX - Incentivising Infill Development

(Council meeting / Minute Page) (revision comment)

Word version reference



PAGE 152 Agenda


PAGE 152 Agenda

HaysInlet

Pine River

BrambleBay

LakeKurwongbah

Bray ParkStation

PetrieStation

StrathpineStation

LawntonStation

DakabinStation

MurrumbaDownsStation

Kippa-RingStation

Mango HillStation

KallangurStation

MangoHill EastStation

RothwellStation

Bald HillsStation


Moreton Bay Regional Council COORDINATION COMMITTEE MEETING 27 June 2017 Agenda

COORDINATION COMMITTEE MEETING 27 June 2017 Agenda

KathrineCrocker

Text Box

PAGE 152a

Bray ParkStation

StrathpineStation

Railway Station

Rail line




KathrineCrocker

Text Box

PAGE 152b

CabooltureStation

Railway Station

Rail line




KathrineCrocker

Text Box

PAGE 152c


3 CORPORATE SERVICES SESSION (Cr Adrian Raedel) ITEM 3.1 WRITE-OFF OF RATES AND CHARGES - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 3 CORPORATE SERVICES Reference: A15432062 : 16 June 2017 Responsible Officer: CH, Financial Operations Manager (CEO Financial Operations) Executive Summary The purpose of this report is to seek Council approval to write-off outstanding rates and charges on Lot 1 Clement St, Woorim. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION That outstanding rates and charges of $5,205.15 owing on Lot 1 Clement St, Woorim be written-off.


PAGE 153

Agenda


PAGE 153 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 3.1 WRITE-OFF OF RATES AND CHARGES - REGIONAL - A15432062 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background The property located at Lot 1 Clement St, Woorim is owned by the State Government and was leased to CMI Industrial Pty Ltd for quarry purposes. The terms of the lease included that the lessee is responsible for the payment of all rates and charges. On 17 May 2016 Council was advised that CMI Industrial Pty Ltd had gone into liquidation, handed the lease back to the State Government, and there were no funds available to pay the outstanding rates and charges of $5,205.15. 2. Explanation of Item All correspondence to date with the relevant State Government departments has resulted in no satisfactory outcome for Council. As the property is owned by the State Government which is exempt from rates and charges in accordance with section 93 of the Local Government Act 2009, the outstanding rates and charges are considered to be unsecured and deemed uncollectible. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Rates and charges are levied in accordance with the Local Government Act 2009 and Local Government Regulation 2012.

3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan Strengthening Communities: Strong local governance - strong leadership and governance.

3.3 Policy Implications Revenue Policy 2017/18.

3.4 Risk Management Implications Nil

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications Nil

3.6 Financial Implications The write-off of $5,205.15 represents lost revenue to Council.

3.7 Economic Benefit Nil


Nil 3.9 Social Implications

Nil

3.10 Consultation / Communication This decision has been made in consultation with the Legal Services Department.


PAGE 154

Agenda


PAGE 154 Agenda


4 ASSET CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE SESSION (Cr Peter Flannery) ITEM 4.1 TENDER - ROAD RESURFACING PROGRAM - REGIONAL - PACKAGE 1 - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 4 ASSET CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE Reference: A15340726 : 2 June 2017 - Refer Supporting Information A15334874 and

Confidential Supporting Information A15321017 Responsible Officer: SP, Team Leader Resurfacing (ECM Operations) Executive Summary Tenders were called for the ‘Road Resurfacing Program - Regional - Package 1’ (MBRC004242) and closed on 30 May 2017, with five conforming and two alternative tenders received. The tender encompasses the road resurfacing of a significant number of roads across the region, in-keeping with the adopted 2017/18 Capital Projects budget. It is recommended that Council award the tender for the ‘Road Resurfacing Program - Regional - Package 1’ to Downer EDI Works Pty Ltd for the amount of $7,856,966 (excl. GST) as this tenderer was evaluated as providing the best overall value to Council. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION That the tender for ‘Road Resurfacing Program - Regional - Package 1’ (MBRC004242) be awarded to Downer EDI Works Pty Ltd for the amount of $7,856,966 (excl. GST).


PAGE 155

Agenda


PAGE 155 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 4.1 TENDER - ROAD RESURFACING PROGRAM - REGIONAL - PACKAGE 1 - REGIONAL - A15340726 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background The ‘Road Resurfacing Program - Regional - Package 1’ (MBRC004242) tender involves the resurfacing of roads across Divisions 1 to 12, in keeping with the adopted 2017/18 Capital Projects budget. The program scope also includes some minor civil works including, but not limited to, line marking, gully pit and kerb and channel replacement where required. The 2017/18 Road Resurfacing Program has been divided into two packages. Package 1 consists of asphalt roads requiring asphalt overlays with minimal preparation and repair. Package 2 includes the balance of projects which require further investigation, testing and design as well as those projects to be undertaken by internal construction crews. 2. Explanation of Item Tenders were invited for the ‘Road Resurfacing Program – Regional - Package 1’ (MBRC004242), and closed on 30 May 2017. Council received a total of five conforming and two alternative tenders. The tender is a schedule of rates contract. The tenders were assessed by a selection panel in accordance with Council’s Procurement Policy and the selection criteria as set out in the tender documents. The following table lists the tender submissions based on a weighted score achieved through assessment (ranked from highest to lowest).

RANK TENDERER EVALUATION SCORE

1 Downer EDI Works Pty Ltd 98.95

2 Downer EDI Works Pty Ltd (alternative offer) 98.60

3 Stanley Macadam Pty Ltd 91.73

4 Fulton Hogan Industries Pty Ltd (alternative offer) 91.02

5 Fulton Hogan Industries Pty Ltd 90.86

6 Allens Asphalt Pty Ltd 85.29

7 Creggs Asphalt Pty Ltd 78.57 Downer EDI Works Pty Ltd (conforming offer) received the highest assessment score for the combined selection criteria. Their submission was comprehensive and offered the second lowest price. This company provided a quality submission, clearly setting out its ability to deliver the program, and demonstrated the required level of knowledge, experience and resources required to undertake these works. Downer have performed similar works for Council in previous years to a satisfactory standard. Downer EDI Works Pty Ltd (alternative offer) - in addition to their conforming offer, Downer provided an alternative tender. This alternative offer included the use of an alternative proprietary asphalt binder (TonerPave) to be used in their asphalt mix. The projected savings, aligned with the current uncertainty of the performance of the proposed alternative product, did not support further acceptance of the offer. Council may explore options to undertake a trial of the TonerPave product on selected streets if Downer are the successful tenderer. Stanley Macadam Pty Ltd tendered the fourth highest price for the works and was ranked third for the combined selection criteria. The tender submission outlined the experience and resources of the company to undertake the works.


PAGE 156

Agenda


PAGE 156 Agenda


Fulton Hogan Industries Pty Ltd (alternative offer) - in addition to their conforming offer, Fulton Hogan provided an alternative tender. This alternative offer proposed working to a superseded specification with lower compaction standards. In return, a lower rate to supply and lay asphalt was offered to Council, given the reduced risk of non-conformance to the contractor. The reduction in cost due to this alternative does not add value for money to Council when the expected reduction in life of the surfacing due to decreased quality performance standards is taken into account. Fulton Hogan’s submission was well documented and scored accordingly for non-priced elements. Fulton Hogan Industries Pty Ltd (conforming offer) tendered the second highest price for the works with their submission not being competitive for priced elements. Their submission was well documented and scored accordingly for non-priced elements. Allens Asphalt Pty Ltd’s submission was comprehensive and outlined their experience and capability to complete the works. Allens Asphalt scored third highest for non-priced elements; however their tendered price was the highest price submitted and was not competitive overall. Creggs Asphalt Pty Ltd tendered the lowest price for the works; however, upon overall assessment, Creggs Asphalt was ranked seventh. The submission did not provide confidence in the company’s capability to deliver the works to an acceptable standard and within the desired timeframe. Creggs Asphalt Pty Ltd has not previously undertaken similar sized works for local government. Their submission detail was poor and raised concerns for several items including provisions for traffic control, subcontractors, workplace health and safety, environmental management and asphalt supply. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Due to the value of the work being greater than $200,000, a competitive tender process was undertaken with Council’s prequalified suppliers for road resurfacing services panel. This panel was set up specifically for delivery of Council’s road rehabilitation and road resurfacing programs. The tender was called in accordance with the Local Government Act 2009.

3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan Valuing Lifestyle: Diverse transport options - an integrated regional transport network

3.3 Policy Implications This project has been procured in accordance with the provisions of the following documents:

• Council’s Procurement Policy 10-2150-006 • Local Government Act 2009 • Local Government Regulation 2012 Chapter 6


A third party review of financial status has been undertaken on Downer Limited (DOW) which is the parent company to Downer EDI Works Pty Ltd. DOW has received a rating of ‘acceptable’ which has confirmed that Downer EDI Works Pty Ltd has the capability and financial capacity to carry out these tendered works. Potential impacts on local traffic and bus routes have been identified as a major risk for these projects. The mitigation strategies to minimise these risks are detailed below:

Impact on local traffic – The contractor will develop and present approved site specific traffic management plans (TMP) and approved traffic guidance schemes (TGS) for each of the locations to be completed under the contract. Traffic speeds will be reduced within the extent of the works to ensure safe passage for road users and construction activities.


PAGE 157

Agenda


PAGE 157 Agenda


Impact on bus services – The contractor’s traffic management method will permit buses to maintain their normal routes. In addition to notifying affected residents, the contractor will notify relevant bus companies of the resurfacing works and the effect they may have on services. Some projects may be undertaken at night to avoid peak traffic times and minimise disruption during school pick up times and business operating hours.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications There are no delegated authority implications related to this project.

3.6 Financial Implications Council has allocated $23,761,500 in the 2017/18 Capital Projects Program for road resurfacing works across the region. The total value of the tenders received is: Total of recommended tenders $ 7,856,966 Contingency (10%) $ 785,696 QLeave $ 37,321 ---------------- Total cost $ 8,679,983 ========= Works will commence in July 2017 and be completed by the end of the 2017 calendar year. A second package of works for the balance of the 2017/18 road resurfacing program will be tendered in August 2017. In addition to the second package of tendered works, several projects will be undertaken internally by Council’s construction crews. These internal works will be predominantly within Divisions 11 and 12.

3.7 Economic Benefit

The road resurfacing works will address pavement surface quality, extend the life of the pavements and reduce recurrent maintenance costs on the scheduled roads.


The tender assessment included a review of the preferred contractor’s environmental policy and procedures regarding environmental protection. The contractor has suitable environmental policies and procedures in place to undertake the works.


The works will improve vehicle safety and the roads’ structural integrity and rideability.

3.10 Consultation / Communication Consultation with residents will be undertaken utilising Council’s Project Update Notice. Direct communication with Translink and all emergency services advising of the timing of the upcoming road works will be undertaken once the contract has been awarded and a finalised program of works has been provided by the successful contractor. Pre-emptive Variable Message Signage will be utilised and displayed prior to and throughout a number of larger select projects, to notify road users. Contractors are to provide written advice to all affected residents two days prior to projects being undertaken.


PAGE 158

Agenda


PAGE 158 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15334874 and Confidential Supporting Information A15321017 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 4.1 TENDER - ROAD RESURFACING PROGRAM - REGIONAL - PACKAGE 1 - REGIONAL #1 2017-18 Road Resurfacing Program - Regional - Package 1 - Work Locations Confidential #2 Tender Evaluation


PAGE 159

Agenda


PAGE 159 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 4.1 - TENDER - ROAD RESURFACING PROGRAM - REGIONAL - PACKAGE 1 #1 2017-18 Road Resurfacing Program - Regional - Package 1 - Work Locations Division 1

Banksia Beach Sunderland Drive - Stage 1 Marina Boulevard Roundabout to bridge (140m north) Bellara Elkhorn Avenue Timari Avenue to Eucalypt Street Bellara Sylvan Beach Esplanade Thornely Close to Dandara Avenue Bellara Warrigal Street Sylvan Beach Esplanade to 10 Warrigal Street Bongaree Palm Avenue Neenuk Street to Welsby Parade Bongaree Partridge Street Cotterill Avenue to Kangaroo Avenue Bongaree Sanderling Lane Kingfisher Drive to end of Sanderling Lane Bongaree Spowers Street - Stage 1 McDonald Street to Gregory Street Sandstone Point Carpenter Way Newport Circuit to 48 Carpenter Way

Division 2

Deception Bay Elna Court Thompson Street to end of Elna Court Deception Bay Camilla Court Elna Court to end of Camilla Court Deception Bay Bailey Road Bayview Terrace to Donowain Drive Morayfield Grigg Drive Grogan Road to end of Grigg Drive

Division 3

Bellmere Piggott Road Bellmere Road to Swann Road Bellmere Bishop Lane Bellmere Road to end of Bishop Lane Bellmere Bellmere Road - Stage 1 River Drive / Bellmere Road Roundabout only Caboolture Drayton Court Glendale Street to end of Drayton Court Caboolture Lang Street Hayes Street to end of Lang Street (50m north) Caboolture Railway Parade McKean Street to Jubilee Street Caboolture Grout Street 20 Rowe Street to Wallace Street South Caboolture Lindwall Street End of Lindwall Street (north) to end of Lindwall Street (south) Caboolture Carseldine Street Railway Parade to Wallace Street North Caboolture Hayden Street Pettigrew Street to Horne Street Caboolture Diamond Street Watt Street to Lawson Street Caboolture Pettigrew Road Pettigrew Road / Moorhead Street Roundabout Caboolture South Dorset Drive Torrens Road to Penshurt Street Morayfield Burnham Road Coralfern Court to Crestridge Crescent Morayfield Lyndal Court Stephanie Drive to end of Lyndal Court Morayfield Wimbledon Drive Graham Road to 32 Wimbledon Drive Morayfield Coralfern Court Burnham Road to end of Coralfern Court (east & west)

Division 4

North Lakes Discovery Drive Lochside Drive to 50m south of Lochside Drive Division 5

Deception Bay Orchid Drive Cross Street to end (both) Deception Bay Tamara Place Bramble Crescent to end of Tamara Place Newport Boardman Road Klingner Road to Griffith Road Rothwell Amcord Place Greene Street to end of Amcord Place Scarborough Daniel Court No. 19 (end) to No. 34 (end) & No.5 to No.9 (end)


PAGE 160

Agenda


PAGE 160 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 4.1 - TENDER - ROAD RESURFACING PROGRAM - REGIONAL - PACKAGE 1 Division 6

Clontarf Maine Road Macdonnell Road to Chartwell Street Clontarf Maine Road Beedham Street to King Street Clontarf Maine Road Hornibrook Esplanade to Gerald Avenue Margate Coolibah Lane Beaconsfield Street to end of Coolibah Lane Margate Mahogany Court Magnolia Street to end Mahogany Court Margate Albert Street Ernest Street to Margate Parade Margate Victoria Avenue Duffield Road to Robina Street

Division 7

Kallangur Whitehorse Road Raffindale Avenue to Sheaves Road Kallangur Magree Street Florence Street to end of Magree Street Kallangur Florence Street Magree Street to Cotterell Road Kallangur Loowa Street Duffield Road to Jenella Street Kallangur Glencoe Street Clyde Street to end of Glencoe Street Kallangur Thompson Road Ann Street to 36 Thompson Road Kallangur Ann Street Penson Court to Crown Street Murrumba Downs Brays Road Moreton Street to Bruce Highway Murrumba Downs Leicester Court Fordington Way to end Leicester Court Murrumba Downs Buchanan Street Warrego Crescent to Burdekin Court Murrumba Downs Pasco Court Pasco Court to Pioneer Place Murrumba Downs Drysdale Court Pine River Drive to end of Drysdale Court Narangba Burpengary Road 20m north of Walmsley Street to McPhail Road Petrie Young Street Patterson Street to Argyle Street Petrie Garonne Court Mathieu Road to end of Garonne Court Petrie Station Street Anzac Avenue to end (roundabout) Petrie Armstrong Street Young Street to end of Armstrong Street? Petrie Whites Road Anzac Avenue to end of Whites Road

Division 8

Bray Park Noeline Court Shirley Street to end of Noeline Court Bray Park Cedrela Crescent Casuarina Drive South to Sparkes Road Bray Park Kentwood Drive Samsonvale Road (east) to Samsonvale Road (west) Joyner Olive Street Karelyn Drive to Coops Place Joyner Youngs Crossing Road McIllwraith Road to 183 Youngs Crossing Road Joyner Fairlane Street Youngs Crossing Road to end of Fairlane Street Lawnton Francis Road Ellis Street to Nightingale Drive Warner Sonata Drive Oakwood Road to Kurrajong Road Warner Blackbutt Street Kurrajong Drive to end of Blackbutt Street

Division 9

Albany Creek Osprey Court Kingfisher Street to end of Osprey Court Albany Creek Myrtle Place Silkyoak Way to end of Myrtle Place Albany Creek Gumview Street Morgan Road to Wivenhoe Avenue Bunya Bunya Crossing Road Queen Elizabeth Drive to Drapers Road Eatons Hill Coolamon Court Laceflower Crescent to end of Coolamon Court Eatons Hill Angel Court Corso Street to end of Angel Court Eatons Hill Saraband Drive Ophelia Crescent to 45 Saraband Drive Eatons Hill Queen Elizabeth Drive Corso Street to Saraband Drive (south end) Eatons Hill Ophelia Crescent 17 to 52 Ophelia Crescent Strathpine Bygrave Street 44 Bygrave Street to Navua Street


PAGE 161

Agenda


PAGE 161 Agenda


Albany Creek Yellowjack Crescent Thiess Drive to Narrabeen Road Arana Hills Woodfield Court Blackwood Drive to end of Woodfield Court Arana Hills Yingally Drive Alan Court to Hutton Road Arana Hills Carissa Street Avalia Street to Fairway Outlook Arana Hills South Pine Road Dawson Parade to Basand Street Everton Hills John Street Garfield Terrace to end of John Street Everton Hills Violet Street Olearia Street East to Camelia Avenue Ferny Hills Leura Grove Illuta Avenue to Joalah Crescent Ferny Hills Glenwood Place Blackwood Drive to end of Glenwood Place Ferny Hills Kootangal Crescent Kylie Avenue to Kolora Crescent

Division 11

Camp Mountain Vonne Court Nullamanna Road to end of Vonne Court Narangba Como Court No. 1 to end of Como Court Narangba Banjora Way Tibrogargan Drive to end Banjora Way Narangba Lily Mac Court Rifle Range Road to end Lily Mac Court Samford Valley Days Road WEST Mount Glorious Road to Cumberland Road Samford Valley Sunset Grove Mount Glorious Road to end of Sunset Grove

Division 12

There are no roads identified for resurfacing in Division 12 within Package 1 2017-2018 Road Resurfacing Program - Package 2 (Division 1 to 12) - Location of Works Roads identified within Package 2 are currently undergoing pavement testing and design, prior to road resurfacing programming. Division 1

Banksia Beach Sunderland Drive - Stage 2 Marina Boulevard to 400m north Bongaree Spowers Street - Stage 2 Gregory Street to Kendall Street Bongaree Toorbul Street 77 Toorbul Street to South Esplanade Bongaree Welsby Parade 239 Welsby Parade to Charlotte Avenue Caboolture Leahy Road 94 to end of Leahy Road

Division 2

Beachmere Bishop Road Randolph Street to Beachmere Road Beachmere Bishop Road 265 Bishop Road to Randolph Street Burpengary New Settlement Road 120m east of Burpengary Road to 163-203 New Settlement Road Burpengary Pitt Road 69 Pitt Road to Henderson Road Burpengary East Old Bay Road 306 to 267 Old Bay Road Burpengary Old Bay Road Maitland Road to 380 Old Bay Road Caboolture Johnson Street Hagars Street to end of Johnson Street

Division 3

Bellmere Bellmere Road - Stage 2 Crebra Court to North of River Drive Roundabout Caboolture Pumicestone Road Bruce Highway to 372 Pumicestone Road Caboolture Lesley Avenue King Street (north) to King Street (south) Caboolture Toohey Street 80/82 Toohey Street to Margaret Street Caboolture Lynfield Drive Smiths Street to King Street Caboolture John Street Morayfield Road to Moon Street Caboolture Smiths Road 34m north of 149 Smiths Road to Spring Lane Caboolture Tomlinson Road Abbey Road to Retirement Village (first car park) Caboolture Old Gympie Road Caboolture Showground to QLD State Equestrian Centre Caboolture Mitchell Street Hayes Street to end of Mitchell Street Caboolture Honeysuckle Street Bluebell Street to Smith Road Caboolture South Frank Street Moon Street to Morayfield Road


PAGE 162

Agenda


PAGE 162 Agenda


Deception Bay Commander Street Admiral Drive to Embassy Street North Lakes Boundary Road 1 Business Drive Seal Change to 11 Boundary Road Seal Change North Lakes Memorial Drive Lakefield Drive to Northlakes Drive

Division 5

Newport Ashmole Road Eversleigh Road to 114 Ashmole Road Redcliffe Klingner Road Scarborough Road to Oxley Avenue Redcliffe Ashmole Road 109 Ashmole Road to Klinger Road Scarborough Oxley Avenue Klingner Road to Griffith Road Scarborough Eversleigh Road Prince Edward Parade to end of Eversleigh Road Scarborough Landsborough Avenue Rock Street to Anderson Street

Division 6

Clontarf King Street Victoria Avenue to Maine Road Margate Macdonnell Road Oxley Avenue to Margate Parade

Division 7

Dakabin Clearview Court Boundary Road to end of Clearview Court Kallangur Old Gympie Road Anzac Avenue to 79 Old Gympie Road Murrumba Downs Pine River Drive Castle Hill Drive to Fitzroy Crescent (south) Murrumba Downs Pine River Drive Warburton Street to Castlereagh Street Narangba Boundary Road Old Gympie Road to 474 Boundary Road Petrie Affleck Avenue Gate to Mungarra Reserve to Andrew Petrie Drive

Division 8

Joyner Regent Street Oxford Street to Samsonvale Road Lawnton Isis Road Todds Road to Francis Road Lawnton Gympie Road 659/661 Gympie Road to end of Gympie Road

Division 9

Albany Creek Explorer Drive 28 Explorer Drive to Albany Forest Drive Brendale Leonard Crescent Kremzow Road to Mackie Way Brendale Old North Road South Pine Road to Kremzow Road Brendale Deakin Street Moonbi Street to South Pine Road Eatons Hill Church Road Drapers Road to Albion Road Eatons Hill Albion Road Church Road to Eatons Crossing Road Strathpine Samsonvale Road Symphony Avenue to 20 Samsonvale Road

Division 10

Albany Creek The Jinker Track South Pine Road to 38 The Jinker Track Albany Creek Frederick Street Jagora Drive to The Jinker Track Everton Hills Camelia Avenue South Pine Road to Grevillea Street Everton Hills Marianne Street Garfield Terrace to Arthur Street


PAGE 163

Agenda


PAGE 163 Agenda


Closeburn Mount Samson Road Jagera Court to Hills Road Closeburn Cedar Creek Road Ian Road to Birralle Close Closeburn Mount Samson Road Jagera Court to 1583 Mount Samson Road Dayboro Hay Road End (east) to end (west) Kings Scrub Endeavour Lane Mount Mee Road to end of Endeavour Lane Kurwongbah Browns Road Forbes Road to 223 Browns Road Laceys Creek Laceys Creek Road 50m South of Rose Lane to Pats Access Driveway Morayfield Oakey Flat Road Young Road to Raynbird Road Mt Glorious Fahey Road 41 Fahey Road to Mount Glorious Road Mt Nebo Mount Nebo Road Westridge Outlook to Mount Glorious Road Narangba Oakey Flat Road McCullagh Crescent to Stark Drive Narangba Oakey Flat Road Pioneer Drive to 1122 Oakey Flat Road Narangba McKenzie Avenue New Settlement Road to MacDonald Avenue Ocean View Townsend Road Ocean View Road to end Townsend Road Ocean View Freds Road May Road (No. 190) to 169 Freds Road Samford Valley Wights Mountain Road 249 Wights Mountain Road to Smiths Road Samsonvale Mount Samson Road Private Road (north of Basin Road) to 112m south of Basin Road Wights Mountain Westbourne Drive Wights Mountain Road to Springfield Court

Division 12

Bellmere Parkwood Place Riverwood Drive to end Parkwood Place Bellthorpe Gap Road Campbell Road to 146m east of 101 (Letterbox No. 126) Gap Road Burpengary Hunt Road Hauton Road to 106 Hunt Road Burpengary Mathew Crescent Rowley Road to 8 Mathew Crecent Campbells Pocket Campbells Pocket Road Dawes Road to 912 / 906 Campbells Pocket Road Cedarton Phillips Road Kilcoy-Beerwah Road to end of Phillips Road Daguilar Mossdale Road D'Aguilar Highway to end of Mossdale Road Daguilar Raaen Road D'Aguilar Highway to 1849 Raaen Road Delaney Creek Wise Street D'Aguilar Highway to Mole Street Delaney Creek Quarry Road King Street to north end of Quarry Road Delaney Creek Riverwood Drive Emswood Court to Belle Air Drive Delaney Creek Gloucester Street Daybell Street to Draper Street Delaney Creek Forest Hills Drive Williamson Road to Dillon Road Delaney Creek Belford Drive Rowley Road to end Belford Drive Moorina Fantail Court Sunbird Court to Moorina Road Moorina Caboolture River Road Moorina Road to Phelps Road Morayfield Forest Hills Drive Wingara Drive to Haywood Road Neurum Stanton Road Vidoni Road to 383/343 Stanton Road Stanmore Bellthorpe Range Road 790 to 617 Bellthorpe Range Road Upper Caboolture Litherland Road Cattlegrid (south of bridge) to end Litherland Road Woodford Neurum Road Access Cul De Sac, Neurum Road to 159 Neurum Road


PAGE 164

Agenda


PAGE 164 Agenda


ITEM 4.2 MORAYFIELD - BUCHANAN ROAD - ROAD WIDENING AND CYCLE SAFETY IMPROVEMENTS - DIVISION 3 Meeting / Session: 4 ASSET CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE Reference: A15211380 : 19 June 2017 2017 - Refer Confidential Supporting

Information A15152483 Responsible Officer: SAM, Principal Engineer (ECM Project Management & Construction) Executive Summary Tenders were invited for the ‘Morayfield - Buchanan Road - Road Widening and Cycle Safety Improvements (MBRC006334)’ project. The tender closed on 7 June 2017 with two conforming tenders received. It is recommended that Council award the contract (MBRC006334) to Aqua Project Solutions Pty Ltd for the amount of $293,539 (excl. GST) as this tender was evaluated as representing the best overall value to Council. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION That the tender for the ‘Morayfield - Buchanan Road - Road Widening and Cycle Safety Improvements (MBRC006334)’ project be awarded to Aqua Project Solutions Pty Ltd for the amount of $293,539 (excl. GST).


PAGE 166

Agenda


PAGE 166 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 4.2 MORAYFIELD - BUCHANAN ROAD - ROAD WIDENING AND CYCLE SAFETY IMPROVEMENTS - DIVISION 3 - A15211380 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background The aim of this project is to provide on -oad bike lanes to the northern side of Buchanan Road between 66 Buchanan Road and just west of Devine Court, Morayfield. The project will complete the on-road cycle facilities for Buchanan Road which is consistent with the SEQ Principal Cycle Network Plan. The works involve the widening of Buchanan Road, reinstatement of driveways and cycle lane line marking. This project is funded through a capital grant from TMR's Cycle Network Program. Construction is programmed to commence in July 2017 and take 12 weeks to complete.

Figure 1: Location of works in Buchanan Road

Figure 2: Layout plan at Millie Street Intersection


PAGE 167

Agenda


PAGE 167 Agenda


Figure 3: Typical cross section 2. Explanation of Item Tenders were invited for the ‘Morayfield - Buchanan Road - Road Widening and Cycle Safety Improvements (MBRC006334)’ project. The tender closed on 7 June 2017, with two conforming tenders received. The tenders were assessed by the assessment panel in accordance with Council’s Purchasing Policy and the selection criteria set out in the tender documents. All tenderers and their evaluation scores are tabled below (ranked from highest to lowest).


1 Aqua Project Solutions Pty Ltd 97.84

2 McIlwain Civil Engineering Pty Ltd 83.61 A summary of the tenderers is listed below: Aqua Project Solutions Pty Ltd received the highest evaluation score. Their experience and construction methodology were considered to be suitable to the works to be undertaken and they have demonstrated completion of similar road construction works. McIlwain Civil Engineering Pty Ltd submitted a sound tender; however there were no extra benefits for the higher cost. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Due to the value of the work being greater than $200,000, an open tender was called in accordance with the Local Government Act 2009.

3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan This project is consistent with the Corporate Plan outcome - Valuing Lifestyle: Diverse transport options - an integrated regional transport network.


• Council’s Procurement Policy 10-2150-006 • Local Government Act 2009


PAGE 168

Agenda


PAGE 168 Agenda


• Local Government Regulation 2012 Chapter 6

3.4 Risk Management Implications The project risk has been assessed and the following issues identified. The manner in which the possible impact of these risks are mitigated or minimised is detailed below. Financial: a. A third party review of the financial status has been previously carried out and the successful

tenderer was rated as ‘sound’. Construction risks: a. The contractor has demonstrated an understanding of the need to manage the impact of the

works on pedestrians and vehicles. The work will be completed such that traffic may continue on Buchanan Road during the works.

b. Residents’ access to their homes will be maintained during construction. Council staff will liaise directly with residents to confirm any particular access requirements.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications

There are no delegated authority implications associated with this project.

3.6 Financial Implications Council has allocated a total of $350,000 in the 2017/18 Capital Works budget for the ‘Morayfield - Buchanan Road - Road Widening and Cycle Safety Improvements (MBRC006334)’ project, to be debited to budget number 100157. Tender price (construction) $ 293,538 Contingency (10%) $ 30,000 QLeave $ 1,400 ----------------- Total project cost $ 324,938 ========== The estimated increase in the ongoing operational/maintenance costs is $1,500 per annum. The budget amount for this project is sufficient.

3.7 Economic Benefit The project will provide improved access and connectivity for residents and complete the missing links that present obstacles to cycling.


The tender assessment included a review of the preferred contractor’s environmental policy and procedures relating to environmental protection. The contractor has appropriate environmental policies and procedures in place to undertake the works and demonstrated knowledge in managing the environmental risks during the construction period.


This project contributes to the principal cycle network route. The works will improve the road surface ride-ability for cyclists and improve connectivity and safety to cycle network users.

3.10 Consultation / Communication A communication plan, together with a pedestrian management plan, will be implemented with the successful contractor prior to works commencing on site. Public communication will include utilising Council’s project notice update newsletter, project signage and the use of pre-emptive Variable Message Signage which will be displayed prior to and throughout the works to notify road users. The Divisional Councillor has been consulted and is supportive of the project and the consultation plan.


PAGE 169

Agenda


PAGE 169 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15152483 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 4.2 MORAYFIELD - BUCHANAN ROAD - ROAD WIDENING AND CYCLE SAFETY IMPROVEMENTS - DIVISION 3 Confidential #1 Tender Evaluation


PAGE 170

Agenda


PAGE 170 Agenda


ITEM 4.3 BURPENGARY - MORETON BAY CENTRAL SPORTS COMPLEX - SOCCER CLUBHOUSE CONSTRUCTION - DIVISION 2 Meeting / Session: 4 ASSET CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE Reference: A15285828 : 19 June 2017 - Refer to Confidential Supporting Information A15207896 Responsible Officer: AR, Senior Project Manager (ECM Project Management & Construction) Executive Summary Tenders were invited for the ‘Burpengary - Moreton Bay Central Sports Complex - Soccer Clubhouse Construction (MBRC005813)’ project. The tender closed on 9 May 2017 with eight conforming tenders received. It is recommended that Council award the contract (MBRC005813) for the amount of $2,180,579 (excl. GST) to MAW Group (AUST) Pty Ltd T/A Oasis Construction (Aust.), as this tender was evaluated as representing the best overall value to Council. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION That the tender for ‘Burpengary - Moreton Bay Central Sports Complex - Soccer Clubhouse Construction (MBRC005813)’ be awarded to MAW Group (AUST) Pty Ltd for the amount of $2,180,579 (excl. GST).


PAGE 172

Agenda


PAGE 172 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 4.3 BURPENGARY - MORETON BAY CENTRAL SPORTS COMPLEX - SOCCER CLUBHOUSE CONSTRUCTION - DIVISION 2 - A15285828 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background The project is located at the Moreton Bay Central Sports Complex, Aquatic Centre Drive, Burpengary. Master planning has been undertaken for the site which was endorsed by Council on 21 February 2012 (Coordination Committee Meeting MP 12/395). The proposed soccer/multi-use precinct includes a clubhouse, road works, six senior fields, including one synthetic field. The civil construction works for the ‘Burpengary - Moreton Bay Central Sports Complex - Soccer Stage 1 (Civil Construction) was endorsed by Council on 21 February 2017, (Coordination Committee Meeting MP 17/250). The contract works associated with this report is the construction of the soccer clubhouse building for the Soccer Precinct. The soccer clubhouse building includes steps and seating, clubroom, meeting office, commercial kitchen, male, female, PWD and public facilities, viewing areas (including Licenced Area), 6 x change rooms, 1 x officials change room, first aid, and storage rooms. Construction is programmed to commence in November 2017 and take 20 weeks to complete.

Figure 1 - Perspective view of clubhouse


PAGE 173

Agenda


PAGE 173 Agenda


Figure 2 - Layout for Moreton Bay Central Sports Complex showing soccer facilities including clubhouse (in red).

Figure 3 - Perspective view showing Field 1 in the foreground, Field 2 in the background and clubhouse between the two fields


PAGE 174

Agenda


PAGE 174 Agenda


2. Explanation of Item Tenders were invited for the construction of the ‘Burpengary - Moreton Bay Central Sports Complex - Soccer Clubhouse (MBRC005813)’ project. The tender closed on 9 May 2017 with eight conforming tenders received. The tenders were assessed by the tender assessment panel in accordance with Council’s Purchasing Policy and the selection criteria set out in the tender documentation. All tenderers and their evaluation scores are tabled below (ranked from highest to lowest).


1 MAW Group (Aust) Pty Ltd T/A Oasis Construction (Aust) 97.62

2 Multi Span Australia Group Pty Ltd 96.85

3 Bryant QLD Pty Ltd 94.49

4 New State Builders Pty Ltd 92.41

5 Leaf Building Group Pty Ltd 90.47

6 NF Corbett Pty Ltd 89.90

7 Main Construction (Building) Pty Ltd 84.32

8 Bli Bli Nominees Constructions Pty Ltd T/A BBN Constructions 82.64

MAW Group (Aust) Pty Ltd T/A Oasis Construction (Aust) received the highest ranking from the assessment panel based upon the selection criteria and submitted a comprehensive, well priced and well-presented tender. A tender clarification meeting was held with Oasis Construction on 24 May 2017, which reinforced their significant and relevant experience in similar public facility and clubhouse construction projects. Multi Span Australia Group Pty Ltd received the second highest ranking from the selection panel based upon the selection criteria. Their submission was comprehensive and demonstrated a clear understanding of the project requirements and capacity to complete the works. Although the Multi Span Australia submission was well priced, it was more expensive than the successful tenderer. A tender clarification meeting was held with Multi Span Australia on 24 May 2017, which reinforced their significant and relevant experience in public facility and clubhouse construction projects. Bryant QLD Pty Ltd received the third highest ranking from the selection panel based upon the selection criteria and submitted a very comprehensive and well-presented tender. Bryant demonstrated experience on construction projects. Bryant’s submission was more expensive. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Due to value of work being greater than $200,000, Council called a public tender for the work through the LG Tender system in accordance with the Local Government Act 2009.

3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan This project is consistent with the Corporate Plan outcome - Valuing Lifestyle: Quality recreation and cultural opportunities - active recreation opportunities.


• Council’s Procurement Policy 10-2150-006 • Local Government Act 2009


PAGE 175

Agenda


PAGE 175 Agenda


• Local Government Regulation 2012 Chapter 6.

3.4 Risk Management Implications The project risk has been assessed and the following issues identified. The manner in which the possible impact of these risks are minimised is detailed below. Financial a) A third party review of financial status has been carried out and the successful tenderer was rated

“Very Strong”.

Construction Risks: a) The site is adjacent to the new sport fields and park and the contractor will be required to provide

safety fencing for the enclosed work site during the construction period. Appropriate pedestrian management will be implemented around the site in line with the traffic management and safety plans.

Wet weather delays: a) The tender document required all tenderers to include an allowance for inclement weather within

their tendered construction time line. The allowance is based upon the Bureau of Meteorology Rainfall Graph for the Brisbane area.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications

There are no delegated authority implications associated with this project.

3.6 Financial Implications Council has allocated a total of $16,050,000 over the 2016/17, 2017/18 and 2018/19 Capital projects budgets for the ‘Burpengary - Moreton Bay Central Sports Complex - Soccer Stage 1’ project to be debited to budget number 101824.

On 24 June 2016, Council received approval for funding of $1,500,000 (GST excl.) for the project under the State Government’s Get Playing Plus program. Design costs expended (2016/17) $ 140,000.00 Tender price (civil construction) $ 11,451,910.02 Contingency (10%) $ 1,150,000.00 QLeave $ 54,397.00 Approvals $ 50,000.00

---------------------- Total civil project cost $ 12,846,307.02

============= Available budget for building works $ 3,203,693.98 Tender price (building construction) $ 2,180,579.00 Contingency (10%) $ 218,057.90 QLeave $ 11,000.00 ---------------------- Total building project cost $ 2,409,636.90 ============= The estimated ongoing maintenance costs for the building are $9,457.20 per F/Y. The budget amount for this project is sufficient.


PAGE 176

Agenda


PAGE 176 Agenda


3.7 Economic Benefit Football Queensland and Football Brisbane have advised that the completion of this project will attract increased numbers of sporting groups to the region in the form of regular state level fixtures, national under-age carnivals and elite-level exhibition matches.

3.8 Environmental Implications Environmental management has been included in the tender and the contractor will be required to manage flora and fauna, sediment and erosion controls during construction and these measures will also be monitored by Council.


The provision of modern safe sporting facilities will have a positive social impact in the community. The development will improve the existing facilities and create a venue where regional and state events can be held. The provision of these sporting facilities and the associated infrastructure will aid Council in its endeavour to promote a healthy and active lifestyle. Positive outcomes will be felt through social, health and economic benefits.

3.10 Consultation / Communication A community consultation methodology was delivered in 2012 through the draft master planning process including a letter box drop to local community, ‘have your say’ day, advertisements and public notices in local newspapers and the Courier Mail, surveys, online community survey on the Council website and briefing meetings with individual stakeholder groups. Public communication about the clubhouse building will include utilising Council’s project notice update newsletter and project signage which will be displayed prior to and throughout the works. The Divisional Councillor has been consulted and is supportive of the project and the consultation plan.


PAGE 177

Agenda


PAGE 177 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15207896 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 4.3 BURPENGARY - MORETON BAY CENTRAL SPORTS COMPLEX - SOCCER CLUBHOUSE CONSTRUCTION - DIVISION 2 Confidential #1 Tender Evaluation


PAGE 178

Agenda


PAGE 178 Agenda


ITEM 4.4 BUILDINGS PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 4 ASSET CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE Reference: A15041503 : 20 June 2017 - Refer Supporting Information A15111040 Responsible Officer: AE, A/Coordinator Asset Management (ECM Engineering) Executive Summary In accordance with section 167(1) of the Local Government Regulation 2012, Council is to prepare and adopt a Long-Term Asset Management Plan. A workshop was held with Councillors on 28 March 2017 in relation to the Buildings Portfolio Asset Management Plan (BPAMP). The workshop considered building condition and defect information, as well as, various strategies that optimise the sustainable management of the buildings portfolio. The strategies and recommendations resulting from this workshop were further developed and have been documented in the attached BPAMP. The BPAMP was workshopped on 20 June 2017. The purpose of this report is to present the BPAMP to Council for adoption. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION That the Buildings Portfolio Asset Management Plan be adopted, as tabled.


PAGE 180

Agenda


PAGE 180 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 4.4 BUILDINGS PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL - A15041503 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background The original Long-Term Asset Management Plan (2012-2021) adopted by Council in June 2012, provided the initial framework for the management of Moreton Bay Regional Council’s (MBRC) infrastructure assets, including building assets. The Queensland Audit Office has recently highlighted that the financial data for asset renewal, upgrades and new assets, needs to be revised annually to inform Council’s Long-term Financial Forecast (LTFF). The Strategic Asset Management Framework and supporting portfolio asset management plans will be updated annually to inform the LTFF. The new Strategic Asset Management Plan (SAMP), as part of a revised Strategic Asset Management Framework, will encompass the following items: • Infrastructure Asset Management Policy (Policy No. 2150-043) • Strategic Asset Management Plan • Portfolio Asset Management Plans (representing 19 asset portfolios) The SAMP is supported by 19 portfolio asset management plans, of which buildings represents one asset portfolio. The SAMP is based on the following strategies: • Optimising maintenance and renewal practices • Prioritising investment to achieve maximum value • Validating investment decisions to confirm funds are being spent effectively • Identifying lower lifecycle cost solutions • Managing risk to an appropriate level • Capturing and monitoring the condition of infrastructure assets now and predicting future condition The attached BPAMP outlines MBRC’s approach to managing and maintaining the buildings network. The processes and principles outlined in this plan are intended to drive improvements in the management of MBRC’s buildings network and the service delivered to the community. The BPAMP will be expanded to include other buildings assets (i.e. facilities) with successive Facility Management Plans that underpin the BPAMP in future iterations of the plan. The adoption of the BPAMP will assist Council in meeting its legislative compliance obligations and assist MBRC in achieving continuous improvement in the management of its building assets. 2. Explanation of Item It is important to ensure that MBRC’s building assets are managed in the most cost effective manner over the complete asset lifecycle to provide the required level of service to the community while managing risk appropriately. Additionally, it is particularly important that adequate renewal funding is allocated to ensure the sustainability of these assets in the long-term. The adoption of the BPAMP will ensure legislative compliance and assist Council in better achieving continuous improvement in the management of its buildings as well as directly linking asset management plans, actions and operations to the budget and the LTFF. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Section 167 - Preparation of a Long-Term Asset Management Plan - of the Local Government Regulation 2012 states that –

(1) A local government must prepare and adopt a Long-Term Asset Management Plan. (2) The Long-Term Asset Management Plan continues in force for the period stated in the plan

unless the local government adopts a new Long-Term Asset Management Plan. (3) The period stated in the plan must be 10 years or more.


PAGE 181

Agenda


PAGE 181 Agenda


Additionally, Section 168 of the Local Government Regulation 2012 states that Council’s Long-term Asset Management Plan must: (a) Provide for strategies to ensure the sustainable management of the assets mentioned in the

local government’s asset register and the infrastructure of the local government; and (b) State the estimated capital expenditure for renewing, upgrading and extending the assets for

the period covered by the plan; and (c) Be part of, and consistent with, the long-term financial forecast.


Council is committed to achieving the community’s vision for the Moreton Bay Region. This vision represents a thriving region of opportunity where our communities enjoy a vibrant lifestyle and is structured upon three key elements; creating opportunities, strengthening communities and valuing lifestyle. These three tiers are underpinned by concepts such as local jobs for residents, strong local governance, and quality recreation and cultural opportunities.

The SAMP and supporting BPAMP have direct linkages with other corporate documents as illustrated in the diagram below:

Figure 1 - Asset Management within MBRC Statutory Planning Context As mentioned above, these plans inform Council’s LTFF in relation to costs associated with new, renewal and upgrade of assets. The plan also guides Council’s Corporate Plan in relation to what Council intends to achieve, in relation to strategic asset management and informs Council’s capital works program which forms part of the Operational Plan and Budget.

3.3 Policy Implications The Infrastructure Asset Management Policy (Policy No. 12-2150-043) was adopted by Council on 18 April 2017.

3.4 Risk Management Implications Risks associated with the buildings assets are included in the plan.



PAGE 182

Agenda


PAGE 182 Agenda


3.6 Financial Implications The SAMP and associated PAMPs inform Council’s LTFF.

3.7 Economic Benefit Sustainable provision and management of MBRC’s building assets supports economic growth across the region e.g. providing buildings and venues to support varying aspects of our community. Additionally, a well-managed buildings portfolio improves the overall amenity of the region and is highly valued by the community.


The management of MBRC’s building assets assists in improving environmental outcomes. 3.9 Social Implications

The timely and cost-effective management of MBRC’s building assets contributes to the overall benefit of residents, visitors, business and industry, by providing the necessary building assets to support the region’s quality lifestyle.

3.10 Consultation / Communication MBRC officers and Councillors have been consulted in the preparation of this plan.


PAGE 183

Agenda


PAGE 183 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15111040 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 4.4 BUILDINGS PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL #1 Buildings Portfolio Asset Management Plan


PAGE 184

Agenda


PAGE 184 Agenda

MBRC Buildings Portfolio Asset Management Plan

ITEM 4.4 - BUILDINGS PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL (Cont.)


#1 Buildings Portfolio Asset Management Plan


PAGE 185

Agenda


PAGE 185 Agenda


Document Reference

Document title Buildings Portfolio Asset Management Plan RIO Reference A15111040 Date prepared June 2017 Date adopted by council Prepared by ECM Infrastructure Planning - Asset Management

Version control

Version Date Revision details Author/s Reviewed by

Draft v1 13 Apr 2017 Initial draft J Turnbull J Frost, J Dominic

Draft v2 9 May 2017 Draft v2 B Armstrong

Draft v3 12 May 2017

Draft v3 A Martini


Draft v4 J Turnbull A Evans

15 June2017

A Martini



PAGE 186

Agenda


PAGE 186 Agenda


CONTENTS

1 PURPOSE 6

2 ASSET INFORMATION 72.1 Building Components 72.2 Building Hierarchy 8

2.2.1 Council Buildings 9

2.2.2 Community Buildings 9

2.2.3 Commercial Buildings 10

2.3 Building Attributes 10 2.4.1 Building Component Attributes 11

2.4 Building Tenure/Leasing agreements 11

3 LEVELS OF SERVICE 14

4 FUTURE DEMAND 204.1 Demand drivers, demand forecast 214.2 Demand impact 21

5 ASSET LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT 225.1 Asset lifecycle 22

5.1.1 Buildings 23

5.1.2 Building components 23

5.2 Asset capacity and performance 24

5.2.1 Utilisation 24

5.3 Condition and profile 24

5.3.1 Condition inspections 25

5.3.2 Modelling and monitoring 26

5.3.3 Resourcing 26

5.4 Risk Management Plan 26

5.4.1 Defects 28

5.5 Routine Maintenance Plan 29

5.5.1 Recommended maintenance plan 29

5.6 Renewal / Replacement Plan 30

5.6.1 Recommended renewal / replacement plan 30

5.7 Creation / Acquisition / Upgrade Plan 31

5.7.1 Selection criteria Error! Bookmark not defined.31

5.7.2 Disposal plan 31

6 SYSTEMS 33

7 FINANCIAL SUMMARY 347.1 Useful life 34

7.1.1 Current useful lives for building assets 34



PAGE 187

Agenda


PAGE 187 Agenda


7.1.2 Estimated remaining useful life for building assets 34

7.2 Financial Statements and Projections 35

7.2.1 Valuations 35

7.2.2 Annual depreciation expense for building assets 35

7.2.3 Maintenance expense for building assets 36

7.2.4 Capital expenditure for building assets 36

7.2.5 Proposed budget 36

7.2.6 Date of valuation and valuation methodology 37

8 IMPROVEMENT AND MONITORING 388.1 Known issues with the quality of data, forecasts and estimates 388.2 Actions required to mitigate the known issues 39



PAGE 188

Agenda


PAGE 188 Agenda


Page 5 of 49

Definitions for abbreviations Term Definition ACR Asset consumption ratio AI Action itemAM Asset Maintenance AMT Asset Management Team (section within Infrastructure Planning) Asset Class First level in Councils parent-child asset hierarchy Asset Group Second level in Councils parent-child asset hierarchy Asset Type Third level in Councils parent-child asset hierarchy Asset Sub-Type Fourth level in Councils parent-child asset hierarchy ARI Average Recurrence Interval ASR Asset sustainability ratio BPAMP Buildings Portfolio Asset Management Plan CSR Customer Service Request ECM Engineering Construction and Maintenance Directorate ENG Engineering ERM Enterprise risk management Embarc Moreton Bay Regional Council Internal Website ePID Electronic Project Identification Document F&PS Financial and Project Services ERUL Estimated Remaining Useful Life GIS Geographical Information System LGA Local Government Area LGIP Local Government Infrastructure Plan IIMM International Infrastructure Management Manual IPWEA Institute of Public Works Engineering Australasia LTFF Long term financial forecast MBRC Moreton Bay Regional Council P&ED Planning and Economic Development PAMP Portfolio Asset Management Plan PIP Priority Infrastructure Plan PM&C Project Management and ConstructionPLM Project Lifecycle Management (System) PSP Planning Scheme Policy RIO MBRC's record management system RUL Remaining Useful Life SAMP Strategic Asset Management Plan T1 Technology One TOMAS MBRC's asset management system (based on Technology One

platform)TRV Total replacement value



PAGE 189

Agenda


PAGE 189 Agenda


Page 6 of 49

1 Purpose The purpose of the Moreton Bay Regional Council (MBRC) Building Portfolio Asset Management Plan (BPAMP) is to outline MBRRC’s approach to the management of building assets under its control. The BPAMP serves to:

Demonstrate responsible and sustainable management; Communicate and justify funding requirements; and Ensure compliance with regulatory requirements.

This BPAMP provides an overview of the status and activities associated with the services provided by MBRC building assets, and current and future risks which may impact the assets. The key phases of the lifecycle of these assets have been considered in the preparation of the plan to provide an overall understanding of the issues and costs affecting the services provided. Action items (AI) have been developed to address identified issues and are listed in section 8.2.

Council’s approach to asset management has been aligned to the ISO55000 series of standards for infrastructure asset management, as outlined in the Strategic Asset Management Plan (SAMP).

This BPAMP will be reviewed and updated on an annual basis and the assets will continue to be monitored in greater detail in future iterations of this plan.



PAGE 190

Agenda


PAGE 190 Agenda


Page 7 of 49

2 Asset Information

There were 1569 buildings captured in the MBRC’s asset management system (TOMAS) as at November 2016. MBRC constructs new buildings each year as part of its capital works program and community organisations construct additional buildings to meet their needs through grants or self-funding. Non-serviceable buildings may also be demolished.

Building assets have been broadly placed into two categories; being, long and short asset life assets.

Long asset life buildings are building’s whose average asset life is greater than 50 years.Generally, these buildings involve significant planning, design and capital investment; ongoing operational and maintenance costs; renewal and upgrade within the building’s lifecycle. Examples of long life building assets are libraries, museums, galleries, MBRC administrations buildings, community halls and commercial offices.

Short asset life buildings are building’s whose average asset life is up to 20 years. Generally, these buildings involve low upfront capital investment of less $50,000, minor operational and maintenance costs, and little to no renewal or upgrade within the building’s lifecycle. Examples of short life building assets are storage sheds and shelters etc.

2.1 Building Components Buildings can be complex or simple structures made up of numerous components, each having different maintenance requirements and associated service lives. To manage buildings and their component systems effectively, a building component hierarchy has been created for long-life buildings. Short asset life buildings such as sheds, are not componentised but managed a single building asset.

From 2015 MBRC has been recording components for the long-life buildings and only applying such where the components actually exist at the building. Where multiple components of the same nature exist (e.g. fire extinguishers), individual components are recorded in the TOMAS. Appendix 2 show MBRC’s current building component hierarchy.

MBRC intends to perform accurate lifecycle modelling at the component level, which will allow renewal programs to be developed for component groups (e.g. air conditioning plant, lifts, etc.) across multiple buildings

The componentisation of buildings has and will allow council to capture and record: specific component attributes maintenance history defects condition rating of critical, high risk and compliance related assets overall condition of building components, flooring, ceilings, walls, etc. asset custodian responsible for the planning, design, renewal, upgrade,

maintenance and consumption (use) of the asset, and tenure agreement (lease) where maintenance responsibilities are applicable

via the lease for the asset.



PAGE 191

Agenda


PAGE 191 Agenda


Page 8 of 49

The maintenance responsibility for the building assets is defined by the tenure agreement applicable to the building. Whilst some components can have maintenance responsibility clearly applied, others will have mixed responsibility based on the trade of maintenance required on the component. For example, structural repairs and painting of an external wall may be the responsibility of different organisations, based on the tenure conditions.

2.2 Building Hierarchy The building hierarchy is a mechanism of classifying building assets together for the development and application of consistent maintenance programs, for financial and project management efficiency.

The building hierarchy functions as a framework for MBRC to manage buildings in the most cost effective, prioritised manner. The hierarchy will be taken into consideration in the future development of inspection programs, building renewals, upgrades, and maintenance programs, to ensure that funds are directed to buildings that have the highest impact on MBRC’s operations. The hierarchy is a three-tiered system as follows:

Table 2.2.1 Councils asset register building hierarchy

BuildingAsset Class

Building Asset Group

Building Asset Type

Based on management responsibility

Based on the primary purpose of the complex or building

Based on the type of structure irrespective of actual use

Council Aerodrome Accommodation Pavilion (Covered area for public use)

Commercial Aquatic Centre Administration Centre Plant Room

Community Car Park Amenities Restaurant

Caravan Park

Arena (large covered area for recreational use, i.e. QSEC)

Shed (Small)

Child Care Centre Canteen (Kitchen facilities)

Shed (Large)

Civic Centre Main building (central building or a complex)

Shelter (car port, covered not enclosed storage)

Commercial Building Clubhouse Shop (retail outlets)

Depot Gallery Sports Hall (Indoor sports)

Educational Facility Community Hall Store

Historical Facility

House (Includes cottages, historical buildings)

Structure (multi story and underground parking, viewing platforms)

Public Assembly Building Industrial Shed/Building

Workshop

Recreational FacilityKiosk (includes booths, turnstiles, stalls)

Residential Facility Library Showgrounds Museum

Waste Management Facility

Office



PAGE 192

Agenda


PAGE 192 Agenda


Page 9 of 49

2.2.1 Council Buildings MBRC buildings are managed for the purpose of:

providing services to the community; providing facilities for public use; and/or undertaking MBRC’s day-to-day operational activities.

MBRC buildings are those buildings where MBRC is responsible to own, operate, maintain, renew, upgrade and replaced.

2.2.2 Community Buildings Community buildings are buildings on land owned or controlled by MBRC; land that are used and managed by community organisations to provide cultural, sporting, social or community support services to the public under a tenure agreement with MBRC. The majority of community buildings are subject to the Community Leasing Policy (14-2150-079).

2.2.2.1 Community Leasing Community Leasing Policy (14-2150-079) states MBRC will be responsible for the cost of maintenance for the following building elements;

building foundations, stumps, footings and piers sub floor framing members building roof frame and trusses building roof (i.e. tiles, metal sheeting) load bearing walls stairs, ramps and

deck/patio (only those structural elements of the building carrying live or dead load such as. framing, posts, bearers, joists and hand rails).

In addition to these items, MBRC will also be responsible for the cost of:

electrician tests of residual current devices (RCDs, also known as safety switches) testing and replacement of fire services (e.g. smoke detectors, emergency lights,

exit lights, alarm panels and fire extinguishers) subject to appropriate use external pest and pest barrier maintenance.

Under the Community Leasing Policy (14-2150-079), the lessee is responsible for all remaining maintenance activities such as, painting, fit out, electrical works, cleaning, floor maintenance and replacement. Should the lessee or occupant not undertake the maintenance, repair or replacement identified in a rectification order within the designated timeframe, MBRC may complete the required works and issue an invoice to the lessee or occupant for the cost of works.

Lessees and occupants must obtain MBRC’s approval before making any improvements, additions or alterations within or to the lease, licence or permit area. MBRC may approve, approve with conditions or refuse applications for approval at its discretion.



PAGE 193

Agenda


PAGE 193 Agenda


Page 10 of 49

Other community buildings may be subject to management agreements or leases that were executed prior to the endorsement of the above policy and remain valid. The responsibility for venue management rests with the community organisation, with repairs, renewals and upgrades undertaken by both the community organisation and MBRC in accordance with the provisions of each tenure agreement.

2.2.2.2 Specialist Facilities The lessee of a specialist facility is solely responsible for all costs of maintaining, repairing and replacing improvements within the lease area as may be required to enable those improvements to be used in accordance with the purpose specified in the lease. MBRC will assist the lessee of a specialist sacility with minor repairs to bitumen car parks and internal roadways. The Caboolture Historical Village is an example of a ‘Specialist Facility’.

2.2.3 Commercial Buildings Commercial buildings are those leased to commercial or private entities for the purpose of operating a business, providing a service or for residential purposes. The responsibility for maintenance, renewals and upgrades to commercial buildings is determined by the individual lease agreement between MBRC and the organisation.

AI-BF1 - Develop and implement building and component star ratings AI-BF2 - Develop and implement building types based on use and function AI-BF3 - Review, document and update Councils building hierarchy, including definitions for each building type AI-BF4 - Document the process for componentising buildings

2.3 Building Attributes A building component is a physical element of the building such as the structure and internal/ external fabric or piece of equipment such as air condition. The attributes of an asset is unique information that describes what the asset looks like, how it is constructed, the material, where it is located, how it operates/ functions, its dependencies and interdependencies, and serial, make and model numbers.

The current attributes assigned to all buildings and components are: Asset owner Unique asset identification - Asset number Unique asset bar code - building and component unique linking identifier Building Classification Location/address Commission Date Last replace / renewal / upgrade date - Used for non-financial assets Custodian - Contact group in MBRC for maintenance/ maintenance approval Maintenance responsibility Land tenure / lease - agreement/status Criticality Rating - Based on ERM framework for defect risk score Materials Dimensions Heritage Status Compliance to Disability Discrimination Act, as determined by building

classification



PAGE 194

Agenda


PAGE 194 Agenda


Page 11 of 49

Asbestos detected in building and Pest Barrier Details

2.3.1 Building Component Attributes Building component attributes will be unique information captured for each asset type. The following is an example of the attributes capture against a building switchboard and generator:

Building switchboard attributes: Number of RCDs (#) Cabinet type (material) Number of meters (#) Lightning protection (Y/N) Main supply board (Y/N)

Main board number (#) What do the board/s control i.e. Zone, Lighting, Air Condition Units, pump sets, etc.

Electrical diesel generator attributes: Primary Function (backup , emergency) Fuel type (Diesel/Other) Fuel capacity (L) Unit rating (kVA) Enclosure type (description) Cooling system (description) Oil filter (Part number/description) Air filter (Part number/description) Fuel filter (Part number/description) Water filter (Part number/description)

AI-BF5 - Review and update the attributes captured against the buildings and buildings components

2.4 Building Tenure/Leasing Agreements

Buildings captured in TOMAS operate under various ownership arrangements, tenure/leasing agreements and maintenance responsibilities. A combination of these agreements and responsibilities is used to identify to MBRC staff as to who is responsible for the day to day maintenance of the building and its associated components.

Table 2.4.1 Buildings by asset register ownership BuildingOwnership

Definition for Building Ownership Qty.Buildings

Private Privately owned buildings on MBRC owned or managed land. These are generally constructed by community organisations through external grant funding.

191

Council MBRC owned buildings on MBRC, private or crown owned land

1378

Total 1569



PAGE 195

Agenda


PAGE 195 Agenda


Page 12 of 49

Table 2.4.1 Buildings by tenure type Tenure Definition of tenure type Qty.

Buildings

MBRC No leasing agreement - MBRC owns, operates and maintains the building and all components.

505

Community Lease (2014)

Community leasing agreement that is executed under the provisions of the Community Leasing Policy, endorsed by MBRC in 2014. MBRC is responsible for renewals of MBRC-owned buildings; and maintenance of the building structural components, roof fabric, fire and electrical systems and external pest control associated with such buildings. The lessee is responsible for all other maintenance. E.g. Floor maintenance, painting, interior fabric repairs

452

Community Lease (Old)

Community leasing agreement that was executed prior to the introduction of the Community Leasing Policy 2014. Maintenance responsibilities will vary depending on the individual agreement. Generic responsibilities are “unknown”, and require inspection of each agreement prior to works being undertaken. E.g. Where MBRC is responsible under Community Lease (2014) for roof fabric it may not be under the old community lease. Alternatively under the old community lease agreement MBRC may not be for the building structural components

206

CommercialLease

Commercial leasing agreement - A fixed term contract for the use of all or part of a building for commercial purposes. MBRC currently manages its commercial leases through a third party. Maintenance responsibilities are defined in the individual agreements. E.g.33 King St Caboolture, 184 Station Rd Burpengary

71

Management Agreement

An agreement between MBRC and a commercial or community organisation for the ongoing management of a facility which will delineate maintenance, renewal, upgrade and capital works responsibilities. MBRC generally has a greater level of responsibility and cost compared to a Community Lease. E.g. Arana Hills District Community Centre, Mango Hill Community Centre

195

Mixed Tenure Not a tenure agreement per se, but rather, multiple tenure types exist within a single building. Maintenance responsibilities will vary throughout the building, depending on the location of the issue. Individual tenure agreements would need to be reviewed prior to undertaking work. E.g.The Corso, which consist of Library (MBRCl), Commercial space - levels 1, 2, & 3, and Community space - main hall and meeting rooms

23

Residential Lease

A fixed term contract for the use of a residential building, primarily for accommodation purposes. MBRC currently manages its residential leases though a third party.

26

SpecialistFacility

A category of tenure within the Community Leasing Policy in which the structures and/or activities conducted on a site are specialised or unique in nature, or akin to commercial operations. Building maintenance, renewal and replacement is the full responsibility of the tenant. MBRC has no responsibility for building works. E.g. Caboolture Historical Village

91

Total 1569



PAGE 196

Agenda


PAGE 196 Agenda


Page 13 of 49

Table 2.3.3 Count of buildings maintenance responsibility and definition Maintenance Responsibility

Definition of Maintenance Responsibility Qty.Buildings

Building has beencomponentised

Building componentised - refer to component for maintenance responsibility

681

Not maintained by Council

Building under a commercial lease or management agreement where building components are not maintained by Council

267

Maintained by Council

Building maintained by Council - Not componentised i.e. sheds, shelters

621

Total 1569

AI-BF6 - Review and update owner, tenure and maintenance responsibility for all buildings and associated building components



PAGE 197

Agenda


PAGE 197 Agenda


Page 14 of 49

3 Levels of Service A key factor for MBRC’s asset planning is to match the levels of service delivered to the service level expectations of the customers / community and the associated funds required, linking to the LTFF.

Effective asset management planning is based on the relationship between price, performance and risk associated with the service delivery. There are two types of service level considered - community and technical, as outlined in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 Definition of level of service Level of Service Definition

Community service level

What standard an asset or group of assets must meet when deemed to be achieving reasonable community expectations. This definition typically describes the function, capacity, quality and safety standards of the asset/s.

Technical service levels

How this standard of asset/s is to be achieved. Identify the need for the asset (provision

service level) Identify the criteria to be applied to scope the

asset (development service level) Identify the ongoing maintenance requirements

(maintenance service level)

MBRC aims to provide continual improvement in the management of its building assets, from both a community service level perspective and at a technical service level. The community and technical services levels below are not specific to one group. The service levels have been developed as a guide for each MBRC group to develop their own services levels.



PAGE 198

Agenda


PAGE 198 Agenda


Page 15 of 49

Table 3.2 MBRC’s building community service levels:

Service Attribute Service Objective

Performance MeasureProcess

Current performance Expected performance in 10 years (LTFF)

Quality Fit for purpose Condition of building

Condition of buildings is recorded in the asset register.

Buildings star rating 5 and 4 are condition rating 2 or higher.

Building star rating 3 and 2 are condition 3 or higher

Buildings star rating 1 are managed by priority and to agreed standard.

Condition ofcomponents

Condition of components is recorded in the asset register.

Buildings components star rating 5 and 4 are condition rating 2 or higher.

Building components star rating 3 and 2 are condition 3 or higher.

Buildings components star rating 1 are managed by priority and to agreed standard

Quality Facilities areclean and in a presentable condition

Amenity of Building and facility

Buildings are managed to lease/ contract agreements

All buildings are audit / inspected at a minimum 12 month frequency.

Customer service requests (CSR)

CSRs are managed on the as per the work system priority rating.

0 CSRs relating to the cleanness of a building under a cleaning contract. (Excluding graffiti)

Maintenance to prescribed standards relative to building use

Buildings are managed to required safety / compliance standards

Facility and maintenance management plans

Function / Capacity / Utilisation

Facilities are readilyavailable and accessible

Degree of availability and accessibility

Maintenance activities are planned and performed were possible after hours, off seasons and low peak periods

As required and per building classification Council has upgrade buildings to DDA standard.

Buildings undergoing renewals / upgrade are still able to offer the standard minimum function

Renewals and upgrades of buildings incorporates bring building to DDA requirements

Component failure or loss

Component failure or loss of function/ service are managed through CSRs, work orders and defects

Component failure or loss of function / service is reduced significantly to current levels.



PAGE 199

Agenda


PAGE 199 Agenda


Page 16 of 49

of function/ service

in accordance with the work systems priority rating.

Components and services are managed through routine, programed and renewal/ replacement programs.


Facilities are safe and free from hazards

No of injuries Reported injuries 0 Injuries due to identified / reported hazards

Hazards rectification

Identified/ reported hazards are made safe and rectified in accordance with Council policy

Identified / reported hazards are made safe with 2 hours and rectified, managed / planned for repair within 24 hours


Availability of buildings

Each building will be available to its users during its normal operatinghours of the service it supports.

Where possible maintenance tasks are planned and performed as not to disruption normal services/ operations.

Maintenance tasks are planned in a manner that reduces disruption to buildings service / operation during normal hours. All planned maintenance tasks are grouped and performed to limit / reduce the number of disruption to services / operations

Sustainable management of building assets

Buildingassets are renewed or replaced at the rate of consumption as measured by the Asset SustainabilityRatio(Renewal CapitalExpenditure / Replacement Cost)

23% Increase the renewal replacement budget to meet the recommended 90% sustainability ration.

Legislative Compliance

Legal and statutoryCompliance of facilitymanagement

Compliance with relevant legislation, regulations and codes

Audit on legal and statutory compliance

All buildings are audited / inspected at a minimum 12 month frequency to the required compliance standards.

Heritage Preservation

Building with a cultural, state and local heritage status are managed in accordance with Council heritage policy.

Councilbuildings listed on the Heritage list / register are preserved and maintained in accordance with legislation and the heritage plan

Were identified buildings are maintained in accordance with the cultural, state and local heritage policy

Buildings flagged with a heritage classification are managed in accordance with legislation and heritage plan



PAGE 200

Agenda


PAGE 200 Agenda


Page 17 of 49

Table 3.3 MBRC’s building technical service levels:Service Attribute

Service Objective Activity measure process

Current performance

Desired optimum lifecycle cost

Agreed sustainable position

Operations Buildings are maintained in acceptable condition and “fit for purpose” as per building category and facility and maintenance management plans

Condition of facility,number of defects completed, number of CSRs raised

Buildings are managed on a priority bases.

Defects are managed on a priority basis

CSRs are managed in accordance with the work order priority rating

All buildings maintained to a condition 2 or better state

Defects are managed by priority and closed within 12 months.

0 CSRs relating to failure/ loss of function, operation are managed through Councils work systems through work orders and defects (excluding vandalism)

Buildings star rating 5 and 4 are condition rating 2 or higher. Building star rating 3 and 2 are condition 3 or higher Buildings star rating 1 are managed by priority and to agreed standard Defects are managed on a priority bases in line with MBRCls defect management policy

0 CSR relating to service (excluding vandalism)

Buildings are safe and accessible

Condition of facility, DDA and fire compliance

Buildings are inspected every 12 months.

On all buildings, a safety audit is performed at a minimum 12 month frequency.

All buildings based on classification are DDA compliant

0 buildings fire compliance non-conformance defects

On all buildings, a safety audit is performed at a minimum 12 month frequency.

All buildings based on classification are DDA compliant

0 buildings fire compliance non-conformance defects

Maintenance Routine Maintenance Activities

Scheduled maintenance activities are completed

Minimal All Routine maintenance tasks are planned and scheduled in Councils system

Known routine maintenance tasks are planned and scheduled in MBRC’s systems



PAGE 201

Agenda


PAGE 201 Agenda


Page 18 of 49

Service Attribute


Current performance



Number of defects recordedduring routine maintenance activities

All issues are recorded as defects

Defects are managed and rectified within the time frames, outlined in Councils defect policy

High priority defects are managed to reduce risk; Lower priority defects placed within a works program

Reactive work orders

Priority 20% for work performed on buildings is reactive works (excluding graffiti)

Decrease per capita in reactive WOs

Facility and maintenance Management Plans

Nil Facility management plans for 4 & 5 star rated buildingsBuilding type maintenance management plans for 1, 2, & 3 star rated buildings Asset type maintenance management plans.

Facility management plans for 4 and 5 star rated buildings Maintenance and asset maintenance plans in place and operating for building types and asset types

Budget $8.9M Routine and programmed maintenance budget is a developed to reflect actual maintenance tasks and requirements.

Reactive maintenance budget is only 20% of the overall maintenance budget.

Routine and programmed maintenance budget is a developed to reflect actual maintenance tasks and requirements.

Reactive maintenance budget is only 20% of the overall maintenance budget.

Maintenance Buildings are “fit for purpose”

Buildingscheduled work orders

All buildings scheduled inspected every year

Building are rated and inspected in accordance with priority/ importance with an increase to the 12 monthly frequency inspection for high priority/ important buildings

All buildings are inspected at a minimum frequency of 12 months for; - Condition - Defects - Compliance - Safety

Defects are managed to ensure they are completed

Defects are bundled and managed through B&F planned

All defects are managed and/ or rectified within 12ed in Councils defect policy

High priority defects are managed to reduce risk



PAGE 202

Agenda


PAGE 202 Agenda


Page 19 of 49

Service Attribute


Current performance



in a timely manner

maintenance program

Lower priority defects placed within a works program

Capital programming - renewals

Buildings and components meet the estimated useful life and are maintained to the required condition state

Renewals program - Number of projects to rectify condition 4 & 5 assets

Buildingrenewals projects created by priority through stakeholder consultation

10 year building and component renewals program to manage building and components to the agreed minimum condition state based on the asset rating

10 year building and component renewals program to manage building and components to the agreed minimum condition state based on the asset rating

Building renewals budget.

Budget $2.7M buildingsrenewals program.

Buildings renewals meets the recommended 90% of ASR.

A gradual increase to renewals / replacement budget to meet the recommended 90% ASR.

Capital programming - upgrade

Buildings and components upgrade to meet utilisation and stakeholder requirements.

Building and component upgrade to increase asset capacity

Buildingupgradeprojects are identifiedthrough stakeholder consultation

10 yeas prioritised capital works program for upgrades to increase capacity, function or modernise buildings

10 year forecasted building and components upgrade program focused on; - Demand - Utilisation - Population

growthBuildings and components upgrade to meet changes in technology standards.

Buildingupgradeprojects include option analysis for technology.

New technology included in project initiationphase.

100% of building and component upgrades meet new technology standards.

Where sustainable new building upgrades meet new technology standards.

Capital programming - new

New buildings and components are designed and constructed to; - The highest

useful life achievable

- The best value for money.

- Meet demand requirements

Demand and whole of lifecycle cost of a new building or component is consider for project selection.

New buildings and components are selected on demand bases

100% of new building and component projects are constructed to meet current and future demands, utilising the whole lifecycle costing approach.

100% of new building and component projects are constructed to meet current and future demands, utilising the whole lifecycle costing approach.

AI-BF7 - Engage stakeholders to improve community and technical level of services requirementsAI-BF8 - Develop the processes for monitoring and recording expected performance in 10 years (LTFF) AI-BF9 - Develop facility management plans for critical MBRC buildings



PAGE 203

Agenda


PAGE 203 Agenda


Page 20 of 49

4 Future Demand Growth management is identified as a key issue in Council’s Corporate Plan, and well planned growth is emphasised in the Community Plan.

Moreton Bay Region has been one of the ten fastest growing local government areas in Queensland over the past decade. This strong growth is predicted to continue, with an increase in population of the region by over 200,000 people or 48% by 2036. Table 4.1 below shows estimated population growth for Moreton Bay over this period.

Table 4.1 Estimated population growth for the Moreton Bay regionYear Population Annual change Annual percentage

change Jobs

2011 387,685 103,491

2016 429,048 8,273 1.93% 113,132

2021 478,304 9,851 2.06% 127,246

2026 536,073 11,554 2.16% 141,843

2031 589,458 10,677 1.81% 156,238

2036 634,819 9,072 1.43% 170,350 Source: LGIP2 Planning assumptions May 2016 – Moreton Bay Regional Council).

Within the Corporate Plan, MBRC has responded to this issue by identifying ‘a sustainable planning and design framework to manage growth’. For each major asset group, MBRC has appropriate levels of development planning in place to cater for the predicted changes over the foreseeable future.

The Strategic Planning team within P&ED are currently finalising council’s first Local Government Infrastructure Plan (LGIP1), which is based on existing trunk infrastructure planning. Concurrently work has already commenced on developing the next generation of LGIP (LGIP2) which is planned to have statutory approval by December 2019.

An LGIP is based on:

Planning assumptions for population growth, employment growth and projected development;

Priority Infrastructure Areas (PIAs) where MBRC anticipates growth will be focused over the next 10 to 15 years;

The future schedule of works for each of MBRC’s trunk infrastructure networks, to meet the Desired Standard of Service for the trunk networks;

Financial modelling, including existing and future asset costs and demand, and financial forecast details (infrastructure charges revenue vs trunk infrastructure expenditure);

Spatial mapping and Existing asset information.

There is a statutory requirement to have alignment with MBRC’s long term asset management plan and long term financial forecast (LTFF) and this will be required by late 2018.



PAGE 204

Agenda


PAGE 204 Agenda


Page 21 of 49

4.1 Demand drivers, demand forecast Factors affecting the demand for building asset upgrades and growth include increasing population, changing growth centres, and changing demographics in the medium term, and environmental awareness, economic factors and land development in the longer term.

4.2 Demand impact By 2020, the next generation Local Government Infrastructure Plan (LGIP2) should be completed with statutory approval. In the meantime there are several projects due to be delivered within the next five years which have not changed from those previously identified through MBRC’s planning and operational departments.

Currently the State government is only programming projects out to five years. Consequently projects beyond this timeframe cannot be predicted with confidence, limiting the information that can be included here.



PAGE 205

Agenda


PAGE 205 Agenda


Page 22 of 49

5 Asset Lifecycle Management Best practice for asset management requires the consideration of all whole of life phases with activities which are timely and cost effective, to ensure consistent service standards and longevity from the asset.

MBRC’s buildings vary widely in design, construction, age and use. MBRC is committed to understanding the condition, function and utilisation of its building assets to optimise lifecycle planning and managing risk to an appropriate level.

5.1 Asset lifecycle

It is MBRC’s goal to manage the lifecycle of buildings and building components utilising a tailored approach based the building and component hierarchy, service life and expected usage. This covers all stages from business case development, through the design and construction phase, ongoing maintenance and renewal programs, to decommissioning or disposal.

Figure 5.1.1 shows a typical asset deterioration curve of an asset through the operation phase, demonstrating the renewals and upgrades/ replacement pattern/ profile.

1

2

3

4

5

Asset condition

New Condition

Asset Renewal

Asset upgrade/ Replacement

Minimum Levelof Service

Reduce service/function

Start of renewalsmaintenance

Asset deterioration curve

Asset age/service life

An understanding of the building usage, level of criticality in the community and desired level of maintenance all factor into design considerations and lifecycle financial costings.

MBRC’s current buildings asset portfolio has 1,569 buildings, with ongoing maintenance and financial decisions to be made regarding maintenance, upgrade, renewal and disposal based on the progress of the buildings through their lifecycle. Data capture on building condition ratings assist in building the condition profile of each building, to enable comparison to its expected remaining useful life, and rectification measures implemented as required.



PAGE 206

Agenda


PAGE 206 Agenda


Page 23 of 49

5.1.1 Buildings MBRC currently determines the remaining useful life of buildings by the commission date and original estimated service life based on industry standards for the type of construction, with matching depreciation schedules applied. With more information and understanding of the building stock, MBRC’s approach will be to use a combination of design life, ongoing condition assessments, predictive maintenance modelling techniques, capacity / utilisation, and criticality rating.

Maintenance programs are to be developed as tailored solutions, to enable the service life of each building to be achieved at a reasonable financial investment.

It is expected that the cost of maintenance for buildings will increase as the building portfolio ages, with mid-life refurbishments improving functionality and aesthetic appeal but not diminishing ongoing maintenance costs. As the condition of the asset deteriorates, further investment in maintenance has little benefit and the preferred option is to replace, decommission or demolish. Criteria to assist in making this determination requires development.

5.1.2 Building components Buildings are complex assets made up of numerous varying systems and components, each having a different service life, maintenance and renewal requirement, and level of risk. No two buildings are the same and the demand on systems and components will vary from building to building to building. To enable MBRC to manage buildings more efficiently and to the desired level of service, buildings will be componentised.

Componentising buildings down to individual elements will allow improved accuracy in assessment, proactive maintenance, replacement modelling and work order/defect managing. The service life listed for each asset is only achievable if the recommended level of maintenance activities are performed throughout the life of the asset. It is expected that as more utilisation data and physical asset parameters are collated on building components, further strategic analysis can be undertaken to optimise building inventory based upon needs and future demands. Appendix 3 shows a guide to the estimated service life of building components.

AI-BF10 - Investigate appropriate commercial tools / develop a tool to calculate the EULR for buildings and components AI-BF11 - Review and update service life (RUL) of buildings based on building hierarchy classification AI-BF12 - Investigate appropriate commercial tools / develop lifecycle assessment tool for modelling new and existing assets AI-BF13 - Review / update asset register commission dates, adding the ability to track building additions, renewals, internal reconfiguration and upgrades. AI-BF14 - Develop balanced criteria (TBL) to aid lifecycle decisions, including determining when assets shall run to failure and/or when buildings will be renewed, upgraded, replaced, decommissioned, and/or demolished



PAGE 207

Agenda


PAGE 207 Agenda


Page 24 of 49

5.2 Asset capacity and performance

Building assets provide function and use within the region and comprise a mixture of buildings with long and short asset life. Building assets are designed to deliver services to meet need and use while offering value for money over the asset life.

MBRC will develop processes and invest in technology to better understand how particular building assets are used and are performing. A trial to collect utilisation data of certain building assets is proposed as the initial step towards greater information collection, and will inform process and system decisions for future roll-out across other asset types for which meaningful data can be obtained. Asset utilisation will form a critical component of MBRC’s predictive modelling approach.

AI-BF15 - Develop the system and processes for tracking asset utilisation and performance - identify types of buildings for which it is relevant (single-use, etc.). AI-BF16 - Investigate technology and associated systems and treatment methods to improve data and performance, including costs of assets / components

5.3 Condition and profile

Condition data is collected annually on each building. Building components are continually being created, with condition ratings applied at subsequent inspections. Future data capture will occur through suitably qualified contractors that are engaged for service maintenance contracts who will be attending to each component during programmed maintenance.

The figure below shows the current condition profile of buildings in Council’s asset management system. This condition rating is based on a standard approach were all buildings are condition scored against the same criteria.

Figure 5.3.1 Condition profile of short-life buildings

14 64

365

10210 31

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

1 2 3 4 5 TBC

Num

bero

fbuildings

Condition rating

Short life buildings condition profile



PAGE 208

Agenda


PAGE 208 Agenda


Page 25 of 49

Figure 5.3.2 Condition profile of long-life buildings

Note: Buildings with a condition of TBC where either new / capture buildings and will be inspected next cycle.

5.3.1 Condition inspections Building asset conditions are generally assessed using the NAMS and IIMM 1 to 5 scoring criteria, being:

Condition Grading

Description of Condition

1 Very GoodOnly normal maintenance required

2 GoodMinor maintenance required

3 ModerateSignificant maintenance required

4PoorSignificant ongoing maintenance/renewal/upgrade required

5 Very Poor Asset requires decommissioning and/or replacement

The condition rating assesses the overall physical condition of the core structural element of the building or component, in comparison to an “as new” or perfect condition.

Other issues that do not affect the integrity of the asset are identified and recorded in TOMAS as defects, which are addressed and rectified according to the draft Buildings and Facilities Defects Management Plan. Defects are discussed further in Section 5.4.1.

30 91

710

109 8 350

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

1 2 3 4 5 TBC

Num

bero

fbuildings

Condition rating

Long life buildings condition profile



PAGE 209

Agenda


PAGE 209 Agenda


Page 26 of 49

5.3.2 Modelling and monitoring MBRC will develop and implement systems which will enable more accurate modelling and monitoring of building performance, and subsequent re-evaluation of maintenance programs and the financial investment in building maintenance. Systems and processes that will assist in this regard include:

Recording utilisation in certain building types (e.g. single use public toilets) Identifying and recording critical physical parameters on key assets and

components Maintaining trend data on physical parameters of building assets Maintaining trend data on asset condition ratings.

5.3.3 Resourcing MBRC utilises internal building inspectors to perform annual condition inspections on all MBRC owned and maintained buildings as per prioritised inspection regime by building type. Prior to 2016 condition data was captured at a building level and not on building components. The componentisation of buildings has allowed the building inspectors during the 2016 inspection program to capture condition data to component level.

Some components require qualified / specialist personnel to inspect and assess. Future service maintenance contracts will be able to incorporate the condition assessment to complete council’s data set.

AI-BF17 - Review and modify the building inspection program to match building hierarchy/ Star rating AI-BF18 - Develop and document building inspectors inspection process AI-BF19 - Develop a technical building and building component condition rating scale to reflect long-life and short-life buildings and each asset AI-BF20 - Add condition capture criteria to service contracts where applicable, utilising a standardised condition rating assessment criteria for consistency across all assetsAI-BF21 - Develop the RUL criteria and calculation method for each building and component

5.4 Risk Management Plan

A building infrastructure risk management plan should form a basis by which MBRC assess the current and potential risks. Risks should be assessed against a corporate enterprise risk management framework to identify the risk, scoring the likelihood and consequence, and the process to eliminate or mitigate the risks.

MBRC last performed a detailed building risk assessment in 2009 with stakeholders, but has not been updated or developed into a formal building infrastructure risk assessment process that aligns Council’s Enterprise Risk framework with the new building and component hierarchy. The following table was taken from the previous asset management plan.



PAGE 210

Agenda


PAGE 210 Agenda


Page 27 of 49

Table 5.4.1 2009 building risk assessment table:

Type of Risk Risk Consequences Existing control measures

Likelihood aftercontrolmeasures

FinalRisk Rating

Service delivery

Structural damage to building or failure of critical components

Buildingbecomes unfit for purpose

Regular maintenance, condition audits

Unlikely Moderate

Environmental Inadequate programs for energy and lightingefficiency, recycling and waste

Poor community perceptions, excessive contribution to land-fill & GHG

Efficiency audits programs and renewal, use of controls in buildingmanagement systems, staff awareness.

Possible Minor

Financial Inadequate resources

Compromised performance of facility

Levels of service similar to industry standards, budget allocations and review

Possible Moderate

Fraud and corruption

Asset not maintained or serviced in line with contract

Loss of money under/not serviced assets

Contractmanagement, auditing and inspections

Unlikely Minor

Legal,regulatory & liability

Change of legislation.

Non-compliance with laws and codes, possible fines

Notification of legal changes, advice from professionals

Possible Minor

Health & safety

Damaged / faulty assets / equipment

Injuries to persons

Regular maintenance, H&S audits & inspections, staff culture of reporting issues via customer requests

Possible Moderate

Political / reputation

Poormaintenance / renewal planning

Facility exhibits poor standard of amenity,aesthetics.

Strategicplanning, AM plan, condition assessments, maintenance levels of service, actioning of customer requests within nominated timeframes

Possible Moderate



PAGE 211

Agenda


PAGE 211 Agenda


Page 28 of 49

5.4.1 Defects Defect management forms a critical part of MBRC’s buildings risk, asset management and maintenance strategy. Defects are raised for any issues that do not represent a safety or operational issue, to be managed at a later date through routine, planned maintenance or renewal activities. The majority of defects are captured through the building condition inspection program by the building inspectors, while some AM team members also capture defects as a method of identifying and managing non critical issues.

Defects may be raised for items relating to:

Health and Safety - Is there potentially a health and/or safety risk? In the event of immediate safety concern, the issue is addressed or cordoned off immediately rather than raising a defect.

Security - Is there a security risk? Operation or Functionality - Does it operate or function satisfactorily? Amenity - Is the level of amenity acceptable? Appearance - Is appearance acceptable? Damage - Is any isolated damage (vandalism, wear and tear, rust, etc.) apparent?

Each defect is assessed with a severity rating to guide urgency of rectification, which is separate to the condition rating of the asset.

Council’s defect management process manages defects based on the maintenance responsibility for the asset, as per the tenure agreement:

Council responsibility - managed through the Building and Facilities operational reactive and planned budgets, as bundled defects of similar works, as per the draft Buildings and Facilities Defects Management Plan;

Community group responsibility - managed by council’s Sport and Recreation department (community leasing team) as per an established process for notification and follow-up with the group;

Commercial group responsibility - no formal established process has yet been developed.

Defects are rated as Significant High, High, Medium and Low severity. To aid Council in the management of council building defects, a defect prioritisation risk score has been developed. The defect risk score is calculated on the basis of the asset condition rating, star rating of the building, criticality of the asset to building operations, operating status and defect severity. A final score out of 100 is determined, which ranks defects for prioritised rectification. Appendix 4 shows a breakdown on the current building defects as at October 2016.

AI-BF22 - Develop and document a detailed building infrastructure risk management planAI-BF23 - Document MBRC’s defect capture and management process AI-BF24 - Review the buildings defect codes to align with MBRC’s reporting requirements



PAGE 212

Agenda


PAGE 212 Agenda


Page 29 of 49

5.5 Routine Maintenance

Building maintenance is currently categorised into two main categories, with budgets separated accordingly:

Programmed maintenance - works that are scheduled to occur at a set frequency based on the asset type and frequency of use, with the aim of maintaining ongoing serviceability and minimising failures/outages. Also includes the rectification of known non-urgent defects in a planned and bundled manner for cost and time efficiency;

Reactive maintenance - repairs to assets as a result of partial failures, to return the asset to a functional state.

A third maintenance category - predictive maintenance - is desired to be implemented by MBRC’s Buildings team in the future, once systems are established and available for the recording and trending of key physical parameters for identified assets and components.

Maintenance undertaken by community organisations as per tenure agreements is largely undertaken on a reactive basis, as funds permit. The maintenance plan detailed herein excludes items that are not a council responsibility. Sub-par performance of maintenance on community buildings will be identified during annual building inspections and reported to the tenant through the standard defects notification process.

5.5.1 Recommended Maintenance Plan The recommended best practice is for all programmed maintenance tasks to be scheduled in TOMAS for automatic generation of tasks and ease of tracking. The componentisation of buildings will allow MBRC to generate automated schedules for each applicable service through the asset management system, assigning service costs and maintenance history to an individual asset. It will also show when an asset has been serviced or is scheduled.

Scheduling forms a critical role in resource planning through the accurate allocation of time, money and resources. The future analysis of schedules and asset performance will allow evaluation of the success of the routine maintenance tasks, whether assets are over- or under-serviced, and enough resources, time and money have been allocated to servicing activities. It can also be used as a window into asset reliability and performance monitoring. The table below outlines MBRC’s current programmed building maintenance schedules and the future schedules to be implemented. Whilst a standard frequency has been nominated, some individualisation occurs to match the building’s usage, and can be tailored throughout the year. For example, the servicing of a sewer pump station that services a public amenities block along a foreshore can be increased during the popular summer period and reduced during winter. Asset-specific schedules can be developed and adjusted as required in TOMAS.



PAGE 213

Agenda


PAGE 213 Agenda


Page 30 of 49

Table 5.5.2 MBRC current and planned automated routine schedules

Current Schedules Schedule Qty.

Assets Schedule Schedule task/activities

Auto Doors/Gates 92 3 monthly External - Servicing auto doors, gates and roller doors

45 6 monthly External - Roller shutters and operating walls Lift Servicing 27 3 monthly External - Lift maintenance servicing

29 12 monthly registration

Internal - Compliance registration (from External statement)

Generator 7 Weekly Internal - Inspection 7 3 monthly External - No load testing 7 6 monthly External - Load testing 7 12 monthly External - Blackout testing

Sewer Pump Station Servicing

54 Seasonal based

External - Inspection and clean

54 12 monthly External - Mechanical & Electrical Reduced Pressure Zone Device

unknown 12 monthly External - Testing and registering

Future Schedules Asbestos 261 5 yearly External - Inspection Air Conditioning Service

131 6 monthly External - Servicing unknown Condition

based External - Ducting cleaning

BuildingManagement System

9 3 monthly External - System testing IELVS 9 6 monthly External - System testing

Cleaning 90 Usage External - Cleaning based on building usage Fire Protection 69 Monthly External - Alarm system testing

6293 6 monthly External - Monthly testing + fire extinguisher inspection

6293 12 monthly External - Monthly, 3 monthly + fire hydrant and passive fire systems inspections

1523 5 yearly External - Fire extinguisher replacement program Liquid Waste unknown Usage External - Removal of liquid waste Pest unknown 12 monthly External - Pest inspection Switchboard RCD Testing

542 6 monthly External - RCD testing

5.6 Renewal / Replacement Plan

Renewal expenditure is major work which does not increase the asset’s design capacity but restores, rehabilitates, replaces or renews an existing asset to its original service potential. Work over and above restoring an asset to original service potential is upgrade / expansion or new works expenditure.

5.6.1 Recommended renewal/ replacement plan Recommended and best practice is for MBRC to use a predictive modelling process. Predictive modelling would allow MBRC to develop renewal and replacement programs built on measurable and quantifiable data based on condition, utilisation, star rating, criticality and remaining useful life.



PAGE 214

Agenda


PAGE 214 Agenda


Page 31 of 49

It is recommended that a collaborative approach be undertaken between various council departments in developing the building renewal and replacement programs, being:

Asset Custodians - the department responsible for the operation/tenure of the site who understand the service delivery deficiencies of the asset in its current state; responsible for initiating the project (ePID submission);

Buildings and Facilities Planning team - identify and nominate possible buildings/components for renewal/replacement based on condition assessments; undertake necessary planning for the project and value of budget request;

Asset Management team - provide a recommended prioritised program of renewals/replacements based on predictive modelling, for consideration and approval of Asset Custodian/s.

This process would occur annually as part of MBRC’s standard budget process, in accordance with annual timeframes.

5.7 Creation / Acquisition / Upgrade Plan Buildings on MBRC owned or controlled land are largely constructed, upgraded or acquired by MBRC, with ongoing maintenance varying subject to the applicable form of tenure over the building. The need for such buildings are justified through the existing budgetary process.

Buildings are also regularly constructed by community organisations utilising external grant funding and/or their own funds. Organisations must have relevant tenure with council and preliminary consent through an approved Improvement Works Application.This application process ensures that details of the proposed development are disseminated to the various relevant stakeholders departments within council so that plans can be amended, issues identified and rectified, and all necessary statutory approvals are obtained prior to the commencement of building works. This process, as far as practicable, ensures that building assets constructed on council owned or controlled land are constructed to relevant standards, and council’s ongoing maintenance responsibilities are financially sustainable.

5.7.1 Selection Criteria New asset and upgrade projects are identified from various sources, such as community requests, proposals identified by strategic plans or partnerships with other organisations. These projects are lodged by asset custodians, and managed and prioritised through MBRC’s Project Management Lifecycle system (ePID), including subsequent councillor deliberations.

5.7.2 Disposal Plan Disposal of building assets is relatively rare. Building assets may be sold for commercial reasons according to MBRC-endorsed strategic and/or financial planning. Community buildings are generally only disposed when the end of useful life has been reached and there is no identified need for the building, even if renewed. The majority



PAGE 215

Agenda


PAGE 215 Agenda


Page 32 of 49

of building assets that are disposed are short life assets (sheds, shelter etc.). Building components are disposed more frequently through renewals or upgrades.

Disposals are to be undertaken through consultation and agreement with relevant stakeholders, including Councillor/s, Buildings and Facilities department, and the asset custodian/responsible managing department. Other departments may also be consulted if deemed warranted, particularly if identifying possible demand for a different use of the building. It is also recommended that a strategic analysis take place of MBRC’s building inventory to determine if a building is serving its purpose and is well utilised. If not, consideration must be given to the capacity implications on surrounding assets and overall service delivery to the community. There may be options to consider decommissioning underperforming buildings or alternatively, upgrading it to relevant standards for an alternative use and applicable building classification. Any disposals to buildings and components are to be registered in MBRC’s asset management system to track warranty details, new make, model and serial numbers. In the future the disposal data will become critical to the long term planning process.

AI-BF25 - Review asset types to determine implementation into routine schedules AI-BF26 - Review maintenance and renewals programs to determine levels of service and budget AI-BF27 - Continue the development and roll out of automated schedules AI-BF28 - Develop with stakeholders a renewals budgeting process for priorities projects and cost AI-BF29 - Integrate a predictive modelling system/tool in the long term planning AI-BF30 - Develop and document MBRC’s long term building renewals and replacement process AI-BF31 - Develop lifecycle modelling tool for new assets AI-BF32 - Develop a buildings disposal process



PAGE 216

Agenda


PAGE 216 Agenda


Page 33 of 49

6 Corporate Systems The following corporate systems are used within MBRC to assist with the management of the building assets. Within the Technology One (T1) suite of applications, there is better integration between the financial asset register and the physical asset register which contains details including works activities, defects and condition information. The T1 application also enables a mobile computing solution to be used across council to assist with field operations.

MBRC’s GIS is also integrated with the T1 applications, and readily allows spatial representation of the building assets. The GIS is also used to update the asset registers.

RIO is MBRC’s corporate document recording system and contains documents of all types. Specific to building assets will be reports on condition, historical project and other documents and specific correspondence.

Purpose Name Description

GIS Arcmap GIS An ESRI Product, the Geographical Information System is used for asset capture (also use software FME to manipulate GIS data). The GIS is also used to load TOMAS.

Physical asset register TOMAS Technology One product – asset register, attributes, works activities, defects and condition.

Financial Asset Register Finance 1 Technology One product - financial asset information, annual budgets, long term financial forecasts.

Corporate document storage system

Objective (RIO) Formal system for information related to building assets, including reports and studies.

AI-BF33 - Develop a system for capture building components as a spatial component of a buildingAI-BF34 - Review RIO folder structure and align to asset register hierarchy to link RIO folders to assets



PAGE 217

Agenda


PAGE 217 Agenda


Page 34 of 49

7 Financial Summary MBRC applies considerable effort to ensure responsible financial management of this asset class.

7.1 Useful lifeWhen assets are initially recognised, each asset is attributed with an estimated useful life, which is used as a basis for determining depreciation and long-term financial forecasting requirements.

7.1.1 Current useful lives for building assets The useful lives of these buildings, with the exclusion of sewer pump stations and swimming pools, have recently been updated as a result of the financial re-valuation undertaken in the 2015/16 financial year. The following are the finances’ average useful life ranges for the respective buildings on MBRC’s finance register.

Group Min Useful Life Max Useful Life Total Buildings

Aerodromes 28 62 3

Caravan Parks 17 100 31

Columbarium Walls 80 80 1

Commercial Buildings 1 64 9

Community Service Buildings 12 109 215

Community Halls 13 128 34

Historically Significant Buildings

63 97 1

Library Buildings 15 92 12

Council Operational Buildings 10.00 104 193

Swimming Pools only 20 80 32

Sewer Pump Stations 15 80 51

Recreational Purpose Buildings 1 100 183

Residential Properties 7 108 46

Public Use Toilets (Not in a Facility)

14 104 146

7.1.2 Estimated remaining useful life for building assets The estimated remaining useful life of the building assets varies dependent upon the condition of the assets and the maintenance regime and investment applied to the assets during the course of their asset life. MBRC currently uses the financial ERUL to calculate remaining useful asset life.

A process is required to specify the treatment of buildings and associated asset/financial information as they approach or reach the nominated end of useful life. In some instances, the building remains functional and safe for use, and therefore is able to remain in service.



PAGE 218

Agenda


PAGE 218 Agenda


Page 35 of 49

7.2 Financial Statements and Projections 7.2.1 Valuations Table 7.2.1 outlines the total replacement value (TRV) for the building assets (all figures in $M):

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Total ReplacementValue (TRV)

495 509 530 541 553 572 589 598 613 627

Written Down Value (WDV)

307 310 318 317 317 323 326 322 324 324

There are certain financial indicators that can provide guidance on asset performance. Two such financial indicators are known as the asset consumption ratio and the asset sustainability ratio.

7.2.2 Annual depreciation expense for building assets Table 7.2.2a lists the depreciation figures for the building assets, with the final total annual depreciation expense (all figures in $M):

At present, the straight line method (based on condition) is being used. The project annual depreciation expense is as follows (all figures in $M):

From this data the Asset Consumption Ratio (ACR) - (total WDV / total replacement value) and the asset sustainability ratio (renewal and replacement budget / annual depreciation) can be calculate over the ten year period as outlined in Table 7.2.2b.

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

AssetConsumptionRatio (ACR)

61% 60% 59% 57% 56% 55% 54% 53% 52% 50%

AssetSustainability Ratio (ASR)

23% 29% 30% 39% 31% 32% 33% 34% 36% 38%

The asset consumption ratio (ACR) is the target indicates the aged condition of infrastructure assets, the target consumption range is 40% to 80%.

The asset sustainability ratio (ASR) indicates the extent of expenditure on existing assets through renewal compared with depreciation expense (target is 90%).

Based on the above analysis, the ACR is within the acceptable target range but the ASR is significantly lower than the target ratio. The introduction from 17/18 of the buildings renewal program will increase the ASR over the next 10 years. The buildings renewal program budget will be gradual increased and reviewed, improving MBRC’s building ASR. The current building ASR calculation is taken from the remaining useful

17/18 18/19 19/20 20/21 21/22 22/23 23/24 24/25 25/26 26/27

Accumulateddepreciation 11.7 11.9 12.3 12.4 12.6 12.9 13.3 13.3 13.6 13.4

Total annual depreciationexpense

11.8 12.0 12.4 12.5 12.8 13.0 13.4 13.5 13.7 13.5



PAGE 219

Agenda


PAGE 219 Agenda


Page 36 of 49

life of the building, from its commission date and calculated as straight line depreciation. As more condition and building data is collected the ASR calculation will incorporate factor such as condition and utilisation to obtain the remaining useful life.

7.2.3 Maintenance expense for building assets The planned maintenance expenditure for roads is shown in Table 7.2.3a (all figures in $M)Table 7.2.3 Existing Maintenance Budget

The projected 10-year maintenance budget is set out in Table 7.2.3b (all figures in $M):

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Maintenanceexpense

8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9

Operating projects

0.3 0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0 0 0 0 0

Total 9.2 9.1 8.9 9.1 9.3 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9

7.2.4 Capital expenditure for building assets The planned capital expenditure for buildings is shown in Table 7.2.4 (all figures are in $M):

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Renewals 2.7 3.5 3.8 4.8 3.9 4.1 4.4 4.6 4.9 5.1

Upgrade / New 11.8 17.2 7.5 7.1 14.6 12.5 4.9 10.9 8.5 3.8

Total 14.5 20.7 11.3 11.9 18.5 16.6 9.3 15.5 13.4 8.9

7.2.5 Proposed budget At this stage, the data available is showing that the buildings renewals program is underfunded when compared to the recommended approach for renewals of 90% of the sustainability ratio. It is recommended to increase funding in the long term financial forecast and budget. The table set out below shows the theoretical renewals budget based on Council achieving 90% of the sustainability ratio:

Theoretical Budget - Renewals

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Proposed renewals

10.4 10.6 10.6 10.8 10.9 11.1 11.3 11.3 11.2 11.3

The theoretical budget for renewals is based on 90% of the deprecation value.

By spreading the renewal funding progressively over time, MBRC is more likely to avoid a very large infrastructure bill for building repairs. This will also improve the asset sustainability ratio.

17/18 18/19 19/20 20/21 21/22 22/23 23/24 24/25 25/26 26/27

Total maintenance budget

8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9



PAGE 220

Agenda


PAGE 220 Agenda


Page 37 of 49

As the current level of renewal/replacement is unsustainable, over time MBRC will need to consider its expenditure associated with the renewal / replacement of buildings to ensure that sufficient funds are set aside for building renewal to achieve the recommended Asset Sustainability Ratio

It is expected that the renewal projects will be prioritised based on risk, utilisation and capacity needs.

7.2.6 Date of valuation and valuation methodology

Fair value is determined as the estimated cost of replacing an asset with a similar asset in new condition with a similar function, useful output or service potential in accordance with the Australian Accounting Standards Board and the International Assets Valuation Standards Committee. Furthermore, it is expected that the fair values be updated every 4 years. The last building asset revaluation took effect as at 31 March 2016, so the next building asset revaluation will take place in the 19/20 financial year.

AI-BF35 - Review and align financial and engineer remaining useful life data AI-BF36 - Review and develop remaining useful life per building AI-BF37 - Identify from finance and into asset register which buildings are being deprecatedAI-BF38 - Develop with finance deprecation model base on remaining useful life AI-BF39 - Align finance and asset management systems AI-BF40 - Review maintenance expenditure for building assets AI-BF41 - Continue to review and update renewals budget as data and modelling process are improved AI-BF42 - Develop a strategy process for upgrade/new building assets, aligning to Councils corporate strategy



PAGE 221

Agenda


PAGE 221 Agenda


Page 38 of 49

8 Improvement and Monitoring Currently sound progress has been made capturing building asset information in MBRC’s TOMAS system and asset register. Work is required to further progress the maturity of such information, particularly where information gaps have been found relating to the level of detail (attributes) of building components and maintenance responsibility associated with land tenure and leases. These improvements and others have been recorded as Action Items throughout this Plan. They are consolidated in Section 8.2 below, with responsibilities assigned.

8.1 Known issues with the quality of data, forecasts and estimates

Implementation of this Building PAMP will assist MBRC improve its understanding and management of its building assets. Annual reviews of this BPAMP will result in a continuous process improvement plan effectively being applied.

The reliability of the data concerning the buildings assets has progressed well over the past couple of years, however, still needs improvement. Over the short term, information concerning MBRC’s building assets will mature and the level of confidence in this data will increase. Factors contributing to the reliability of the data include:

Accuracy and completeness of asset data captured in TOMAS including asset attributes, warranty information

Integrity and type of data captured in legacy systems prior to amalgamation Variations in assumptions on expected lives of assets Validation of existing data within TOMAS Physical assessment of remaining useful life versus the financial forecast and

depreciation schedule Identification and validation of data not captured in TOMAS Knowledge of asset condition Knowledge and ability to meet required service levels Future demand predictions Accuracy of risk assessment for building assets Loss of tacit knowledge of assets through staff departures



PAGE 222

Agenda


PAGE 222 Agenda


Page 39 of 49

8.2 Actions required to mitigate the known issues

Table 8.2.1 Action plan

Action No.

Detail Responsibility Due date

AI-BF1 Review and confirm building star ratings AMT 17/18

AI-BF2Obtain from stakeholders the correct building types based on use

AMT 17/18

AI-BF3Review, document and update Councils building hierarchy, including definitions for each building type

AMT 17/18

AI-BF4Review and document the process for componentising buildings

AMT 17/18

AI-BF5Review and update the attributes captured against the buildings and buildings components

AMT 17/18

AI-BF6

Review and update owner, tenure and maintenance responsibility for all buildings and associated building components

AMT 17/18

AI-BF7Engage stakeholders to improve community and technical level of services requirements

AMT 17/18

AI-BF8Develop the processes for monitoring and recording Expected performance in 10 years (LTFF)

AMT 17/18

AI-BF9Develop facility management plans for critical Council buildings

AMT 17/18

AI-BF10Investigate appropriate commercial tools / develop a tool to calculate the EULR for buildings and components

AMT 17/18

AI-BF11Review and update service life (RUL) of buildings based on building hierarchy classification

AMT & F&PS 17/18

AI-BF12Investigate appropriate commercial tools / develop lifecycle assessment tool for modelling new and existing assets

AMT 17/18

AI-BF13

Review / update asset register commission dates, adding the ability to track building additions, renewals, internal reconfiguration and upgrades

AMT 17/18

AI-BF14

Develop balanced criteria (TBL) to aid lifecycle decisions, including determining when assets shall run to failure and/or when buildings will be renewed, upgraded, replaced, decommissioned, and/or demolished

AMT & B&F 17/18

AI-BF15

Develop the system and processes for tracking asset utilisation and performance - identify types of buildings for which it is relevant (single-use, etc).

AMT 17/18

AI-BF16Investment in alternative technology and treatment methods

AMT, AM & B&F 17/18

AI-BF17Review and modify the building inspection program to match building hierarchy/ Star rating

B&F 17/18



PAGE 223

Agenda


PAGE 223 Agenda


Page 40 of 49

AI-BF18Develop and document building inspectors inspection process

B&F 17/18

AI-BF19

Develop a technical building and building component condition rating scale to reflect long-life and short-life buildings and each asset

B&F 17/18

AI-BF20

Add condition capture criteria to service contracts where applicable, utilising a standardised condition rating assessment criteria for consistency across all assets

B&F 17/18

AI-BF21Develop the RUL criteria and calculation method for each building and component

AMT 17/18

AI-BF22Develop and document a detailed building infrastructure risk management plan

AMT, B&F, F&PS & AM

17/18

AI-BF23Document Councils defect capture and management process

AMT, B&F & AM 17/18

AI-BF24Review the buildings defect codes to align with Councils reporting requirements and corporate system

AMT & B&F 17/18

AI-BF25Review asset types to determine implementation into routine schedules

AMT, B&F & AM 17/18

AI-BF26Review maintenance and renewals programs to determine levels of service and budget

B&F 17/18

AI-BF27Continue the development and roll out of automated schedules

AMT, B&F & AM 17/18

AI-BF28Develop with stakeholders a renewals budgeting process for priorities projects and cost

B&F & AMT 17/18

AI-BF29Integrate a predictive modelling system/tool in the long term planning

AMT 17/18

AI-BF30Develop and document Council’s long term building renewals and replacement process

AMT 17/18

AI-BF31Develop lifecycle modelling tool for new assets

AMT 17/18

AI-BF32Develop a buildings disposal process AMT, B&F, AM &

F&PS17/18

AI-BF33Develop a system for capture building components as a spatial component of a building

AMT 17/18

AI-BF34Review RIO folder structure and align to asset register hierarchy to link RIO folders to assets

AMT 17/18

AI-BF35Review and align financial and engineer remaining useful life data

AMT & F&PS 17/18

AI-BF36Review and develop remaining useful life per building

AMT & F&PS 17/18

AI-BF37Identify from finance and into asset register which buildings are being deprecated

AMT & F&PS 17/18

AI-BF38Develop with finance deprecation model base on remaining useful life

AMT & F&PS 17/18

AI-BF39Align finance and asset management systems

AMT & F&PS 17/18



PAGE 224

Agenda


PAGE 224 Agenda


Page 41 of 49

AI-BF40Continue to review and update renewals budget as data and modelling process are improved

AMT & B&F 17/18

AI-BF41Develop a strategy process for upgrade/new building assets, aligning to Councils corporate strategy

AMT 17/18



PAGE 225

Agenda


PAGE 225 Agenda


Page 42 of 49

APPENDICES

Appendix 1 Break down and number of MBRC building types and star rating

Appendix 2 Building component hierarchy

Appendix 3 AM building componentisation table for creation of core components

Appendix 4 Breakdown of defects by severity rating

Appendix 5 List of buildings from MBRC’s asset register



PAGE 226

Agenda


PAGE 226 Agenda


Page 43 of 49

Appendix 1 - Break down and number of MBRC building types and star rating

Table A1.1 - Number of long and short life buildings by star rating

Star Rating Long life Short life 1 0 216 2 15 336 3 499 142 4 337 0 5 24 0

Total 875 694

Table A1.2 - Number of long and short life buildings by star rating

Star Rating Council Community Commercial Long life Short life Long life Short life Long life Short life

1 0 88 0 93 0 35 2 5 84 10 187 0 65 3 247 94 171 42 81 6 4 39 0 241 0 57 0 5 9 13 2

Total 300 266 435 322 140 106



PAGE 227

Agenda


PAGE 227 Agenda


Page 44 of 49

Appendix 2 Building component hierarchy

Building components are created at the Asset Type and/ or Sub Type levels of the asset hierarchy.

Asset Class Asset Group Asset Type Asset SubType

Buildings Aquatic Dosing

Filtration

Heating

Plant Controller

Flow Meter

Pump Unit

Switchboard

Tank

Valve

Pool Equipment

Pool Shell

Electrical Building Management

General Electrical

Generator

Lighting

Solar

Switchboard

Exterior Fabric Exterior Fittings

Roller Door

Exterior Structures

Exterior Wall

Roof

Height Safety

Fire Protection Alarm System Detection Alarm

Emergency Warning System

Manual Call Point

Occupant Warning System

Smoke Alarms

VESDA

Warden Intercom Phone

Fire Extinguishers Fire Extinguisher

Fire Hydrants Fire Hydrant Booster

Fire Hydrant L Valve

Fire Hydrant Pump

General Fire Emergency Lighting

Exit Light

Fire Blanket

Fire Hose Reel

Passive Systems Fire Door

Structural

Sprinkler System Fire Sprinkler



PAGE 228

Agenda


PAGE 228 Agenda


Page 45 of 49

Fire Sprinkler Pump

Gas Suppression System

Water Tank

Interior Fabric Ceiling

Flooring

Interior Fittings

Auto Door

Auto Toilet Door

Operable Wall

Roller Shutter

Interior Structure

Interior Wall

Mechanical HVAC

Lift

Plumbing-Hydraulic Hot Water System

Sanitary Drainage System

Sanitary Plumbing System

RPZ

Water Fixtures

Water Tanks

Security Access System

Alarm System

CCTV System

Sewer Pump Station Blower

Filter system

Flow Meter

Pump

Switchboard

Well

Structural Access

Roof

Structural Wall

Sub-structure



PAGE 229

Agenda


PAGE 229 Agenda


Page 46 of 49

Appendix 3 AM building componentisation table for creation of core components

This table is used by asset management to create core components as new buildings are brought onto councils asset register or found

Building Systems Building System Components

Estimateuseful

life

Core Building Components

Electrical Building Management Systems

10 No Capture if installed/ existing in the building

General Electrical 30 Yes Includes GPOs, switches, cables and conduit

Generator 15 No Fixed emergency/ back generators

Lighting 20 Yes Includes light fittings and switches

Solar 15 No Includes panels, inverters brackets and isolation switches

Switchboard 20 Yes Includes cabinet, protection and metering devices

Exterior Fabric Exterior Fittings 20 Yes Includes manual and auto doors, windows and soft awnings

Exterior Structures 25 No Includes decks, patios, balcony’s, canter leva

Exterior Wall 50 Yes Includes wall material and finish

Roof 30 Yes Includes roof sheet material, gutters and down pipes

Fire Protection Alarm System 15 No Includes Detection Alarm, Emergency Warning System, Manual Call Point, Smoke Alarms, VESDA & Warden Intercom Phone

Fire Extinguishers 5 No Fire Extinguishers

Fire Hydrants 15 No Includes Fire Hydrant Booster, Fire Hydrant L Valve & Fire Hydrant Pump

General Fire 5 No Includes fire blankets, exit and emergency lights and hose reels

Passive Systems 50 No Includes Fire Door & structural

Sprinkler Systems 25 No Includes Fire Sprinkler, Fire Sprinkler Pump, Gas Suppression System & Water Tank

Interior Fabric Ceiling 50 Yes Includes sheet material and finish

Flooring 20 Yes Includes floor covers and finish

Interior Fittings 50 Yes Includes doors, movable walls, windows (excludes furniture)

Interior Structure 50 No Includes stairs, ramps, walkways and internal balcony’s

Interior Wall 50 Yes Includes material and finish

Mechanical HVAC 15 No Includes condensers, evaporators, blowers and heaters

Lift 25 No All lift components

Plumbing-Hydraulic

Hot Water System 10 No All hot water system components

Sanitary Drainage System 30 No Includes underground pipes, trenches, pits grey water systems and septic tanks

Sanitary Plumbing System 20 Yes Includes toilets, sinks and drains

Water Fixtures 20 Yes Includes taps, faucets and shower heads



PAGE 230

Agenda


PAGE 230 Agenda


Page 47 of 49

Water Tanks 30 No Water tanks connected to a building for storm water recover

Security Access System 15 No Includes access points

Alarm System 15 No Includes panel, detectors, alarms and storage

CCTV System 10 No Includes cameras, cabling and mounting

Structural Access 30 No Includes stairs and ramps

Structural Roof 50 Yes Includes roof trussing and load bearing components

Structural Wall 50 Yes Includes wall frame and load bearing structural components

Sub-structure 50 Yes Includes slab, stumps floor beams and trusses



PAGE 231

Agenda


PAGE 231 Agenda


Page 48 of 49

Appendix 4 Breakdown of defects by severity rating

The data in this table is from March 2016

Work Category Defect Count

SignificantHigh

High Medium Low

Asbestos 24 1 12 10 1 Carpentry programmed 0 0 0 0 0 Clean-External 0 0 0 0 0 Clean-Floor Deep 0 0 0 0 0 Clean-Gutters 0 0 0 0 0 Clean-Internal 0 0 0 0 0 Clean-Roof 0 0 0 0 0 Demolition 16 0 5 8 3 Door Handle Compliance 137 0 129 8 0 Drain &Stormwater 0 0 0 0 0 Electrical 283 11 152 67 53 Engineering 162 0 37 26 99 Fencing 60 0 3 14 43 Floor-Finishes 0 0 0 0 0 Floor Renewal &Rep 0 0 0 0 0 Floor-Wood 0 0 0 0 0 Floor-Vinyl/Carpe 0 0 0 0 0 Waterproofing 2 0 1 1 0 General Building 1589 0 86 381 1122 Glazing 45 0 1 12 32 HVAC General 29 0 3 12 14 HVAC Cleans 8 0 6 2 0 HVAC Hygiene Repo 0 0 0 0 0 HVAC Repairs 12 0 1 2 9 Locksmith 5 0 1 0 4 Metal Fabrication 13 0 6 3 4 Painting-Internal 0 0 0 0 0 Patch and Paint 368 0 2 79 287 Painting-External 0 0 0 0 0 Pavement &Concrete 0 0 0 0 0 Pest Control 73 0 19 42 12 Plumbing 441 0 57 181 203 Poolshell 0 0 0 0 0 RCD Compliance 221 0 219 2 0 Roof-Report 0 0 0 0 0 Roof-Repair 0 0 0 0 0 Roof-Preventative 0 0 0 0 0 Roof-Renewal 0 0 0 0 0 Fire-Safety 0 0 0 0 0 Security Equipment 6 0 1 3 2 Stair Compliance 212 1 204 7 0



PAGE 232

Agenda


PAGE 232 Agenda


Page 49 of 49

Tiling 135 0 0 17 118 Public Toilet 40 0 4 26 10 Fire Defects from Contractor 965 0 0 91 874

4846 13 949 994 2890



PAGE 233

Agenda


PAGE 233 Agenda


ITEM 4.5 PATHWAYS PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 4 ASSET CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE Reference: A15444329 : 20 June 2017 - Refer Supporting Information A15230828 Responsible Officer: AE, A/Coordinator Asset Management (ECM Engineering) Executive Summary In accordance with section 167(1) of the Local Government Regulation 2012, Council is to prepare and adopt a Long-Term Asset Management Plan. A Pathways Portfolio Asset Management Plan (PPAMP) has been prepared and was workshopped with Council on 20 June 2017. The purpose of this report is to present the PPAMP to Council for adoption. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION That the Pathways Portfolio Asset Management Plan be adopted, as tabled.


PAGE 234

Agenda


PAGE 234 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 4.5 PATHWAYS PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL - A15444329 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background The original Long-Term Asset Management Plan (2012-2021) adopted by Council in June 2012, provided the initial framework for the management of Moreton Bay Regional Council’s (MBRC) infrastructure assets, including pathway assets. The Queensland Audit Office has recently highlighted that the financial data for asset renewal, upgrades and new assets, needs to be revised annually to inform Council’s Long-term Financial Forecast (LTFF). The Strategic Asset Management Framework and supporting portfolio asset management plans will be updated annually to inform the LTFF. The new Strategic Asset Management Plan (SAMP), as part of a revised Strategic Asset Management Framework, will encompass the following items: • Infrastructure Asset Management Policy (Policy No. 2150-043) • Strategic Asset Management Plan • Portfolio Asset Management Plans (representing 19 asset portfolios) The SAMP is supported by 19 portfolio asset management plans, of which pathways represents one asset portfolio. The SAMP is based on the following strategies: • Optimising maintenance and renewal practices • Prioritising investment to achieve maximum value • Validating investment decisions to confirm funds are being spent effectively • Identifying lower lifecycle cost solutions • Managing risk to an appropriate level • Capturing and monitoring the condition of infrastructure assets now and predicting future condition The attached PPAMP outlines MBRC’s approach to managing and maintaining the pathway network. The processes and principles outlined in this plan are intended to drive improvements in the management of MBRC’s pathway network and the service delivered to the community. The attached plan is presented to Council for adoption in keeping with legislative requirements. It is noted that the current PPAMP refers to pedestrian and shared pathways only. The PPAMP will be expanded to include other pathways assets (e.g. handrails, formed stairs) through further iterations of the PPAMP. The adoption of the PPAMP will assist Council in meeting its legislative compliance obligations and assist MBRC in achieving continuous improvement in the management of its Pathways Asset Portfolio. 2. Explanation of Item It is important to ensure that MBRC’s pathway assets are managed in the most cost effective manner over the complete asset lifecycle to provide the required level of service to the community while managing risk appropriately. Additionally, it is particularly important that adequate renewal funding is allocated to ensure the sustainability of these assets in the long-term. The adoption of the PPAMP will ensure legislative compliance and assist Council in better achieving continuous improvement in the management of its pathways as well as directly linking asset management plans, actions and operations to the budget and the LTFF. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications


(4) A local government must prepare and adopt a Long-Term Asset Management Plan. (5) The Long-Term Asset Management Plan continues in force for the period stated in the plan

unless the local government adopts a new Long-Term Asset Management Plan.


PAGE 235

Agenda


PAGE 235 Agenda


(6) The period stated in the plan must be 10 years or more.

Additionally, Section 168 of the Local Government Regulation 2012 states that Council’s Long-term Asset Management Plan must: (a) provide for strategies to ensure the sustainable management of the assets mentioned in the

local government’s asset register and the infrastructure of the local government; and (b) state the estimated capital expenditure for renewing, upgrading and extending the assets for the

period covered by the plan; and (c) be part of, and consistent with, the long-term financial forecast..



The SAMP and supporting PPAMP have direct linkages with other corporate documents as illustrated in the diagram below:

Figure 1 - Asset Management within MBRC Statutory Planning Context As mentioned above, these plans inform Council’s LTFF in relation to costs associated with new, renewal and upgrade of assets. The plan also guides Council’s Corporate Plan in relation to what Council intends to achieve, in relation to strategic asset management and informs Council’s capital works program which forms part of the Operational Plan and Budget.


3.4 Risk Management Implications Risks associated with the pathways assets are included in the plan.


PAGE 236

Agenda


PAGE 236 Agenda



3.6 Financial Implications The SAMP and associated PAMPs inform Council’s LTFF.

3.7 Economic Benefit Sustainable provision and management of MBRC’s pathway assets supports economic growth across the region e.g. providing pathways to support active transport within our community. Additionally, a well-managed pathways portfolio improves the overall amenity of the region and is highly valued by the community.


The management of MBRC’s pathways assets assists in improving environmental outcomes. 3.9 Social Implications

The timely and cost-effective management of MBRC’s pathway assets contributes to the overall benefit of residents, visitors, business and industry, by providing the necessary pathway assets to support the region’s quality lifestyle.



PAGE 237

Agenda


PAGE 237 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15230828 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 4.5 PATHWAYS PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL #1 Pathway Portfolio Asset Management Plan


PAGE 238

Agenda


PAGE 238 Agenda

ITEM 4.5 - PATHWAYS PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL (Cont.)


#1 Pathway Portfolio Asset Management Plan


PAGE 239

Agenda


PAGE 239 Agenda

Document Reference

Document title Pathway Portfolio Asset Management Plan RIO Reference Date prepared June 2017 Date adopted by council Prepared by ECM Infrastructure Planning - Asset Management

Version control Version Date Revision details Author/s Reviewed by

Draft v1 Initial draft N.Gunasekara

J. Turnbull

Draft v2 2 May 2017 Draft revision J Turnbull N. Gunasekara

Draft v3 19 May 2017 Stakeholder workshop revision N.Gunasekara

J Turnbull

Draft v3 02 June 2017

A Martini

15 June 2017

Final review A Martini



PAGE 240

Agenda


PAGE 240 Agenda

Definitions for abbreviations

Term DefinitionACR Asset consumption ratio AI Action item AM Asset Maintenance AMT Asset Management Team (section within Infrastructure Planning) ARI Average Recurrence IntervalASR Asset sustainability ratioCSR Customer Service Request ECM Engineering Construction and Maintenance Directorate IP Infrastructure Planning ERM Enterprise risk management Embarc Moreton Bay Regional Council Internal Website ePID Electronic Project Identification Document F&PS Financial and Project Services ERUL Estimated Remaining Useful Life GIS Geographical Information SystemIIMM International Infrastructure Management Manual IPWEA Institute of Public Works Engineering Australasia LGA Local Government Area LGIP Local Government Infrastructure Plan LTFF Long term financial forecast MBRC Moreton Bay Regional Council PAMP Portfolio Asset Management Plan PPAMP Pathway Portfolio Asset Management Plan P&ED Planning and Economic Development PIP Priority Infrastructure Plan PM&C Project Management and Construction PLM Project Lifecycle Management (System) PSP Planning Scheme Policy RIO MBRC's record management system RUL Remaining Useful Life SAMP Strategic Asset Management Plan T1 Technology One TOMAS MBRC's asset management system (based on Technology One platform) TRV Total replacement value DDA Disability Decimation Act



PAGE 241

Agenda


PAGE 241 Agenda

Page 4 of 27

CONTENTS

DEFINITIONS FOR ABBREVIATIONS 3

1 PURPOSE 6

2 ASSET INFORMATION 72.1 Pathway Components 72.2 Pathway Hierarchy 72.3 Length of Pathway Network 72.4 Pathway Attributes 8

3 LEVELS OF SERVICE 93.1 Community Levels of Service 93.2 Technical Levels of Service 10

4 FUTURE DEMAND 134.1 Demand drivers, demand forecast 13

4.1.1 Demand drivers 13

4.1.2 Formal Demand Planning 13

5 ASSET LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT 155.1 Asset lifecycle 155.2 Asset capacity and performance 155.3 Condition and profile 15

5.3.1 Condition inspections program 17

5.3.2 Modelling and monitoring 17

5.3.3 Resourcing 17

5.4 Risk Management Plan 175.5 Routine Maintenance Plan 18

5.5.1 Current maintenance plan 18

5.5.2 Recommended maintenance plan 18


5.6.1 Current renewal / replacement plan 19

5.6.2 Creation / acquisition / upgrade 19

5.7 Disposal process 19

6 SYSTEMS 20

7 FINANCIAL SUMMARY 217.1 Useful life 21

7.1.1 Current useful lives for pathway assets 21

7.1.2 Estimated remaining useful life for pathway assets 21


7.2.1 Valuations 21

7.2.2 Annual depreciation expense for pathway assets 21

7.2.3 Asset consumption ratio and asset sustainability 22



PAGE 242

Agenda


PAGE 242 Agenda

Page 5 of 27

7.2.4 Maintenance expense for pathway assets 23

7.2.5 Capital expenditure for pathway assets 23

7.2.6 Date of valuation and valuation methodology 23

8 IMPROVEMENT AND MONITORING 248.1 Known issues with the quality of data, forecasts and estimates 248.2 Actions required to mitigate the known issues 24



PAGE 243

Agenda


PAGE 243 Agenda

Page 6 of 27

1 Purpose The purpose of the Moreton Bay Regional Council (MBRC) Pathway Portfolio Asset Management Plan (PPAMP) is to outline MBRC’s approach to the management of pathway assets utilised by public for day to day activities and operations. The PPAMP serves to:

demonstrate responsible management, ensure long-term sustainability, communicate and justify funding requirements

The PPAMP provides an overview of the status and activities associated with the services provided by MBRC pathway assets, and current and future risks which may impact the assets. The key phases of the lifecycle of these assets have been considered in the preparation of the PPAMP to provide an overall understanding of the issues and costs affecting the services provided. Action items (AI) have been developed to address identified issues and are listed in section 8.2.

The PPAMP will be reviewed and updated on an annual basis and the assets will continue to be monitored in future iterations of this plan. Council’s approach to asset management has been aligned to the ISO55000 series of standards for infrastructure asset management, as outlined in the Strategic Asset Management Plan (SAMP).



PAGE 244

Agenda


PAGE 244 Agenda

Page 7 of 27

2 Asset Information

The PPAMP considers pedestrian pathway and shared usage pathway assets. Future iterations of this PPAMP will include hand rails and formed stairs. Other assets connected to the pathway network such as bridges and furniture will be covered in separate portfolio asset management plans.

There is around 1,700km of pathways within the Moreton Bay Region. MBRC is responsible for their management, maintenance, renewal, upgrade and end-of-life removal.

2.1 Pathway Components Pathways consist of the following components;

Physical path Kerb (Pram) Ramps

Although MBRC recognises kerb ramps as individual assets, in this PPAMP they are considered part of the pathway segment. A pathway segment is a continuous length of pathway, generally starting and ending at a kerb, ramp or connected to another pathway.

2.2 Pathway Hierarchy Council classifies pathways into a simple hierarchy;

Pedestrian Pathway - less than 2.5m wide, for use by the public for the purposes of pedestrian movement. Shared Pathway - wider than 2.5m wide, for use by the public for the purposes of movement by both cyclists and pedestrians.

This pathway classification is based on width. The current hierarchy doesn’t consider the attributes of the pathway such as line marking, place marking, and / or signs in the hierarchy definition. The purpose of this simplified hierarchy (2 pathway types) is to provide guidance as to planning, design, construction and maintenance activities. A star / importance rating will be assigned to each segment of a pathway. A pathway segment can be made up of any length, starting and or ending at a kerb / ramp or other segment of pathway. The star rating is a combination of location, utilisation and function. The pathway hierarchy and star rating are used to prioritise maintenance and score defects.

MBRC in implementing a new data capture which aligns to the Asset Design, Asset Constructions (ADAC) capture schema (Appendix 2). The next iteration of the PPAMP will evolve to this ADAC compliant hierarchy.

The Queensland State Government, under the Queensland Road Regulations 2009, recognises all pathways as shared path unless signed as a separated cycle or footpath.

AI-PW1 - Implement new pathway hierarchy classification and definitions AI-PW2 - Develop and implement pathway star rating in-line with new hierarchy

2.3 Length of Pathway Network Table 2.3.1 below, shows a breakdown by construction material of Council’s pathway network.



PAGE 245

Agenda


PAGE 245 Agenda

Page 8 of 27

Table 2.3.1 Length of pathway network by type Construction Material

TypePedestrian Pathway

Length (km) Shared Pathway

Length (km) Concrete 1462.63 220.17

Asphalt Concrete 20.37 4.76

Bitumen 2.98 0.09

Brick Paving 1.06 0.77

Concrete Pavers 2.13 0.27

Deco Gravel 2.59 1.31

Gravel 0.07 2.23

Total 1491.83 229.60

2.4 Pathway Attributes

Pathways are generally simple structures, made up of segments, varying in length and width. The basic attributes of a pathway segment are:

Location Dimensions – length, width, thickness Construction material Line marking Place marking Tactile Surface treatment/s

AI-PW3 - Review, capture and update pathway attributes



PAGE 246

Agenda


PAGE 246 Agenda

Page 9 of 27

3 Levels of Service

Effective asset management planning is based on the relationship between cost, performance and risk, and their association with service delivery. A key factor for asset management planning at MBRC is the ability to match the delivered levels of service to service level expectations of the customers / community. Management of MBRC pathways assets requires the consideration of levels of service; broadly these are - community and technical. These level of service categories are described further in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 Definition of level of service

Level of Service Definition




How this standard of asset/s is to be achieved. Identify the need for the asset (provision service level) Identify the criteria to be applied to scope the asset

(development service level) Identify the ongoing maintenance requirements


3.1 Community Levels of Service

Table 3.1.1 sets out MBRC’s community levels of service for pathways assets

Table 3.1.1 Community levels of service

Service attribute

Service objective

Performance measure process

Current (2016) performance

Expected performance in 10 years (LTFF)

Quality Pathway provides smooth and safe walking/ cycling surface.

Number of CSRs / issues of smoothness of walking and safety of issues.

1392 CSRs / issues per year relating to smoothness of walking and safety of using.

No increase in current number of CSRs.

Function Availability of pathwaynetwork.Meet user requirements.

Number of CSRs / issues about pathway availability

32 CSRs / issues per year relating to pathway availability.

No increase in current number of CSRs.

Capacity /utilisation

The pathway network provides adequate coverage to the service area.

Based on location and population density, at least one side of the road / pathway reserve is serviced in non-industrial areas.

Pathways are constructed to improve network connectivity based on community requests and Council planning.

Pathway network connectivity priority based on Councils star rating meets community expectations.



PAGE 247

Agenda


PAGE 247 Agenda

Page 10 of 27

3.2 Technical Levels of Service

Table 3.2.1 sets out MBRC’s technical levels of service for seawall assets.

Table 3.2.1 Technical levels of service

Service attribute

Service objective Activity measure process


Desired optimum position

Agreedsustainable position

Operations Pathways provide a smooth and safe walking/ cycling surface

Pathwayinspectionsurvey and defectidentification.

Inspection carried out by council Asset Inspectors.

All MBRC pathways are managed to a condition state 2 or better. Defects are rectified within 3 months.

All MBRC pathways are managed to a condition state 3 or better.Defects are managed within 12 months in accordance with MBRC defect management standard.

Operations Cleanliness of town centre pathways

Cleaning frequency of town centre pathways are maintainedto be free of litter and weeds

Highlyutilisedpathwaysareas are sweptroutinely.

All pathways are cleaned annually and high priority paths cleaned 3 monthly

Highly utilised and rated pathways are cleaned annually. All other paths are cleaned on a priority / utilisation / importance rating

Maintenance Pathway defects are identified and repaired to ensure safety and maintain asset life.

2 yearly pathwayinspections. Regular Asset Maintenance inspections

Defects are rectified in accordance with MBRC’s defect risk score.

Defects are managed and rectified within 12 months

Defects are managed in accordance with MBRC’s defect management strategy

Conditionassessment identification

Pathways are inspected to capture condition and defects.

Conditiondata is updated every 2 years. Defects are captured during internal/externalinspections andreviewed.

Defects are captured through internalinspectionsurvey.

Pathways whole of network is conditioned surveyed using digital capture methods annually.

Pathway whole of network is conditionsurveyed using digital capture methods 2 yearly. Pathways are inspected by internal survey based on a frequency determined from priority/ utilisation/ importance.

Defect identification

Defects are captured in accordance with MBRC’s defect

Defects captured and reviewed to

Defects captured by MBRC’s internal

All defects are capture during external defect

Defects captured by external condition survey



PAGE 248

Agenda


PAGE 248 Agenda

Page 11 of 27

Service attribute





guidelines and strategy

MBRC’s guidelines.

inspectionprocess.

survey irrespective of the condition rating. Defects are reviewed/ monitored by internal inspection in accordance with MBRCs defect management standard

for condition 4 and 5 segments. Pathways with condition 3 rating to be reviewed and survey by internal inspectors to capture defects

Operationalprogramming - Pathway grinding

Pathways offer a smooth and safe walking/ cycling surface.

Reduction per year in number of pathwaydisplacement defects.

Displacement defects are bundled and placed on a prioritised pathwaygrinding program.

All pathway displacements are rectified within 1 month of identification.

Displacements above 10mm are rectified in accordance with MBRC defect management standard.

Operationalprogramming - Panel replacement

Pathwaysections/ blocks are replaced to remove the defects unable to be managed through other maintenance activities.

Capture pathwayconditiondata and developpanelreplacement requirements

Ad-hoc replacement utilisingmaintenance budget $2.8 Million.

Panels identified through condition inspection as requiring replacement are replaced within 12 months.

Pathway panels (sections) with condition rating 4 and 5 are programmed for replacement with 2 years of identification

Capitalprogramming - Renewals

10 year prioritised and budgeted, pathwaysrenewal program

10 year program of renewals projects programmed into MBRCs ePID system.

Renewals based on inspectiondefects and CSRs / issues

Fully budgeted pathways renewals program, renewing pathways

10 year prioritised program of renewals projects

Capitalprogramming - upgrade / new

Upgraded & new pathways are constructed in accordance to MBRC’s design standard and long-term planning schemes.

Compliance with MBRC’s design standards arerepresented in Council’s planning scheme.

Pathways are constructed to MBRC design standards.

100% of new and pathway network meets current design standards and future capacity demands.

100% of new and pathway network meets current design standards and future capacity demands.

Capitalprogramming - upgrade/ new

Pathways are upgraded to meet network expansion.

Pathwayupgradeprojects align to Councils long-term planning scheme

Pathwayupgrades projects are designed and constructed to Councils standard and long-term planning schemes.

100% pathways meet Council minimum design width for location.

100% pathways meet Council minimum design width for location.



PAGE 249

Agenda


PAGE 249 Agenda

Page 12 of 27

Service attribute





Donated assets

Donated pathways are constructed to Councilminimum/ agreed standard and are handed over as a condition 1 state. Pathways are constructed from material to suit the operating environment to achieve the longest practical useful life

Donated pathways are inspected by PED at asset handover

Pathways are constructed to Councils minimumdesign standard.

All donated pathways are 3m widths, with DDA compliant access ramps, 125mm think and constructed to a 100 year service life. Denoted pathways are inspected during construction to ensure they meet Councils minimum standard

Donated pathways are constructed to 2.5m width where possible determined by location and up to 3m, minimum thickness is 125mm and construction material is suited to the environment to achieve the maximum useful life.Denoted pathways are inspected during construction to ensure they meet Councils agreed standard.

AI-PW4 - Develop and implement pathway CSR report process AI-PW5 - Develop and implement cleaning program for certain pathways AI-PW6 - Develop and implement required maintenance activities AI-PW7 - Develop and implement donated assets inspection process AI-PW8 - Investigate construction methods and material



PAGE 250

Agenda


PAGE 250 Agenda

Page 13 of 27

4 Future Demand Growth management is identified as a key issue in Council’s Corporate Plan, and well planned growth is emphasised in the Community Plan. The provision of transport services and associated infrastructure has high priority in MBRC’s planning activities.

Moreton Bay Region has been one of the ten fastest growing local government areas in Queensland over the past decade. This strong growth is predicted to continue, and over the next 10 years, it is estimated that the population of the region will increase. Table 4.1 below shows estimated population growth for Moreton Bay from 2011 until 2036.

Table 4.1 Estimated population growth for the Moreton Bay region

Year Population Annual change Annualpercentage

change

Jobs

2011 387,685 103,491

2016 429,048 8,273 1.93% 113,132

2021 478,304 9,851 2.06% 127,246

2026 536,073 11,554 2.16% 141,843

2031 589,458 10,677 1.81% 156,238

2036 634,819 9,072 1.43% 170,350 Source: LGIP2 Planning assumptions May 2016 – Moreton Bay Regional Council).

Within the Corporate Plan, MBRC has responded to this issue by identifying ‘a sustainable planning and design framework to manage growth’. For each major asset group, MBRC has appropriate levels of development planning in place to cater for the predicted changes over the foreseeable future.

4.1 Demand drivers, demand forecast 4.1.1 Demand drivers Factors affecting the demand for pathway network upgrades and growth include increasing population, changing activity and growth centres, changing demographics, environmental awareness, economic factors, missing links and land development.

4.1.2 Formal Demand Planning MBRC’s Planning and Economic Development (P&ED) section is responsible for preparing future direction in planning the transport network within MBRC. The transport infrastructure planning is based on a hierarchy of plans under the SEQ Regional Plan developed by the State Government and MBRC. The SEQ Regional Plan is currently being reviewed and a draft of the updated version, called Shaping SEQ is available to read at the following link: http://www.dilgp.qld.gov.au/planning/regional-planning/south-east-queensland-regional-plan.html



PAGE 251

Agenda


PAGE 251 Agenda

Page 14 of 27

In the MBRC strategic framework, a ‘place types’ approach has been promoted with the intent to improve existing urban centres and to create more of them. There are a number of MBRC draft strategies available that may impact on the pathway assets, including:

Integrated Local Transport Strategy 2012 – 2031 (as at Nov 2015) Networks and Corridors Strategy 2012 – 2031 (as at Nov 2015)

There is also a strong focus on providing alternative transport options, including active transport (walking, cycling) and public transport, both of which will impact the pathway network.

The SEQ Regional Plan sets a target for active transport modes to provide 14% of the transport network by 2031. Table 4.1.2.1 shows the mode share targets represent current planning based on the 2010 figures: Table 4.1.2.1 Mode share targets

Transport modelled share data time line

Car Public

transport Active

transport

2010 Modelled mode share 87% 5% 8%

2031 Modelled mode share (for trend model)

83% 9% 8%

2031 Mode share target (for policy model)

75% 11% 14%



PAGE 252

Agenda


PAGE 252 Agenda

Page 15 of 27

5 Asset Lifecycle Management Best practice for asset management requires the consideration of all whole of life phases with activities which are timely and cost effective, to ensure consistent service standards and longevity from the asset.

5.1 Asset lifecycle Nominally the average pathway has a useful / service life of 40 years (Australian Government, Department of Infrastructure, Transport Regional Development and Local Government). The useful / service life of a pathway can vary depending on the environment and utilisation.

The pathway network must be effectively managed to ensure a satisfactory service standard is maintained over the full life of the assets, resulting in an optimum minimum lifecycle cost. The stages of the lifecycle include: identify need, plan, design, construct, operate / maintain, renew / upgrade, and dispose.

5.2 Asset capacity and performance MBRC’s services are provided to meet design standards or guidelines where these are available. Pathway assets are designed to meet Australian standards.

The performance of the pathway network is to achieve good connectivity with walking and riding comfort, and appearance (see s3 Community levels of service). MBRC’s pathway strategy is for the construction of new and the upgrade of existing pathways to a shared pathway standard. This strategy has been developed to increase the capacity of the pathway network, promoting alternative active transport, while achieving better path connectivity throughout the network.

5.3 Condition and profile The condition of the pathway network is important for maintaining the required levels of service. Prior to April 2017 MBRC did not have captured condition data on the entire pathway network. This was identified in 2016 as an issue which resulted in Asset Management engaging a specialist contractor to capture the condition of the entire MBRC pathway network.

Table 5.3.1 below shows the condition rating applying to the MBRC pathway network, and Table 5.3.2 sets out the pathway defect rating criteria.



PAGE 253

Agenda


PAGE 253 Agenda

Page 16 of 27

Table 5.3.1 Pathway condition rating criteria

ConditionRating

Condition description

1

Almost new construction, with perfect alignment and excellent surface condition displaying no defects, substantial surface blemishes, post construction patching or reinstatements. Surface reveals only very fine grits within the smooth material finish.

2

Sound construction with good surface condition and no perceptible distortion but may show limited surface ageing by revealing the tops of sporadic stone aggregates although still exhibiting a smooth surface profile. May include joint stepping < 10mm, successful reinstatements, isolated slight surface grinding or minor distress not exceeding 10% of the inspection area.

3

Reasonable construction with a serviceable surface showing reasonable surface aging displaying more substantial portions of the stone aggregates. May display minor surface defects, moderate to heavy surface grinding, areas of substantial surface deterioration or distortion. Such distortions may consist of stepping which is estimated to be typically between 10mm – 25mm vertical movement or reasonably obvious undulations typically up to 75mm or the presence of non-reinstated sections. The extent of Minor and Major defects will typically affect <25% and <10% respectively of the area targeted for assessment.

4

Construction may display substantial surface deterioration from material oxidation over the majority of the surface creating a rough surface from highly exposed and missing aggregate material. May contain between 25% to 50% or <25% of minor or major defects respectively or distortion which may consist of stepping estimated to be typically but not exclusively between 25mm to 50mm vertical movement or obvious undulations typically between 75 to 150mm and obtrusive to pedestrian traffic.

5

Construction displays >50% or >25% areas of minor or major surface distress respectively, extreme ageing, substantial distortion typically > 150mm and a likely impediment to pedestrian traffic or the presence of >50mm trip or shear displacements within the predominant pedestrian traffic area.

Notes: The above definitions are considered generic and apply to all hard standing constructions regardless of material type. Minor Defects include Cracking <5mm wide, Chipping or spalling <150mm diameter & <25mm depth, corner or edge breaks < 150 diagonal <15mm distortion. Major Defects include Cracking >5mm width, Cracking with >5mm differential movement, Stepping >25mm, Distortion >75mm, Inadequate surface grip.

Table 5.3.2 Pathway defect rating criteria



PAGE 254

Agenda


PAGE 254 Agenda

Page 17 of 27

Footpath Defect MatrixScore Age Estimate Minor Defects Major Defects Trips

1 Almost New (likely < 5 yrs) 0 0

2 Minor Ageing (5 to 10 yrs) < 10% 0

3 Moderate Ageing (10 to 25 yrs)

10 - 25% <10% 10 - 25mm

4 Significant Ageing (>25 yrs) 25 - 50% <25% > 25mm

5 N/A > >50 % > 25% >50mm

5.3.1 Condition inspections program MBRC’s whole pathway network condition inspections (network condition survey) will be completed by external contractors by June 2017. It is MBRC’s recommended strategy that the network condition survey be performed every 2 years. The current inspection process utilises internal asset inspectors (field Inspection) to capture defects. The inspections are scheduled in line with pathway hierarchy of criticality / importance.

MBRC’s future condition inspection program will be a combination of external survey and internal inspection. Frequency and task will be determined with consideration of the future pathway hierarchy / star rating.

5.3.2 Modelling and monitoring MBRC is currently investigating a strategic asset management modelling tool which can provide modelled scenarios for the entire pathway network, identifying works program candidates with the most cost effective timing and treatment method.

The output of the strategic asset management model will enable MBRC to set and meet budget forecasts, agreed levels of service and corresponding condition levels. In addition, the new tool uses a customised rule base that is aligned with current MBRC pathway renewal treatments and practices.

It is important to ensure that the pathway data is kept up to date with completed works for all renewal and upgrade pathway projects and new/donated assets.

5.3.3 Resourcing Budget has been allocated to AMT to undertake the 2 yearly condition inspection of MBRC pathway network. This data will be used to develop priorities renewals program based criteria constraint modelling.

AM allocates internal asset inspectors to inspect high priority / critical pathways based on the pathway rating. This data is used to prioritise maintenance activities.

AI-PW10 - Review, document and implement new inspection program

AI-PW11 - Update the pathway database on a six monthly basis as to renewal, upgrade and new / donated assets.

5.4 Risk Management Plan There are a range of factors which may affect the pathway network, including;



PAGE 255

Agenda


PAGE 255 Agenda

Page 18 of 27

Age - of the surface and rehabilitation (grinding pathway); Available resources - to have adequate staffing and budget for maintenance,

capital projects and testing / inspection as required; Projects are prioritised correctly - target rehabilitation to appropriate pathway to

avoid wasted expenditure, time and resources; Environmental issues - to respond to damage from rain events / flooding to

ensure minimum disruption to the pathway network; Data and information - to be available, accurate and complete to ensure optimum

planning for operation, tactical and strategic planning purposes. AI-PW12 - Develop and formalise the pathway risk management framework

5.5 Routine Maintenance Plan MBRC’s current maintenance plan relies heavily on the defect capture process to identify maintenance tasks/ activities.

5.5.1 Current maintenance plan The main routine maintenance tasks undertaken by MBRC are pathway panel replacement, grinding and topsoiling/ turfing.

Panel Replacement

Panel replacement is replacing footpath surface sections that become unserviceable. Candidates are identified based on defect inspections and customer requests.

Grinding

Grinding is undertaken to reduce trip hazards pathway network. The current panel grinding program is managed by AM. Panel grinding is identified using condition inspection and customer requests.

Pathway grinding is carried out in accordance with the Australian Standard for Pedestrian Surfaces (AS/NZS 3661.1.1933)

Pathway grinding works meets AS/NZS 4663:2002 for the slip resistance measurement of existing surfaces

Code of Practice: Pathway risk management policy.

Topsoiling/Turfing

Topsoiling / turfing is undertaken to repair edge drops on pathways. The current topsoiling / turfing program is managed by AM, with works identified using condition inspection and customer requests.

5.5.2 Recommended maintenance plan The recommended maintenance approach is for MBRC to review its current maintenance tasks / activities and assess against the hierarchy and / or star rating to determine the required level of maintenance. Adopting this strategy, MBRC can develop routine schedules using criteria such as the pathways importance (start rating), known / recurring issues (tree roots) and/ or seasonal variations (debris from water run off).

AI-PW13 - Review, adapt and develop technical document for pathway grinding, assessing industry standard practices and regulation. AI- PW14 - Develop and implement program to identify panel replacement after 2017 pathway network condition survey.



PAGE 256

Agenda


PAGE 256 Agenda

Page 19 of 27

5.6 Renewal / Replacement Plan Renewal expenditure is allocated to major work which does not increase the asset’s design capacity but restores (repair), rehabilitates (remediates), replaces or renews an existing asset to its intended level of service. Work over and above restoring an asset to its intended level of service is upgrade / expansion or new works expenditure.

5.6.1 Current renewal / replacement plan MBRC has a budgeted pathways renewal / replacement program. A formal method / process for identifying candidate assets and their relative priority, based on criteria such as, condition, criticality, utilisation and location is required. This process would identify a 10+ year program of prioritised candidates for renewal / replacement and loaded into MBRC’s ePID system.

5.6.2 Creation / acquisition / upgrade Currently, the majority of new pathways are ‘donated assets’ associated with the development of new residential estates across the region. These pathways are required to be constructed to the specifications and standards provided in MBRC’s design standards.

AI-PW15 - Pathway rehabilitation design review to consider rehabilitation options

5.7 Disposal process The disposal of MBRC pathway assets are very rare. Pathways are generally upgraded in section to meet demand and to align with MBRC’s long-term planning scheme.



PAGE 257

Agenda


PAGE 257 Agenda

Page 20 of 27

6 Systems The following corporate systems are used within MBRC to assist with the management of the pathway assets. Within the Technology One suite of applications, there is better integration between the financial asset register and the physical asset register which contains details including works activities, defects and condition information. The Technology One application also enables a mobile computing solution to be used across council to assist with field operations.

MBRC’s GIS is also integrated with the Technology One applications, and readily allows spatial representation of the pathway assets. The GIS is also used to update the asset registers.

RIO is MBRC’s corporate document recording system and contains documents of all types. Specific to pathway assets will be reports on condition, historical project and other documents and specific correspondence.

Table 6.1 MBRC Systems used for Data Capture and Processing System Colloquial Name Description

GIS ArcMap An ESRI Product, the Geographical Information System is used for asset capture (also use software FME to manipulate GIS data). The GIS is also used to load TOMAS.


Financial asset register Technology One Technology One product – financial asset information, annual budgets, long term financial forecasts.


Objective (RIO) Formal system for information related to road assets, including reports and studies.

Feature Manipulation Engine

FME Used to quality assure and merge field data into TOMAS Asset Register and GIS spatial mapping



PAGE 258

Agenda


PAGE 258 Agenda

Page 21 of 27

7 Financial Summary The pathway network is one of MBRC’s most utilised infrastructure asset classes.

7.1 Useful lifeWhen assets are initially recognised, each asset is attributed with an estimated useful life, which is used as a basis for determining depreciation and long-term financial forecasting requirements.

7.1.1 Current useful lives for pathway assets The current financial useful life is 40 years for a pathway constructed from concrete. The useful life of other construction materials has not yet been assessed at this time.

7.1.2 Estimated remaining useful life for pathway assets The estimated remaining useful life varies dependent on a number of key factors which includes condition of the asset, construction, material, utilisation and environment.

AI-PW16 - Investigate useful life of pathways by construction material

7.2 Financial Statements and Projections 7.2.1 Valuations Table 7.2.1 outlines the total replacement value (TRV) for the pathway assets (all figures in $M):

Table 7.2.1 Pathways total replacement values and written down valuesDescription 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Total ReplacementValue (TRV)

204.6 207.3 209.5 211.2 213.4 204.6 207.3 209.5 211.2 213.4

Written Down Value (WDV) 215.7 218.0 220.3 222.5 225.7 215.7 218.0 220.3 222.5 225.7

7.2.2 Annual depreciation expense for pathway assets Table 7.2.2 below lists the depreciation figures for the pathway assets, with the final total annual depreciation expense (all figures in $M):

Table 7.2.2 Pathways Accumulated Depreciation and Total Annual DepreciationExpense using the Straight-Line Method (all figures in $)

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22

Accumulated depreciation 42.0 44.9 47.9 50.9 54.0

Total annual depreciation expense 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.3

Description 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Accumulated depreciation 57.1 60.2 63.3 66.5 69.7

Total annual depreciation expense 2.9 2.9 3.0 3.0 3.0



PAGE 259

Agenda


PAGE 259 Agenda

Page 22 of 27

7.2.3 Asset consumption ratio and asset sustainability From this data the asset consumption ratio (ACR = total WDV / total replacement value) and the asset sustainability ratio (ASR = renewal and replacement budget / annual depreciation) can be calculated over the ten year period as outlined in Table 7.2.3 below

Table 7.2.3 Pathways ACR and ASR 10 YR Projection Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22

Asset consumption ration (ACR) 78% 77% 76% 75% 74%

Asset Sustainability Ratio (ASR) 9% 18% 17% 55% 55%

Description 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Asset consumption ration (ACR) 72% 71% 70% 69% 68%

Asset Sustainability Ratio (ASR) 54% 53% 53% 77% 75%

For the ACR the target consumption range is 40% to 80%. As outlined above, the ACR for MBRC’s pathway network assets sits within the recommended range

The asset sustainability ratio (ASR) indicates the extent of expenditure on existing assets through renewal compared with depreciation expense (target is 90%). This is increasing over the next ten years, demonstrating a growth in renewal expenditure towards a sustainable 90% ASR target.

Figure 7.2.1 Pathways - ACR 10-YR Projection

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

Pathways Asset Consumption Ratio

Measured Asset Consumption Ratio Upper Threshold Lower Threshold



PAGE 260

Agenda


PAGE 260 Agenda

Page 23 of 27

Figure 7.2.2 Pathways - ASR 10-YR Projection

7.2.4 Maintenance expense for pathway assets The planned maintenance expenditure for pathway is shown in Table 7.2.4 (all figures in $M):Table 7.2.4 Total 10 year pathways maintenance budget

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22

Total maintenance budget 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8

Description 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Total maintenance budget 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8

7.2.5 Capital expenditure for pathway assets The capital expenditure for each year of a ten year program (adopted in 2016/17) is listed in Table 7.2.5 (all figures in $M):

Table 7.2.4 10 year pathways renewal/ replacement and new/ upgrade budget Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Renewal / replacements 0.2 0.5 0.5 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.4 2.4

New assets / upgrades 2.4 1.5 1.2 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.7

7.2.6 Date of valuation and valuation methodology The pathway assets were re-valued along with the road infrastructure assets in later 2014.The estimated remaining useful life capture in MBRC’s finance register was used for the re-valuation.

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

Pathways Asset Sustainability Ratio

Measured Asset Sustainability Ratio Target Asset Sustainability Ratio



PAGE 261

Agenda


PAGE 261 Agenda

Page 24 of 27

8 Improvement and Monitoring

Work is required to further progress the maturity of information, particularly where information gaps have been found relating to the level of detail (attributes) of pathways and maintenance task / activities. These improvements and others have been recorded as Action Items throughout this Plan. They are consolidated in Section 8.2 below, with responsibilities assigned.

8.1 Known issues with the quality of data, forecasts and estimates Implementation of this PPAMP will assist MBRC improve understanding and management of its pathway assets. Annual reviews of the PPAMP will result in a continuous process improvement plan effectively being applied.

The reliability and accuracy of the data concerning the pathway assets is in its infancy and requires improvement. Over the short term, and with the introduction of a whole of network inspection process, the maturity and confidence in the data will increase. Factors contributing to the reliability of the data include:

Accuracy and completeness of asset data captured in TOMAS including asset attributes, warranty information

Integrity and type of data captured in legacy systems prior to amalgamation Variations in assumptions on expected lives of assets Validation of existing data within TOMAS Physical assessment of remaining useful life versus the financial forecast and

depreciation schedule Identification and validation of data not captured in TOMAS Knowledge of asset condition Knowledge and ability to meet required service levels Future demand predictions Accuracy of risk assessment for building assets Loss of tacit knowledge of assets through staff departures

8.2 Actions required to mitigate the known issues

Table 8.2.1 Action plan Action No. Detail Responsibility Due date

PW1S2

Implement new pathway hierarchy classification and definitions

AMT & AM 2017/18

PW2S2.2

Develop and implement pathway star rating in-line with new hierarchy

AMT & AM 2017/18

PW3S3

Review, capture and update pathway attributes

AMT & AM 2017/18

PW4S3

Develop and implement pathway CSR report process

ITP&D, AMT, AM

2017/18

PW5S3

Develop pathways clean standard and regime

AM 2017/18

PW6 Document maintenance activities AM 2017/18



PAGE 262

Agenda


PAGE 262 Agenda

Page 25 of 27

Action No. Detail Responsibility Due date

S3

PW7S3

Develop and implement donated assets inspection process

ITP&D, AMT, AM

2017/18

PW8S3

Investigate construction methods and material

ITP&D, AMT, AM

2017/18

PW9S4

Load and integrate the LGIP projects with the capital works program, within the corporate e-PID system

ITP&D, AMT, AM

2017/18

PW10S5.3

Develop pathway internal and external condition inspection plan to carry out inspection.

AMT & AM 2017/18

PW11S5.3

Ensure that the pathway database is regularly updated with renewal, upgrade and new / donated assets.

AMT & AM Ongoing

PW12S5.4

Develop risk management framework specific to pathway asset - MBRC ERM is so pathway and need specific one for pathways.

AMT AssetMaintenance

2017/18

PW13S5.5

Review, adapt and develop technical document for pathway grinding, assessing industry standard practices and regulation

AM 2017/18

PW14S5.5

Develop suitable program to identify panel replacement after 2016/2017 condition inspection

AMT & AM 2017/18

PW15S5.6

Rehabilitation design review to be performed internally and responsible for the review and selection of rehab design options.

ITP&D & AM 2017/18

PW16S7.1

Investigate useful life of pathways by construction material

AMT 2017/18



PAGE 263

Agenda


PAGE 263 Agenda

Page 26 of 27

APPENDICES

Appendix no. Title Section

Appendix 1 Pathway Asset Register ADAC Structure 2.2



PAGE 264

Agenda


PAGE 264 Agenda

Page 27 of 27

Appendix 1 - Pathway Asset Register ADAC Structure

The following table defines the pathway asset structure, aligned to ADAC;

ADAC Pathway Assets Description

Pedestrian Pathway less than 2.5m wide Combination Pathway 2.5m wide or greater (unless obviously not meant for

dual use - e.g. wide pathways outside of shop fronts or ‘Streetscape Pathway’ described below.

Access Pathway Can be either Pedestrian or Combination based on width. Paths located in narrow unnamed road reserve between two properties giving access from one road to another.

Streetscape Pathway Can be either Pedestrian or Combination and not necessarily based on width. These are paths of varying widths, materials, and thicknesses where splitting the pathway into small segments is not warranted. Generally these are captured from kerb to property boundary with widths, thicknesses, and materials being derived from the majority

Kerb Ramps Ramps from pathway to road, of varying dimensions have been captured on a separate Point Feature Class.



PAGE 265

Agenda


PAGE 265 Agenda


ITEM 4.6 COASTAL PROTECTION PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 4 ASSET CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE Reference: A15398295 : 6 June 2017 - Refer Supporting Information A15145618 Responsible Officer: AE, A/Coordinator Asset Management (ECM Engineering) Executive Summary In accordance with section 167(1) of the Local Government Regulation 2012, Moreton Bay Regional Council (MBRC) is to prepare and adopt a Long-Term Asset Management Plan. The purpose of this report is to present to Council, for adoption, the Coastal Protection Portfolio Asset Management Plan (CPPAMP) which was workshopped with Council on 20 June 2017. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION That the Coastal Protection Portfolio Asset Management Plan be adopted, as tabled.


PAGE 266

Agenda


PAGE 266 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 4.6 COASTAL PROTECTION PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL - A15398295 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background The original Long-Term Asset Management Plan (2012-2021), adopted by Council in June 2012, provided the initial framework for the management of MBRC’s infrastructure assets, including coastal protection assets. The Queensland Audit Office has recently highlighted that the financial data for asset renewal, upgrades and new assets, needs to be revised annually to inform Council’s Long-term Financial Forecast (LTFF). The Strategic Asset Management Framework and supporting portfolio asset management plans will be updated annually to inform the LTFF. The new Strategic Asset Management Plan (SAMP), as part of a revised Strategic Asset Management Framework, will encompass the following items: • Infrastructure Asset Management Policy (Policy No. 2150-043) • Strategic Asset Management Plan • Portfolio Asset Management Plans (representing 19 asset portfolios) The SAMP is supported by 19 portfolio asset management plans, of which coastal protection represents one asset portfolio. The SAMP is based on the following strategies: • Optimising maintenance and renewal practices • Prioritising investment to achieve maximum value • Validating investment decisions to confirm funds are being spent effectively • Identifying lower lifecycle cost solutions • Managing risk to an appropriate level • Capturing and monitoring the condition of infrastructure assets now and predicting future condition The attached CPPAMP outlines MBRC’s approach to managing and maintaining the coastal protection assets. The processes and principles outlined in this plan are intended to drive improvements in the management of MBRC’s coastal network and the service delivered to the community. It is noted that the current CPPAMP refers to seawalls. The CPPAMP will be expanded to include other coastal protection assets (e.g. groynes, breakwaters, beaches) with successive CPPMAP iterations / revisions. A separate asset management plan will be required for seawalls associated with canal estates. The adoption of the CPPAMP will assist MBRC in meeting its legislative compliance obligations and assist the management of its coastal protection assets. 2. Explanation of Item MBRC has over 17km of public seawalls providing erosion protection for public lands and infrastructure. It is important to ensure that these assets are managed in the most cost-effective manner over the complete asset lifecycle, to provide the required level of service to the community while managing risk appropriately. Further, the timely upgrade of these assets is required to ensure changes to coastal hazards and the risks associated with climate change are adequately addressed. To achieve this, it is important that adequate maintenance and renewal funding is allocated to ensure the sustainability of this asset class in the long term. The long-term planning for seawalls will be informed by the regional seawall condition assessment piece of work and the recently commenced Climate Hazard Adaptation Strategy (CHAS) project. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications


(1) A local government must prepare and adopt a Long-Term Asset Management Plan.


PAGE 267

Agenda


PAGE 267 Agenda


(2) The Long-Term Asset Management Plan continues in force for the period stated in the plan unless the local government adopts a new Long-Term Asset Management Plan.

(3) The period stated in the plan must be 10 years or more.

Additionally, Section 168 of the Local Government Regulation 2012 states that Council’s Long-term Asset Management Plan must: (a) Provide for strategies to ensure the sustainable management of the assets mentioned in the

local government’s asset register and the infrastructure of the local government; and (b) State the estimated capital expenditure for renewing, upgrading and extending the assets for

the period covered by the plan; and (c) Be part of, and consistent with, the LTFF



The SAMP and supporting CPPAMP have direct linkages with other corporate documents as illustrated in the diagram below:

Figure 1 - Asset Management within MBRC Statutory Planning Context

As mentioned above, these plans inform MBRC’s LTFF in relation to costs associated with maintenance, upgrade and renewal of assets. The plan also guides MBRC’s corporate plan regarding overall strategic asset management and informs MBRC’s capital works program which forms part of the operational plan and budget.



PAGE 268

Agenda


PAGE 268 Agenda



Risks associated with the coastal protection assets are included in the plan.


3.6 Financial Implications The SAMP and associated CPPAMPs inform Council’s LTFF.

3.7 Economic Benefit Sustainable provision and management of MBRC’s coastal protection assets supports economic growth across the region e.g. providing the required coastal protection performance across varying aspects of our community. Additionally, a well-managed coastal protection assets maintenance program improves the overall amenity of the region and is highly valued by the community.


The management of MBRC’s coastal protection assets assists in improving environmental outcomes. 3.9 Social Implications

The timely and cost-effective management of MBRC’s coastal protection assets contributes to the overall benefit of residents, visitors, business and industry, by providing the required coastal infrastructure to support the region’s quality lifestyle.



PAGE 269

Agenda


PAGE 269 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15145618 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 4.6 COASTAL PROTECTION PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL #1 Coastal Protection Portfolio Asset Management Plan


PAGE 270

Agenda


PAGE 270 Agenda

Coastal Protection Portfolio Asset Management Plan

ITEM 4.6 - COASTAL PROTECTION PORTFOLIO ASSET MANAGEMENT PLAN - REGIONAL (Cont.)


#1 Coastal Protection Portfolio Asset Management Plan


PAGE 271

Agenda


PAGE 271 Agenda


i

Document Reference

Document title Coastal Protection Portfolio Asset Management Plan RIO Reference A15145618 Date prepared June 2017 Date adopted by council Prepared by ECM Infrastructure Planning - Asset Management

Version control Version Date Revision details Author/s Reviewed by

Draft v1 12 April 2017

Initial draft Z McKenna J Turnbull

Draft v2 27 April 2017

Revised draft J Turnbull J Dominic


Stakeholder Review and Feedback D Ohara J Turnbull

D Ohara, J Turnbull, C Krautz, A Charteris, P Marsh, F Chyer, R MacBeth, M Ham


Update of stakeholder comments D Ohara C. Krautz

A Evans, A Charteris

Draft v4 13 June 2017

Update of Director comments C Krautz A Martini, A Charteris

1.0 14 June 2017

Version 1.0 for Council Adoption C Krautz A Martini



PAGE 272

Agenda


PAGE 272 Agenda


ii

CONTENTS

1 PURPOSE 1

2 ASSET INFORMATION 22.1 Seawalls 2

2.1.1 Seawall Types 2

2.1.2 Seawall Hierarchy 4

2.1.3 Seawall Attributes 4

3 LEVELS OF SERVICE 53.1 Community Levels of Service 63.2 Technical Levels of Service 7

4 FUTURE DEMAND 94.1 Demand Drivers, Demand Forecast 94.2 Demand Impact 9

5 ASSET LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT 115.1 Asset Lifecycle 115.2 Asset Capacity and Performance 115.3 Condition and Profile 12

5.3.1 Monitoring and Condition Inspections 13

5.3.2 Resourcing 14

5.4 Risk Management Plan 145.5 Routine Maintenance Plan 15

5.5.1 Current Maintenance Plan 15

5.5.2 Recommended Maintenance Plan 15


5.6.1 Current Renewal / Replacement Plan 15

5.6.2 Recommended Renewal / Replacement Plan 15

5.7 Creation / Acquisition Plan 165.8 Upgrade Plan 165.9 Disposal Plan 17

6 SYSTEMS 18

7 FINANCIAL SUMMARY 197.1 Useful Life 19

7.1.1 Current Useful Life for Seawall Assets 19

7.1.2 Estimated Remaining Useful Life for Seawall Assets 19


7.2.1 Valuations 19

7.2.2 Annual Depreciation Expense for Seawall Assets 20

7.2.3 Maintenance Expense for Seawalls Assets 22

7.2.4 Capital Expenditure for Seawalls Assets 22



PAGE 273

Agenda


PAGE 273 Agenda


iii

8 IMPROVEMENT AND MONITORING 238.1 Known Issues with the Quality of Data, Forecasts and Estimates 238.2 Actions Required to Mitigate the Known Issues 23

9 APPENDICES 26Appendix 1 - Additional Legislative Policies, Standards and Guidelines 27Appendix 2 - Reference Model for Risk Threshold Identification in Coastal Hazard Adaptation Strategy 28Appendix 3 - Process Flow Diagram for Development of Seawall Repairs, Replacement and Maintenance Schedules 29



PAGE 274

Agenda


PAGE 274 Agenda


iv

Definitions for Abbreviations

Term Definition

ACR Asset consumption ratio

AI Action item

AM Asset Maintenance

AMT Asset Management Team (within ECM Infrastructure Planning)

ACR Asset Consumption Ratio

ASR Asset Sustainability Ratio

CHAS Coastal Hazard Adaption Strategy

CPPAMP Coastal Protection Portfolio Asset Management Plan

CSR Customer Service Request

DTMR Department of Transport and Main Roads

ECM Engineering Construction and Maintenance Division

Embarc Moreton Bay Regional Council Intranet

ePID Electronic Project Initiation Document

ERUL Estimated Remaining Useful Life

F&PS Financial and Project Services

GIS Geographical Information System

IIMM International Infrastructure Management Manual

IPWEA Institute of Public Works Engineering Australia

LGA Local Government Area

LGIP Local Government Infrastructure Plan

LTFF Long term financial forecast

MBRC Moreton Bay Regional Council

NAMS New Zealand Asset Management Scheme

PAMP Portfolio Asset Management Plan

PED Planning and Economic Development Division

PIP Priority Infrastructure Plan

PMC Project Management and Construction (section within ECM)

PSP Planning Scheme Policy

RIO MBRC acronym for MBRC’s record management system

SAMP Strategic Asset Management Plan

TBC To be confirmed

TOMAS MBRC acronym for MBRC's asset management system

TRV Total replacement value



PAGE 275

Agenda


PAGE 275 Agenda


Page 1 of 30

1 Purpose The purpose of the Coastal Protection Portfolio Asset Management Plan (CPPAMP) is to outline Moreton Bay Regional Council’s (MBRC) approach to the management of coastal protection assets under its control. This asset management plan serves:

to demonstrate responsible and sustainable management of the assets

to communicate and justify funding requirements, and

to ensure compliance with regulatory requirements

The CPPAMP provides an overview of the status and activities associated with the services provided by the coastal protection assets, and current and future risks which may impact the assets. The key lifecycle phases of these assets have been considered in the preparation of the plan, to provide an overall understanding of the issues and costs affecting the services provided. Action Items (AI) have been developed to address identified issues and these are listed in Section 8.2.

This CPPAMP will be reviewed and updated on an annual basis, and represents the latest iteration at this point in time. MBRC’s approach to asset management has been aligned to the ISO55000 series of standards for infrastructure asset management, as outlined in the Strategic Asset Management Plan (SAMP).



PAGE 276

Agenda


PAGE 276 Agenda


Page 2 of 30

2 Asset Information

Coastal protection assets include groynes, breakwaters, dune protection, beaches and seawalls. They are assets whose primary function is to address and/or mitigate the risks of coastal erosion due to tide and wave processes.

The CPPAMP does not include coastal assets such as beach access stairs, jetties, pontoons or boat ramps, these assets are to be covered within a Coastal Facilities Portfolio Asset Management Plan. Nor does the CPPAMP include coastal assets located within the three canal estates (Newport, Bribie Gardens and Pacific Harbour), again these assets will be covered by a Canals Portfolio Asset Management Plan.

This revision of the CPPAMP relates to seawalls only. The next iteration of the plan will be expanded to include other types of coastal protection assets, such as groynes, breakwaters etc.

2.1 Seawalls

A seawall is a site specific shoreline structure built to protect and retain a stable slope, and to protect land behind the structure from erosion processes due to tides and waves. Seawalls typically run parallel to the shoreline and can be implemented as flexible, semi-rigid or rigid structures using concrete, timber, rock, rubble, sand-filled geo-textile bag or other materials.

The objective of seawall projects (replacement, improvement and renewal) is to restore / increase the effectiveness of the seawall in protecting MBRC land or infrastructure, and thereby improving community resilience to severe, repetitive and changing coastal climate and erosion processes.

2.1.1 Seawall Types There are many different types of seawall within the MBRC region. The choice of seawall type is influenced by local characteristics such as location, wave climate, constructability, adaptability of design, and the need for additional amenity elements. Seawalls in the MBRC region can generally be classified into one of the following 4 types:

1) Stepped

Typically a concrete structure, offering informal seating and may include options of pedestrian access across the structure to the foreshore seaward of the seawall.

AI - CP001- Expand the CPPAMP to include other coastal protection assets, including groynes, breakwaters, dune protection and beaches.



PAGE 277

Agenda


PAGE 277 Agenda


Page 3 of 30

2) Sloping

These are constructed from a variety of material (rock, concrete, interlocking blocks, geotextile bags). The facing slope of the seawall is typically at 1V:1.5H or shallower.

3) Vertical

Typically constructed using concrete, but may also include some form of toe protection. Vertical seawalls include those that are near-vertical, with slopes much steeper than 1V:1.5H.

4) Combined Structures

These structures use a combination of materials.



PAGE 278

Agenda


PAGE 278 Agenda


Page 4 of 30

2.1.2 Seawall Hierarchy MBRC is developing a seawall asset register to describe and classify the seawall types within the region. The seawall hierarchy will allow seawalls to be recognised by type and / or grouped components. Seawall sections will be recognised where a continuous seawall changes in design, type or material.

MBRC is currently finalising a regional seawall condition survey. The survey will capture information regarding the condition, location and extent of MBRC’s seawall network. Seawalls and other coastal protection assets within the three canal estates (Newport, Bribie Gardens and Pacific Harbour) are excluded as these assets will be covered in a separate Canals Portfolio Asset Management Plan.

Seawalls have yet to be formally classified into a priority / importance hierarchy in MBRC’s asset management system. MBRC’s 2012-2021 Long-Term Asset Management Plan detailed a “general classification of assets” on a 1 to 5 star rating based on a combination of location, risk and network linkage.

AI - CP002 - Create a seawall hierarchy based on defined criteria of function, capacity and / or design within the asset register. AI - CP003 - Create seawall attributes and components in line with the new register hierarchy.AI - CP004 - Create seawalls and sections in TOMAS Asset Register.

2.1.3 Seawall Attributes The basic attributes or characteristics assigned to all seawalls are: Commission Date Location Seawall Type Condition Rating Asset Star Rating Primary Material Crest Height Minimum toe coverage Minimum Visible Toe Height Field Slope Owner Length & Width

Due to the large number and spatial extent of seawalls in the MBRC region, some rationalisation of seawall types will be required to ensure a functional maintenance schedule can be developed. The seawall types as shown in Section 2.1.1 are constructed and classified as follows:

1) Stepped - rigid concrete structures 2) Sloping - rigid, semi rigid and flexible structures of rock armour or mortar, shotcrete,

sand-filled geotextile bags (geobags) rubble or other non-mortared units 3) Vertical - rigid concrete or timber structures 4) Combined structures - seawalls joined at the same location of different material

and design for energy dissipation and toe protection.

AI - CP005 - Align breakdown of seawall function, capacity and / or design hierarchy.



PAGE 279

Agenda


PAGE 279 Agenda


Page 5 of 30

3 Levels of Service

Effective asset management planning is based on the relationship between cost, performance and risk, and their association with service delivery. A key factor for asset management planning at MBRC is the ability to match the delivered levels of service to service level expectations of the customers / community.

Management of MBRC coastal protection assets requires the consideration of levels of service; broadly these are - community and technical. These level of service categories are described further in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 Definition of Level of Service Level of Service Definition




How this standard of asset/s is to be achieved. Identify the need for the asset (provision service level) Identify the criteria to be applied to scope the asset

(development service level) Identify the ongoing maintenance requirements


Legislative Requirements

When developing levels of service for coastal protection assets, the following legislative requirements have been considered in addition to the policies, standards and guidelines listed in Appendix 1.

Table 3.2 Relevant Legislation Legislation Requirement

Local Government Act 2009 Sets out role, purpose, responsibilities and powers of local governments including the preparation of a long term financial plan supported by asset management plans for sustainable service delivery.

Australian Accounting Standards Sets out the financial reporting standards relating for the valuation and depreciation of MBRC’s infrastructure assets

Environment Protection Act 1994 Sets out the requirements to sustainably protect the environment during both the construction and life of the asset.

Disaster Management Act 2003 Requires MBRC to plan for mitigation of the impacts of natural disasters.

Sustainable Planning Act 2009 Sets out the requirements to plan for trunk infrastructure to support development.

Coastal Protection and Management Act 1995

Aims to provide for the protection, conservation, rehabilitation and management of the coast, including its resources and biological diversity.



PAGE 280

Agenda


PAGE 280 Agenda


Page 6 of 30

3.1 Community Levels of Service

Table 3.1.1 sets out MBRC’s community levels of service for seawall assets.

Table 3.1.1 Community Levels of Service

Service Attribute Service objective Performance Measure Process

Current Performance Expected performance in 10 years (LTFF)

Function Seawalls safely facilitate foreshore and beach activities

Seawall facilities meet demands of coastal erosion protection for design conditions

Number of CSRs / issues relating to function of the seawall or within the vicinity of the seawall

Analysis of CSRs / issues being worked through. Limited community engagement Reactive customer consultation

0 injury incidences

Condition rating between 1 (very good) and 5 (very poor) based on seawall sections

Condition 1 (Very good) = 5 Condition 2 (Good) = 46 Condition 3 (Fair) = 65 Condition 4 (Poor) = 53 Condition 5 (Very poor) = 28 Note - Seawalls with a Condition 5 have an estimated remaining serviceable life of less than 10% of design life (design life is typically 50 years)

0 assets with condition rating 5 Renewal / improvement projects have an e-PID raised and listed in the draft forward capital works program within 1 year of identification.

Quality Assets will be free of litter, vermin and inappropriate vegetation. Seawalls maintained in an acceptable condition

Number of CSRs / issues relating to the aesthetic quality of the seawall

Number of service defects

Analysis of CSRs / issues being worked through.

Zero customer complaints relating to seawall amenity. Implementation of a proactive program to inspect, maintain and manage public seawalls.

Safety Seawall assets are constructed and maintained to ensure public safety

Number of safety incidents reported

Analysis of incidents being worked through.

Zero incidents applicable to seawall structure safety.



PAGE 281

Agenda


PAGE 281 Agenda


Page 7 of 30

3.2 Technical Levels of Service

Table 3.2.1 sets out MBRC’s technical levels of service for seawall assets.

Table 3.2.1 Technical Levels of Service

Service Attribute Service Objective

Activity Measure Process

CurrentPerformance (year)

Desired for optimum life cycle cost

AgreedSustainable Position

Operation For seawalls with a beach frontage,sufficient sand to maintain stable seawall toe

Depth of sand above the toe of the seawall

Analysis in progress

Beachnourishment to maintain a stable beach slope seaward of the seawall, specific to each seawall asset

Beachnourishment to maintain a stable beach slope seaward of the seawall, specific to each seawall asset

Maintenance Seawalls are inspected and repaired post storm events

Service requests completed within adopted priority time frames

Analysis of CSRs / issues in progress

Operations completes ad-hoc works to maintain acceptable safety standards

100% of defects made safe within 3 working days 100% of repairs within 30 working days

100% of defects made safe within 5 working days 100% of defects assessed and prioritised for action within 30 working days

Maintenance Seawalls have structuredmaintenance program to avoid the need for ad-hoc repairs

Number of planned maintenance activities on seawall sections completed to agreed schedule

2017 - ad-hoc only 2018 schedule includes: Repair cracks, spalling and wear (minor) - 5 Repair cracks, spalling and wear (major) - 6 Seal gaps and replace fill from washout areas (major) - 9 Confirm wall toe embedment depth - 1

100% completed 90% completed

Maintenance / Condition Assessment

Seawall assets are safe, free from hazards, and do not cause injury to person or property

Number of safety incidents caused by or within vicinity of seawall

Analysis of CSRs / issues in progress

Analysis of insurance claims in progress

Zero safety incidents

Zero safety incidents

Renewal Structural integrity of seawalls is adequate, delivered through a program to avoid the need for ad-hoc renewals

Percentage of seawall renewals recommendedbased on regional seawall condition assessmentsdue to

Estimate of approx. $2.5M / year for remediation and replacement works (to be confirmed once assessmentscompleted)

100% completed 90% completed



PAGE 282

Agenda


PAGE 282 Agenda


Page 8 of 30

deterioration and age

Capital Programming - New

Coastal erosion controls are implemented as per the design intent and planning scheme

New assets donated or constructedthrough the capital works program are delivered satisfying design intent

New assets are accepted with external RPEQ signoff and monitored to ensure compliance to MBRC standards

100% of new assets are to design standard and at condition 1 at handover

100% of new assets are to design standard and condition 1 at handover

Upgrade Seawalls upgraded as per program (CHAS) to meet adaptation needs in response to changing coastal processes

Number of upgraded seawalls completed to reasonable timeframe(guided by CHAS)

CHAS yet to be finalised and implemented

100% completed as nominated in CHAS

90% completed as nominated in CHAS

Disposal Assets at the end of their useful life or not required to be decommissioned and disposed appropriately

Number of end-of-life assets decommissioned in the most cost effective and appropriate way

No seawall assets have been decommissioned in current year

Maintain a register of decommissioned assets

Apply a standard approach for disposal and decommissioning

Register of these assets to be incorporated into existing asset hierarchy

Createdocumentation of standard approach for decommissioning



PAGE 283

Agenda


PAGE 283 Agenda


Page 9 of 30

4 Future Demand The future demand for coastal protection assets is still being worked through, and as a result has not yet been fully quantified. Key factors affecting future demand for coastal protection assets include regional change and growth together with a range of coastal hazard and climate change influences.

Growth management is identified as a key issue within Council’s Strategic Plan and is being assessed via a range of initiatives, including the Local Government Infrastructure Plan (LGIP).

MBRC is currently updating storm tide conditions within the region, covering current and future climate coastal processes. Climate change influences on coastal hazards, and MBRC’s response to those issues, will be investigated during the preparation of a Coastal Hazard Adaptation Strategy (CHAS), a project recently commenced by MBRC with the support of State funding. The MBRC CHAS will build on the storm tide study, to document evolving coastal hazards, and identify adaptation strategies suitable for the affected coastal communities in the region. These adaptation strategies may include construction of new and upgrading of existing seawall structures.

It is expected that effects of both climate change and growth management will have a major impact on MBRC’s seawall network, through an increase in risk exposure, changes to maintenance frequency, the need for the creation of new seawalls, renewal/replacement of structures nearing the end of their useful life and upgrades/adaptation of existing structures to mitigate increases in coastal hazards.

4.1 Demand Drivers, Demand Forecast

Factors affecting the demand for upgrading and extension of the seawalls network include increasing population, changing growth centres, localised intensification, and changing demographics in the medium term, and environmental awareness, economic factors, land development and climate change in the longer term. The impacts of climate change are difficult to predict, but the current body of scientific research identifies the following key changes affecting coastal processes:

Sea level rise Increased southerly tendency for cyclones Increased frequency of higher intensity storms and cyclones Changes to local wind and wave climate

MBRC’s CHAS, currently in development, will provide guidance on how MBRC and the community can respond and adapt to climate change impacts in the coastal zone.

4.2 Demand Impact

In response to these demand drivers, MBRC programs and projects currently include design preferences to ensure seawalls can offer the required levels of service today while having the capacity to be upgraded/adapted over time to meet changing needs.



PAGE 284

Agenda


PAGE 284 Agenda


Page 10 of 30

Current MBRC projects in place for seawall constructions and renewals have modular seawalls that can be raised in the future to address climate change impacts. At most locations in the region subject to erosion risk, stepped seawalls are an appropriate design choice and can be readily modified at a future date to increase the level of protection afforded to public infrastructure.



PAGE 285

Agenda


PAGE 285 Agenda


Page 11 of 30

5 Asset Lifecycle Management Asset management requires the consideration of all whole of life phases with activities which are timely and cost effective, to ensure consistent service standards and longevity from the asset.

5.1 Asset Lifecycle

MBRC aims to provide coastal protection assets that deliver the specified levels of service whilst managing the lifecycle costs to ‘as low as reasonably practicable’ levels. The lifecycle of a coastal protection asset encompasses the following key components: identify need; plan; design; create / build; operate / maintain / adapt; rehabilitate / modify / adapt; and dispose.

5.2 Asset Capacity and Performance

Seawalls offer erosion protection for coastal areas. Design considerations include design life, the incident wave and water level conditions and often a measure to determine a degree of acceptable damage for events at or beyond the design conditions. The acceptable level of damage is a recognition that seawalls offer protection by absorbing wave energy, and inevitably this results in some level of damage to the structure.

Key performance indicators for MBRC’s seawalls are structural condition and serviceability. These are applicable as follows:

Structural Condition: the extent and significance of structural defects such as cracking, holes, collapse/partial collapse, and joint displacement. Serviceability: the degree to which defects and/or design affect wave protection and/or overtopping performance.

Seawalls in a poor structural condition will offer a lower level of service. However, a well-designed and maintained seawall may offer a low level of serviceability due to factors such as rock size or crest elevation.

Nevertheless, the key performance measure for a seawall is to reduce land erosion along the protected coastal network. Maintaining the desired level of service is achieved through regular periodic inspections to monitor condition and record defects, and maintenance/upgrades to meet changing needs.

Retaining the condition of the seawall network is paramount for effectively managing the seawall network to the desired level of service. The condition of the seawall is identified / represented by a 1 to 5 condition rating based on the IPWEA, NAMS and IIMM standards.

MBRC has adopted the condition rating scale for seawalls as outlined by Table 5.2.1 below.



PAGE 286

Agenda


PAGE 286 Agenda


Page 12 of 30

Table 5.2.1 Standard IPWEA, NAMS and IIMM Standard Condition Rating ConditionRatingScale

Grade ConditionRating

Grade Condition Description Expected residual Life (as percentage of design life)

1 Very good Sound physical condition; insignificant deterioration

80-100%

2 Good Acceptable physical condition; minor deterioration/minor defects

50-80%

3 Fair Moderate to significant localized deterioration evident; isolated sections need replacement or repair, but not affecting short term overall integrity

30-50%

4 Poor Serious deterioration and significant defects affecting structural integrity

10-30%

5 Very Poor Failed or near failure. Immediate need to replace asset

0-10%

Seawalls typically have a design life of 50 years, so condition 5 seawalls are expected to have 5 or less years of remaining effective life.

5.3 Condition and Profile

MBRC has engaged contractors to inspect the regional seawall network and collect condition and defect data. The assessment information as to both structural condition and the geographic extent of all seawalls under MBRC control. The project originated as a result of implementation of the erosion prone area (EPA) in the planning scheme and discussions with the State (DEHP) about EPA definition in areas where seawalls are in place and provide protection from storm hazards.

The project once completed will: Identify public seawalls including type, condition, defects, repair/renew timetable and

geographic extent; Identify private seawall ownership and geographic extent; Guide MBRC’s future work program and budget from prioritised seawall repairs and

replacement (refer to Appendix 3); and Provide datasets to review the extent of the state erosion prone area (EPA) in the

region to inform the Planning Scheme and the Climate Change Adaptation Strategy (CHAS).

There are a number of seawall sections which are partially buried (typically buried by sand seaward of the structure) such that a complete visual condition assessment was not possible. These buried seawalls are considered to be functioning as per design intent but have yet to be assigned a condition rating.



PAGE 287

Agenda


PAGE 287 Agenda


Page 13 of 30

Projected spend will be estimated using the 2017 MBRC Regional Seawall Condition Assessment data once completed and assessed. The data will then be uploaded into the new register, as mentioned in Section 7.2.

AI - CP006 - Develop annual level 1 inspection schedule for buried seawalls to understand stability of the sand, and should the sand erode or migrate, undertake level 2 seawall inspection in order to assign an appropriate condition rating.

5.3.1 Monitoring and Condition Inspections Prior to 2017, monitoring of the seawall network is on an ad-hoc basis, generally on known affected assets after storm events, or when failures are identified.

The 2017 Seawall Condition Assessment study will through condition assessment provide a guide to the estimated remaining life of all inspected seawall assets. Further understanding of the typical rate of degradation of seawalls in the region will be derived from analysis of planned future regular inspections.

Field condition inspections are an important part of proactive asset management of MBRC’s seawall assets. Seawalls are inspected after major storm surge events to determine reactive maintenance requirements.

Failure modes or defects for sea-walls may include:

Stability Bearing Failure Overturning Anchor or tie rod pull out Sliding at the base / dislodgement of blocks Internal erosion Toe erosion / scour Outflanking erosion / scour at wall ends Overtopping / overwash scour Pest Vegetation Litter Filter layer failure Cracking

It is recommended that MBRC undertakes the following inspections:

Post storm surge event level 1 inspection 12 monthly MBRC internal inspections (level 1) 5 yearly level 2 / detailed inspections Level 3 / engineering assessment based on level 2 recommendations

AI - CP007 - Develop seawall level 1, 2 and 3 inspection criteria, formulate and implement a condition inspection guideline. AI - CP008 - Develop and implement defect capture and process to agreed requirement / standard. AI - CP009 - Develop and implement inspection regime and process for seawall network to encompass routine / planned maintenance program.



PAGE 288

Agenda


PAGE 288 Agenda


Page 14 of 30

5.3.2 Resourcing MBRC currently uses external resources to conduct level 2 / detailed inspections, which is considered appropriate recognising that a specialist skill-set is required on a 5 yearly basis. Inspections of affected assets after storm events are resourced through Asset Maintenance, and where there is evidence or suspicion of seawall degradation, a specialist contractor may be brought in to assist in identifying temporary and/or long term remediation requirements.

AI - CP010 - Discuss, agree and allocate responsibilities for the completion of annual level 1 inspections following agreed process; and capturing and reporting required information.

5.4 Risk Management Plan

The following factors can influence the rate of coastal protection asset deterioration: Age; Design practices (including design life) Construction practices - incorrect construction method, materials used Environment - marine environment, acid sulphate soils, vegetation (both shoreward

and seaward), frequency and magnitude of storm events, tidal influences and inundation

Exposure - location, orientation, and nearshore conditions External influences - private structures abutting coastal assets

Risks related to potential erosion of foreshore lands are managed in accordance with MBRC’s Planning Scheme Provisions (PSPs) attached to the erosion prone areas (EPA’s) dictated by the Department of Environment and Heritage (DEHP).

It is noted that there are a range of liability issues arising from private jetties abutting public seawalls, and this requires further investigation on a case-by-case basis.

Examples of social, environmental and economic risks that impact the adoption or management of these assets include: biosecurity, marine park zoning, ownership/management liability, significant cultural and environmental significance, community engagement, changing legislation and development.

It is also noted that risk thresholds will be identified and considered along with adaptation strategies and timeframes as part of the development of the CHAS (refer to Appendix 2).

This information is to be updated on a regular basis to ascertain the correct levels of risk, i.e. a combination of both consequence and likelihood of failure.

AI - CP011 - Identify and monitor the risks associated with seawall performance in accordance to the CHAS risk thresholds. AI - CP012 - Investigate risk and liability issues arising from private jetties abutting public seawalls to determine a preventative plan or MBRC response. AI - CP013 - Update the GIS database and asset register following future inspections to include known occurrences of private structures abutting coastal protection assets.



PAGE 289

Agenda


PAGE 289 Agenda


Page 15 of 30

5.5 Routine Maintenance Plan

The majority of new seawalls are constructed by external contractors and covered by a defects liability period. After this period, MBRC becomes responsible for the seawall asset.

5.5.1 Current Maintenance Plan The 2017 MBRC Regional Seawall Condition Assessment once completed will guide both routine inspections and maintenance tasks and their frequency, as well as, scheduled / programmed maintenance.

As indicated in Section 5.4, issues regarding the building of private / non-standard jetty structures on State Land and abutting MBRC seawall assets will need to be investigated on a case-by-case basis. This raises liability issues that impacts on seawall maintenance, upgrade works and future disposal where the private structure is integral to the seawall.

5.5.2 Recommended Maintenance Plan The recommended routine maintenance tasks will include;

Inspection Vegetation and litter removal Pest management Minor repairs

The recommended routine maintenance tasks are to be developed as scheduled work orders within MBRC’s work system.

AI - CP014 - Update the Routine Maintenance Plan annually to ensure schedules remain relevant and allow for greater accuracy in planning and forecasting. AI - CP015 - Develop standard design solutions for the various maintenance, remediation and replacement activities, where practical, to provide efficiencies in future works. Plans and specifications to be developed for each work activity. AI - CP016 - Review and update unit rates within the Routine Maintenance Plan based on actual costing information that comes to hand.

5.6 Renewal / Replacement Plan

Renewal expenditure is allocated to major work which does not increase the asset’s design capacity but restores (repair), rehabilitates (remediates), replaces or renews an existing asset to its intended level of service. Work over and above restoring an asset to its intended level of service is upgrade/expansion or new works expenditure.

5.6.1 Current Renewal / Replacement Plan Renewal / replacements are generally raised as capital / operational projects through MBRC’s ePID system. Projects are generally identified through operational activities identifying seawalls after failure has occurred.

5.6.2 Recommended Renewal / Replacement Plan The 2017 level 2 condition assessment will identify remaining life of seawall assets and will be used to identify long term renewal scheduling.



PAGE 290

Agenda


PAGE 290 Agenda


Page 16 of 30

The recommended approach is for MBRC to adopt a renewal / replacement program based on the 2017 level 2 condition assessment findings and future regular routine condition inspections. This information can be utilised in the asset management system to prioritise projects based on condition and risk criteria.

AI - CP017 - Planning for seawall assets is to move from ad-hoc to a condition based and risk management approach.

5.7 Creation / Acquisition Plan

The creation or acquisition of seawalls generally occurs as:

Seawall extensions (sections) to address coastal erosion risks beyond the current geographic extent of the existing structure

New seawalls, created as a last line of defence where public infrastructure and/or assets are considered at risk due to existing or future projected coastal erosion processes.

In most cases, it is anticipated that these new assets will be identified through the implementation of the CHAS.

Average engineering design life of a seawall has been adopted as having a 50 year life. There are circumstances, such as economic factors, exposure, and frequency/severity of incident storm events, and adequacy of maintenance which can affect the life of a seawall. New seawalls and / or upgrades must conform to local, state and federal design and permitting requirements (e.g. DEHP Operational Policy: “Building and engineering standards for tidal works”).

5.8 Upgrade Plan

Existing seawalls are upgraded to improve performance where the existing level of service is considered inadequate or to address projected increases in coastal erosion processes (due to climate change influences). Armour size, toe protection and crest elevation are the key structural attributes that may require modification during an upgrade.

The 2017 level 2 condition assessment findings will identify remaining life and level of service of seawall assets and will be used to identify long term upgrade scheduling. Further, the CHAS will also inform future upgrade needs through consideration of the upgrades required to best adapt to evolving coastal hazards and climate change.

With consideration of the condition assessment and CHAS, DWCP will prepare ePIDs for seawall upgrade projects to be seeded into future capital works budgets. Upgrades must conform to local, state and federal design and permitting requirements.

AI - CP018 - Develop a 10+ year Capital (Renewal and Upgrade) program based upon inspection and seawall condition assessment data.



PAGE 291

Agenda


PAGE 291 Agenda


Page 17 of 30

5.9 Disposal Plan

Disposal of a complete seawall asset is relatively rare, but may occur when a new seawall replaces an obsolete asset or where a seawall is considered redundant with respect to the existing erosion buffer. Where an upgraded seawall may increase the function and capacity of an existing seawall, the original seawall is usually retained or adapted within the upgrade design. Depending on its quality, material unsuitable for a local seawall upgrade may be dumped or stockpiled for re-use in other seawall maintenance projects. Challenges relating to decommissioning of a seawall arise relating to overlapping state and local responsibilities in the coastal zone, and these would need to be addressed and resolved on a case-by-case basis.



PAGE 292

Agenda


PAGE 292 Agenda


Page 18 of 30

6 Systems In addition to the corporate systems listed in the SAMP, Table 6.1 below sets out the systems used for manage data relating to Coastal Protection assets.

Table 6.1 MBRC Systems used for Data Capture and Processing System Colloquial Name Description

GIS Arcmap An ESRI Product, the Geographical Information System is used for asset capture (also use software FME to manipulate GIS data). The GIS is also used to load TOMAS.


Financial asset register Technology One Technology One product – financial asset information, annual budgets, long term financial forecasts.


Objective (RIO) Formal system for information related to road assets, including reports and studies.

Feature Manipulation Engine FME Used to quality assure and merge field data into TOMAS Asset Register and GIS spatial mapping



PAGE 293

Agenda


PAGE 293 Agenda


Page 19 of 30

7 Financial Summary The seawall network is one of MBRC’s smaller infrastructure asset classes but can have a significant impact for the community. MBRC applies considerable effort to ensure responsible financial management of this asset class.

7.1 Useful Life

The engineering design life of a seawall is typically 50 years. However, with maintenance it is reasonable to expect the actual useful life of the seawall to be significantly longer. For accounting purposes, a seawall is assigned a useful life of 70 years, in recognition of an assumption that regular maintenance occurs.

7.1.1 Current Useful Life for Seawall Assets Based on previous seawall financial valuation, the current useful life documented in the MBRC financial asset register is averaged at 70 years for all seawall assets. These will be reviewed for the various types of seawall once the 2017 MBRC regional seawall condition assessment has been reviewed and finalised,.

7.1.2 Estimated Remaining Useful Life for Seawall Assets The estimated remaining useful life varies depending on the construction, material and condition of the assets. These factors are required to calculate the estimated remaining useful life (ERUL) for each asset. Rock armour from a decommissioned sloping seawall asset has residual value when the rock material is re-used as armour at other less exposed locations or as secondary armour within an upgraded asset.

As future condition assessments are completed, the estimated remaining useful life of each asset can be updated in the financial asset register. These depreciation of these assets can then be updated to recognise any changes in the estimated remaining useful life.

7.2 Financial Statements and Projections

The following financial figures are for 95 seawall assets currently registered in Council’s financial register (representing around 17km of public seawalls). The valuation of these recognised seawall assets was undertaken in 2014.

7.2.1 Valuations Table 7.2.1 outlines the total replacement value (TRV) for the 95 seawall assets (all figures in $):

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22

Total Replacement Value (TRV) 27,853,161 28,723,161 29,098,161 29,898,161 30,281,161

Written Down Value (WDV) 20,067,979 20,469,178 20,364,977 20,676,973 20,564,607

Description 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Total Replacement Value (TRV) 30,611,161 34,526,161 41,606,161 42,106,161 44,306,161



PAGE 294

Agenda


PAGE 294 Agenda


Page 20 of 30

Table 7.2.1 Seawall Future Year Valuations

7.2.2 Annual Depreciation Expense for Seawall Assets Table 7.2.2a lists the depreciation figures for the 95 seawall assets, with the final total annual depreciation expense (all figures in $):

Table 7.2.2a Seawall Accumulated Depreciation and Total Annual DepreciationExpense using the Straight-Line Method (all figures in $)

Two financial indicators, Asset Consumption Ratio (ACR) and Asset Sustainability Ratio (ASR) are used in relation to depreciable assets such as seawalls. The ACR measures the extent to which the asset has been consumed by comparing their written down value to their replacement cost. MBRC targets an ACR range of between 40%-80%. The ASR measures the extent of spending on existing assets via renewal compared with depreciation expense. MBRC targets an ASR of 90%. A significant challenge with seawall assets is the considerable cost associated with upgrade of a single asset. In any one year, the costs may be significant, and need to be considered within a time horizon of many years.

The ACR and ASR, using current valuation and budgets, are projected as follows:

Table 7.2.2b Seawall ACR and ASR 10 YR Projection

Written Down Value (WDV) 20,393,681 23,783,788 30,268,000 30,110,357 31,632,102

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22

Total annual depreciation expense

468,800 479,202 488,004 495,366 500,926

Description 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Total annual depreciation expense

524,893 595,788 657,643 678,256 719,826

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22

ACR 71% 70% 69% 68% 67%

ASR 31% 44% 131% 38% 44%

Description 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

ACR 69% 73% 72% 71% 70%

ASR 494% 167% 0% 0% 0%



PAGE 295

Agenda


PAGE 295 Agenda


Page 21 of 30

Figure 7.2.2a Seawall Assets - ACR 10 YR Projection

Figure 7.2.2b Seawall Assets - ASR 10 YR Projection

Based on the above analysis, the ACR for MBRC’s seawall assets sits within the recommended range over the 10-year forecast. In contrast, the ASR measure is quite volatile, sitting well below the 90% target or displaying significant spend at irregular intervals. For example, Woody Point Seawall Renewal Project estimated at $2.35M contributes to 91% of the total renewal costs and the large spike in ASR in 2022/23FY (refer Table 7.2.4).

Seawall asset renewals are expensive and occur irregularly and calculation of the ASR over a longer time period (10-20 years) may be required to confirm adequate renewal investment. Findings from the 2017 seawall condition assessment, once completed and

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%90%

Seawall Asset Consumption Ratio

Asset Consumption Ratio Upper Threshold Lower Threshold

0%

100%

200%

300%

400%

500%

600%

Seawall Asset Sustainability Ratio

Asset Sustainability Ratio Target Asset Sustainability Ratio



PAGE 296

Agenda


PAGE 296 Agenda


Page 22 of 30

assessed, as well as, the implementation of MBRC’s CHAS are expected to increase future seawall renewals, replacements and upgrades, programmed over a longer timeframe. Coastal protection asset ASR will be reassessed once projects derived from these studies have been seeded into the budget.

7.2.3 Maintenance Expense for Seawalls Assets Budget for seawalls maintenance is allocated from capital/operational or reactive maintenance budgets. Findings from the 2017 seawall condition assessment, once completed will provide an estimate of the projected maintenance spend.

7.2.4 Capital Expenditure for Seawalls Assets The capital expenditure for each year of a ten year program is listed in Table 7.2.4 (all figures in $):

Table 7.2.4 10YR Capital Expenditure Budget

Note that the current forecast program of capital works includes a number of significant coastal protection projects in 2022/23 and 2023/24, which lead to the large expenditure allocations in those years.

Description 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22

Renewal/ replacements 145,000 211,000 640,000 189,100 220,000

Extensions/ new assets/ upgrades

725,000 164,000 160,000 193,900 110,000

New Total Replacement Value

28,723,161 29,098,161 29,898,161 30,281,161 30,611,161

Description 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27

Renewal/ replacements 2,592,000 996,000 - - -

Extensions/ new assets/ upgrades

1,323,000 6,084,000 500,000 2,200,000 -

New Total Replacement Value

34,526,161 41,606,161 42,106,161 44,306,161 44,306,161



PAGE 297

Agenda


PAGE 297 Agenda


Page 23 of 30

8 Improvement and Monitoring

8.1 Known Issues with the Quality of Data, Forecasts and Estimates

Good practice requires that the remaining useful lives will be reviewed annually and adjusted as required, as the overall condition of the coastal structure assets becomes better known. The 2017 seawall condition assessment will provide much needed information guiding inspection routine. Future inspections will provide insight into degradation rates for existing assets and renewal needs.

Further, the CHAS will provide guidance about future upgrades and, as appropriate, the construction of new seawall assets to meeting evolving coastal hazard and climate change risks.

8.2 Actions Required to Mitigate the Known Issues

During the preparation of this asset management plan, many issues have been identified. Some of these issues are known and are currently being addressed while others may not have been previously recognised.

The following action plan lists these issues and provides recommendations to investigate or address the issue. Future iterations of this asset management plan will monitor progress on the items listed and identify further areas for improvement.

Table 8.2.1 Action Plan Action No. Detail Responsibility Due date

AI - CP001

(S2)

Expand the CPPAMP to include other coastal protection assets, including groynes, break waters, dune protection and beaches.

AMT FY17/18

AI - CP002 (S2.1.2)

Create a seawall hierarchy based on defined criteria of function, capacity and / or design.

AMT FY17/18

AI - CP003 (S2.1.2)

Create seawall attributes and components in line with the new register hierarchy.

AMT FY17/18

AI -CP004

(S2.1.2-3)

Create seawalls and sections in TOMAS Asset Register.

AMT FY17/18

AI - CP005 (S2.1.3)

Align breakdown of seawall function, capacity and / or design hierarchy.

AMT FY17/18



PAGE 298

Agenda


PAGE 298 Agenda


Page 24 of 30


AI - CP006 (s5.3)

Develop annual level 1 inspection schedule for buried seawalls to understand stability of the sand, and should the sand erode or migrate, undertake level 2 seawall inspection in order to assign an appropriate condition rating.

AMT,DWCP

FY17/18

AI - CP007 (s5.3.1)

Develop seawall level 1, 2 and 3 inspection criteria.

AMT,DWCP

FY17/18

AI - CP008 (s5.3.1)

Develop and implement defect capture and process to agreed requirement / standard.

AMT,DWCP, AM

FY17/18

AI - CP009 (s5.3.1)

Develop and implement inspection regime and process for seawall network to encompass routine / planned maintenance program

AMT,DWCP, AM

FY17/18

AI - CP010 (s5.3.2)

Discuss, agree and allocate responsibilities for the completion of annual level 1 inspections following agreed process; and capturing and reporting required information.

AMT,DWCP, AM

FY17/18

AI-CP011 (s5.4)

Identify and monitor the risks associated with seawall performance in accordance to the CHAS risk thresholds

AMT,DWCP, AM

FY17/18

AI - CP012 (s5.4)

Investigate risk and liability issues arising from private jetties abutting public seawalls to determine a preventative plan or MBRC response.

AMT,DWCP, AM

FY17/18

AI - CP013 (s5.4)

Update the GIS database and asset register following future inspections to include known occurrences of private structures abutting coastal protection assets.

AMT,DWCP, AM

FY17/18

AI-CP014 (s5.5.2)

Update Maintenance Plan annually to ensure schedules remain relevant and allow for greater accuracy in planning and forecasting.

AMT,DWCP, AM

Annually

AI-CP015 (s5.5.2)

Develop standard design solutions for the various maintenance, remediation and replacement activities, where practical, to provide efficiencies in future works.

AMT,DWCP, AM

FY17/18

AI-CP016 (s5.5.2)

Review and update unit rates within the Maintenance Schedule periodically based on actual costing information that comes to hand.

AMT,DWCP, AM

Annually



PAGE 299

Agenda


PAGE 299 Agenda


Page 25 of 30


AI-CP017 (s5.6.2)

Move renewal/replacements planning to a strategic asset management approach.

AMT FY17/18

AI-CP018 (s5.8)

Develop a 10+ year Capital (Renewal and Upgrade) program based upon inspection and seawall condition assessment data

AMT,DWCP

FY17/18 and then ongoing



PAGE 300

Agenda


PAGE 300 Agenda


Page 26 of 30

9 APPENDICES

Appendix no. Title Section

Appendix 1 Additional Legislative Policies, Standards and Guidelines 3 Appendix 2 Reference Model for Risk Threshold Identification in Coastal Hazard

Adaptation Strategy 5.4

Appendix 3 Process Diagram for Seawall Repairs, Replacement and Maintenance Schedules

5.3



PAGE 301

Agenda


PAGE 301 Agenda


Page 27 of 30

Appendix 1 - Additional Legislative Policies, Standards and Guidelines

QCoast2100 Developing a Coastal Hazard Adaptation Strategy (CHAS): Minimum Standards and Guideline for Queensland Local Governments - LGAQ

State Planning Policy 2016 (SPP) MBRC Shoreline Erosion Management Plans (SEMPs) Erosion Prone Area Moreton bay Regional Local Government Area -

Department of Environment and Heritage (DEHP) Guidelines for the Construction of Works on Tidal Lands or Waters for Private

Use- Department of Environment and Heritage (DEHP) Assessment and Decision Framework For Seawall Structures - Part A and B -

Sydney Coastal Councils Group, http://www.sydneycoastalcouncils.com.au/Project/assessment_and_decision_frameworks_for_seawall_structures_project

AS/NZS ISO 31000:2009 Risk management - Principles and guidelines IPWEA, 2006, ‘International Infrastructure Management Manual’, Institute of

Public Works Engineering Australia, Sydney, www.ipwea.org.au Coastal Hazard Technical Guide Determining Coastal Hazard Areas-

Department of Environment and Heritage (DEHP) Australian standard for Risk Management AS/NZS ISO 31000:2009. DEHP Operational Policy “Building and engineering standards for tidal works.”

Return to text



PAGE 302

Agenda


PAGE 302 Agenda


Page 28 of 30

Appendix 2 - Reference Model for Risk Threshold Identification in Coastal Hazard Adaptation Strategy

(Fisk and Kay 2010 in QCoast2100: )

Return to text



PAGE 303

Agenda


PAGE 303 Agenda


Page 29 of 30

Appendix 3 - Process Flow Diagram for Development of Seawall Repairs, Replacement and Maintenance Schedules

Return to text



PAGE 304

Agenda


PAGE 304 Agenda


Page 30 of 30

<This page has been intentionally left blank>



PAGE 305

Agenda


PAGE 305 Agenda


ITEM 4.7 PROPOSAL TO NAME AN UN-NAMED BRIDGE ‘HERMAN KUHN BRIDGE’ - MT PLEASANT ROAD, MT PLEASANT - DIVISION 11 Meeting / Session: 4 ASSET CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE Reference: A15289268 : 9 June 2017 Responsible Officer: SJ, Manager Integrated Transport Planning and Design (ECM Integrated

Transport Planning & Design) Executive Summary Council has received a request to name a currently un-named bridge adjacent to 482 Mt Pleasant Road, Mt Pleasant. The request seeks to name the bridge after Mr Ludwig Hermann Kuhn (known as Herman), to reflect Herman Kuhn’s family history and contribution to the local area. This report supports the naming of the un-named bridge as ‘Herman Kuhn Bridge’, subject to favourable public consultation. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION 1. That subject to the outcome of public advertising, Council approves the naming of the un-named bridge

adjacent to 482 Mt Pleasant Road, Mt Pleasant as ‘Herman Kuhn Bridge’.

2. That the proposal to name the bridge as ‘Herman Kuhn Bridge’ be advertised in local newspapers with public submissions to be received and considered for a period of 28 days.

3. That should adverse submissions be received following the advertised period, the matter be referred

back to Council in a subsequent report.


PAGE 306

Agenda


PAGE 306 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 4.7 MT PLEASANT ROAD, MT PLEASANT - DIVISION 11 - A15289268 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background An application has been received requesting that an un-named bridge adjacent to 482 Mt Pleasant Road, Mt Pleasant be named ‘Herman Kuhn Bridge’ - see Figure 1 for location.

Figure 1 - Location plan - unnamed bridge Mt Pleasant Road, Mt Pleasant The proposed naming of the un-named bridge would acknowledge the fact that the Kuhn family still resides on adjacent land and are one of the longest settled families in the area. Mr Kuhn and his family purchased the property in 1882. This information has been confirmed by Council’s local history officer. 2. Explanation of Item Under Policy No: 11-2150-039, Naming of Council Owned or Administered Buildings, Structures and other Assets (excluding roads), applicants are required to provide documentation to substantiate the good character of the person or persons being acknowledged. The application provided the following information on Mr Ludwig Hermann Kuhn’s community contributions.

‘Ludwig Hermann Kuhn (known as Herman) was an original settler of Mt Pleasant. He selected 160 acres - Parish Pine Portion 25 on 1 May 1882, raising 9 children on this selection whilst dairying and cultivating crops. Ludwig Hermann Kuhn was the first Justice of the Peace in Mt Pleasant. Herman was on the Mt Pleasant School Committee, established in 1904. He was on the Presbyterian Church Committee. He was one of the early Dayboro QATB committee members. Herman’s selection has now had five generations live and dairy farm on it.’

The recommendation to name the bridge the “Herman Kuhn Bridge” complies with the policy’s guidelines for the following points: • Persons with a historical connection to the land or area • Names of pioneering families and long-term residents


PAGE 307

Agenda


PAGE 307 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 4.7 MT PLEASANT ROAD, MT PLEASANT - DIVISION 11 - A15289268 (Cont.)

Council policy requires that any proposal to name a bridge or similar structure be advertised in local newspapers for a period of 28 days during which time submissions can be received. This process allows Council to assess any possible objections to the proposed naming. Should any adverse submissions be received following the advertised period, the matter will be referred back to Council in a subsequent report. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Nil

3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan Valuing lifestyle: Diverse transport options - an integrated regional transport network.

3.3 Policy Implications This report has been prepared in accordance with Council’s Allocation of Road Names and Street Address Numbers Policy No: 11-2150-038 and Road Naming and Street Address Numbering Processes Policy Directive No: 11-2160-009.

3.4 Risk Management Implications Nil

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications Not applicable

3.6 Financial Implications The costs relating to the installation of the bridge name signs would be absorbed using an existing departmental operational budget.



There are no environmental implications associated with this item.

3.9 Social Implications Naming of the bridge provides an additional way-finding landmark and sense of community history.

3.10 Consultation / Communication The Divisional Councillor has been consulted and is supportive of the request to proceed. The matter will be advertised the proposed name in local newspapers for a period of 28 days, during which time, public submissions can be made and will be received. Should significant adverse comments be received, then the matter will be referred back to Council for final consideration and direction. Where no adverse comments are received, the matter will be delegated to the Director Engineering Construction and Maintenance for implementation.


PAGE 308

Agenda


PAGE 308 Agenda


5 PARKS, RECREATION & SPORT SESSION (Cr Darren Grimwade) No items for consideration.


PAGE 309

Agenda


PAGE 309 Agenda


6 LIFESTYLE & AMENITY SESSION (Cr Matt Constance) ITEM 6.1 KOALA MONITORING PHASE 2 - THE MILL AT MORETON BAY - PREFERRED SUPPLIER ARRANGEMENT - DIVISION 7 Meeting / Session: 6 LIFESTYLE & AMENITY Reference: A15452244: 20 June 2017 - Refer Confidential Supporting Information

A15458039 Responsible Officer: RM, Manager, Environmental Services (CES Environmental Services) Executive Summary Council recently acquired the former Petrie Paper Mill site, now known as The Mill at Moreton Bay. The site includes areas of koala bushland habitat which will be impacted by the intended site development. Council has committed to deliver a net gain in environmental values across the site by establishing additional koala bushland habitat and ensuring koala safety during the construction phase. As part of the site’s development, Council needed to engage a service provider with specialist expertise to develop and undertake a koala monitoring program to ensure the safety of the koala population during periods of construction. Due to the specialist nature of these services there is only one supplier, Endeavour Veterinary Ecology Pty Ltd (EVE), with the experience and specialist knowledge to deliver the services sought. EVE completed phase 1 of the koala monitoring program between March 2017 and June 2017. Phase 2 of the program is due to commence from 1 July 2017. An exemption is required under Section 235(b) of the Local Government Regulation 2012 to enable EVE to be contracted for these services. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION 1. That in accordance with section 235(b) of the Local Government Regulation 2012, Council is satisfied

that because of the specialised nature of the services to be provided it would be impractical or disadvantageous for the Council to invite quotes or tenders for the services.

2. That Endeavour Veterinary Ecology Pty Ltd be engaged to implement phase 2 of the koala monitoring program for The Mill at Moreton Bay site between 1 July 2017 and 30 June 2018.


PAGE 310

Agenda


PAGE 310 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 6.1 KOALA MONITORING PHASE 2 - THE MILL AT MORETON BAY - PREFERRED SUPPLIER ARRANGEMENT - DIVISION 7 - A15452244 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background In March 2017, as part of the development of The Mill at Moreton Bay site at Petrie, Council engaged the services of EVE to implement a koala monitoring program. The following resolution appears on Minutes Page 17/392 of the General Meeting of Council held 21 March 2017: Ex. Coordination Committee Meeting held 21 March 2017 (MP17/409) COMMITTEE RECOMMENDATION 1. That in accordance with section 235(b) of the Local Government Regulation 2012, Council is satisfied

that because of the specialised nature of the services to be provided it would be impractical or disadvantageous for the Council to invite quotes or tenders for the services.

2. That Council engage Endeavour Veterinary Ecology Pty Ltd to develop and implement a two phase

koala monitoring program for The Mill at Moreton Bay site. 3. That details and costs of phase two of the program be the subject of a further report to council.

Council determined that the koala monitoring program was to be undertaken in two phases.

Phase 1 (March to June 2017) involved an intensive site assessment to identify and tag all koalas on The Mill at Moreton Bay site. During this time EVE identified 45 koalas on the site. Each koala has been fitted with telemetry devices and is currently being monitored. EVE have also completed health assessments of each koala and report that all koalas are currently healthy. Phase 2 is due to commence from 1 July 2017 and involves the ongoing koala monitoring and associated veterinary health assessments and treatment. A schedule of charges for phase 2 of the program (refer Confidential Supporting Information #1) has been provided by Dr Jon Hanger, Director EVE. 2. Explanation of Item Under the provisions of the Local Government Regulation 2012, Council may enter into a contract with a provider where Council is satisfied that because of the specialist nature of the services to be provided, it would be impractical or disadvantageous for Council to seek quotes for the services. EVE has satisfactorily completed phase 1 of the koala monitoring program at The Mill at Moreton Bay site. This report recommends that EVE be engaged to implement phase 2 of the koala monitoring program between 1 July 2017 and 30 June 2018 to facilitate the delivery of Council’s koala safety commitments. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Section 235(b) of the Local Government Regulation 2012 provides that Council may enter into a medium-sized contractual arrangement or large-sized contractual arrangement without first inviting written quotes or tenders if Council resolves that, because of the specialised or confidential nature of the services that are sought, it would be impractical or disadvantageous for Council to invite quotes or tenders.


PAGE 311

Agenda


PAGE 311 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 6.1 KOALA MONITORING PHASE 2 - THE MILL AT MORETON BAY - PREFERRED SUPPLIER ARRANGEMENT - DIVISION 7 - A15452244 (Cont.)

3.2 Corporate Plan / Operational Plan Valuing Lifestyle: Healthy natural environment - a clean and healthy environment.

3.3 Policy Implications Council’s Procurement Policy 10-2150-006 allows the consideration of exceptions permitted under the Local Government Regulation 2012.

3.4 Risk Management Implications EVE have specialist knowledge and experience in delivering successful koala monitoring programs within the Moreton Bay Region and specifically on The Mill at Moreton Bay site. In addition, EVE have the required animal handling and animal ethics approvals issued by the State Government. The use of an experienced and specialist koala services contractor will assist in identifying and appropriately managing koala safety risks during construction activities.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications Nil

3.6 Financial Implications $350,000 from The Mill at Moreton Bay site redevelopment project 2016/2017 budget was allocated to conduct phase 1 of the koala monitoring program. As at 20 June 2017, 45 koalas were identified at The Mill at Moreton Bay site and the koala monitoring program costs are within budget allocations. $750,000 has been allocated in 2017/2018 budget (project number 105057) to conduct phase 2 of the koala monitoring program, including the tagging and monitoring of new koala joeys. In addition to koala monitoring, each koala on the site will undergo veterinary health assessments and associated treatment as determined by EVE. EVE will provide reports to Council on a monthly basis detailing veterinary health assessments, associated treatments and related costs.



It is considered that EVE has the specialist expertise to undertake a koala monitoring program to ensure the safety of the koala population during periods of construction. Continuity of the koala monitoring program will demonstrate Council’s commitment to koala safety and conservation measures.

3.9 Social Implications Nil

3.10 Consultation / Communication Manager, Financial and Project Services Senior Procurement Advisor Manager, Major Projects (University Project)


PAGE 312

Agenda


PAGE 312 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15458039 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 6.1 KOALA MONITORING PHASE 2 - THE MILL AT MORETON BAY - PREFERRED SUPPLIER ARRANGEMENT - DIVISION 7 Confidential #1 Schedule of charges provided by Dr Jon Hanger, Director, EVE


PAGE 313

Agenda


PAGE 313 Agenda


7 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT & TOURISM SESSION (Cr Julie Greer) ITEM 7.1 PROPERTY RATIONALISATION PROJECT - DIVISIONS 1 & 4 Meeting / Session: 7 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT & TOURISM Reference: A15436410 : 16 June 2017 - Refer Supporting Information A15436398 Responsible Officer: AS, Enterprise and Investments Officer (EPS Property & Commercial Services) Executive Summary This report seeks a Council resolution to dispose of Council land at 60 Magnesium St, Narangba (part of Lot 1 on SP282672) and 16 Ross St, Ningi (Lot 97 on RP98996). OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION 1. That the proposal to sell Council-owned land described as 60 Magnesium St, Narangba (part of Lot

1 on SP282672) and 16 Ross St, Ningi (Lot 97 on RP98996) to the owners of adjoining land, be approved as detailed in this report.

2. That the exception contained in section 236(1)(c)(iv) of the Local Government Regulation 2012 applies to the Council on the disposal of the land referred to in recommendation 1.

3. That the Chief Executive Officer be authorised to negotiate terms and take all action necessary to complete the sale of the Council properties as described in recommendation 1.


PAGE 315

Agenda


PAGE 315 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 7.1 PROPERTY RATIONALISATION PROJECT - DIVISIONS 1 & 4 - A15436410 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background The adjoining owners of two separate Council-owned properties have expressed an interest in purchasing such land, which is adjacent to their respective properties. Both parcels of land are small in size and are not considered suitable to be offered for disposal by tender or auction, as development of the sites would be either impractical, or unwanted in their current state. 2. Explanation of Item 2.1 (part) 60 Magnesium St, Narangba (L1 on SP282672) Council has been approached by the owner of 50 Magnesium St, and the owner of 45 Magnesium St, to consider the disposal of approximately 400 - 800m2 of adjacent Council-owned land. The land in question forms part of an access handle for 60 Magnesium St, which is a battle-axe block. The land area is shown in pink in Supporting Information #1 and includes a portion along the rear of their parcel which is covered by a sewerage easement. The intent of the disposal is to allow the owner of 45 Magnesium St, to expand its business onto land at 50 Magnesium St, which is proposed to be subdivided into 4 lots. See draft plan in Supporting Information #2 provided by the proponents. Access is to be granted to the rear parcel (60 Magnesium St) owned by the Council by way of a road extending south-east from a proposed cul-de-sac head in the new development. Operations and Development Services have confirmed the new access to 60 Magnesium St is acceptable. It remains to be confirmed whether the proponents would require the sewerage easement portion, but if possible it will be offered for purchase also. The owners on both sides of the block will be offered the site prior to entering into any negotiations. Should both adjoining owners have an interest in purchasing the land, a public tender campaign will be required. 2.2 16 Ross St, Ningi (L97 on RP98996). A neighbouring property owner has approached Council seeking to purchase 16 Ross St, also known as Rex Lane Park (see Supporting Information #3). This Council owned land is 152m2 in size, and is zoned recreation and open space. The parcel at 18 Ross St is 258m2 and is zoned General Residential, Suburban Neighbourhood. Please note that there is adequate pedestrian/cyclist connectivity along the adjacent Ningi Esplanade and this park is not strategic as there is a large foreshore open space area on Ningi Esplanade and Theo Green Park in close proximity. Should Council decide to dispose of the land, it is to be conditional on the land being amalgamated with the parcel next door to remove the ability for an ‘as of right’ use, being construction of a new dwelling or boundary re-alignment. The owners on both sides of the block will be offered the site prior to entering into any negotiations. Should both adjoining owners have an interest in purchasing the land, a public tender campaign will be required, although amalgamation with a neighbouring site will be a condition of purchase, effectively narrowing the ability to purchase to the two adjoining parties. Section 236(1)(c)(iv) of the Local Government Regulation 2012 (the Regulation) provides an exception (see excerpt of the Regulation shown in Supporting Information #4) whereby the Council may dispose of land to a person who owns adjoining land other than by tender or auction if: a) the land is not suitable to be offered for disposal by tender or auction for a particular reason, including,

for example, the size of the land or the existence of particular infrastructure on the land; and b) there is not another person who owns other adjoining land who wishes to acquire the land; and c) it is in the public interest to dispose of the land without a tender or auction; and d) the disposal is otherwise in accordance with sound contracting principles. Council’s justifications for meeting the above exception requirements are: a) The size of land in both cases is small, with no other reasonably suitable purpose considered possible.


PAGE 316

Agenda


PAGE 316 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 7.1 PROPERTY RATIONALISATION PROJECT - DIVISIONS 1 & 4 - A15436410 (Cont.)

b) There are two adjoining owners to each property. Both parties will be offered the opportunity to acquire the neighbouring Council land in each case. Should both parties wish to purchase the land, the exception will not be relied on and a public tender campaign will be run. Should one party decline, then condition (b) is satisfied.

c) In both cases the land is effectively a stranded asset, and a maintenance burden on Council and offers no primary service to the community in general. It is in the best interests of all ratepayers to dispose of the land to an adjoining owner.

d) The disposals will be undertaken in accordance with the sound contracting principles. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Under the Local Government Regulation 2012, the Council must dispose of property pursuant to an auction or tender process unless a relevant exception to this general requirement applies.

Section 236(1)(c)(iv) of the Regulation provides an exception whereby the Council may dispose of a property without firstly conducting an auction or tender process if certain requirements are met. The Council must resolve that the exception applies prior to the sale contract being entered into.


3.3 Policy Implications There is no Council policy which specifically deals with the disposal of land; however, the provisions of the Local Government Regulation 2012 described in paragraph 3.1 apply.

3.4 Risk Management Implications The primary risk is probity. The Council’s Manager Property & Commercial Services will oversee the sale process which will be conducted in accordance with the relevant legislation and policies.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications As per the recommendation, the Chief Executive Officer be authorised to take all action necessary to complete these sales.

3.6 Financial Implications Both parcels of land are effectively a stranded asset, and a maintenance burden on Council and offers no primary service to the community in general. Accordingly it is in the best interests of all ratepayers to consider disposal of the land to an adjoining owner.

3.7 Economic Benefit Disposal of Council’s surplus land holdings will provide a source of funds to Council in order to fund strategic future development projects, provide a source of recurrent revenue through rates, and remove the ongoing operational costs of maintaining and servicing non-strategic land assets. In the case of the Magnesium Street parcel it will also ensure that employment opportunities in this industrial area are maximised.


Any environmental values associated with these lands will be managed through any subsequent development approval process.


The disposal of this land will have no direct social implications.

3.10 Consultation / Communication Council has been briefed with regard to Council’s Property Rationalisation Strategy and these parcels in particular.


PAGE 317

Agenda


PAGE 317 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15436398 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 7.1 PROPERTY RATIONALISATION PROJECT - DIVISIONS 1 & 4 #1 Magnesium St, Narangba #2 Magnesium St Concept Plan #3 Ross St, Ningi #4 Excerpt from Local Government Regulation 2012


PAGE 318

Agenda


PAGE 318 Agenda

ITEM 7.1 - PROPERTY RATIONALISATION PROJECT - DIVISIONS 1 & 4 (Cont)

#1 Magnesium St, Narangba


PAGE 319

Agenda


PAGE 319 Agenda


#2 Magnesium St Concept Plan


PAGE 320

Agenda


PAGE 320 Agenda


#3 Ross St, Ningi


PAGE 321

Agenda


PAGE 321 Agenda


#4 Excerpt from Local Government Regulation 2012


PAGE 322

Agenda


PAGE 322 Agenda


ITEM 7.2 AWARDING OF SERVICE CONTRACT - COMMERCIAL LEASING AND PROPERTY MANAGEMENT - REGIONAL Meeting / Session: 7 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT & TOURISM Reference: A15437493 : 16 June 2017 - Refer Confidential Supporting Information

A15417332 Responsible Officer: AS, Enterprise and Investments Officer (EPS Property & Commercial Services) Executive Summary The Council’s existing arrangement for commercial leasing and property management services expires on 6 July 2017. A public tender was called for the provision of these services (MBRC006478), which closed on 1 June 2017. Five tender submissions were received, all of which were conforming. It is recommended that Council award the tender for Commercial Leasing and Property Management Services (MBRC006478) to CPRM Property Group (QLD) ACN: 616 531 705, as this tender was evaluated as representing the best overall value to Council. OFFICER’S RECOMMENDATION That the tender for Commercial Leasing and Property Management Services (MBRC006478) be awarded to CPRM Property Group (QLD) ACN: 616 531 705 to undertake the leasing and property management of Council-owned commercial, retail, and industrial real estate for a period of three years.


PAGE 323

Agenda


PAGE 323 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 7.2 AWARDING OF SERVICE CONTRACT - COMMERCIAL LEASING AND PROPERTY MANAGEMENT - REGIONAL - A15437493 (Cont.)

REPORT DETAIL 1. Background On 1 February 2012, Council awarded the tender for Commercial Leasing and Property Management to Ray White Commercial Northside on an initial term of three years with a three year option. Council exercised that option on 27 January 2015. The parent company of Ray White Commercial Northside was dissolved in May 2017, and as a result, the service contract was terminated. With a temporary arrangement put in place for three months, Council subsequently ran a tender process on LG Tenderbox for a new service provider. 2. Explanation of Item Tenders were invited for the provision of the leasing and property management of Council-owned commercial, retail, and industrial real estate services (MBRC006478). The tender closed on 1 June 2017 with a total of five tender submissions received, all of which were conforming. All tenderers and their evaluation scores are tabled below (ranked from highest to lowest):


1 CPRM Property Group (QLD) 90.06 2 Ray White Commercial North Coast Central 88.22 3 Savills 75.10 4 First Commercial Realty 59.63 5 MMJ Brisbane 56.85

CPRM Property Group (QLD) provided a comprehensive submission detailing experience in the region and proven specialist expertise in managing aerodromes. Their methodology was considered comprehensive and their submission was well documented. Whilst their submission was not the lowest score on price, the panel considered that the offer represented the best value for money. Ray White Commercial North Coast, submitted a solid tender with good experience in the region. Whilst not representing the lowest priced tender, it was competitive. The remaining three tenders lacked detail and did not adequately address all of the selection criteria. The panel scored them accordingly. As a result of the tender evaluation, it is recommended that CPRM Property Group (QLD), be awarded the service contract to provide Council with Leasing and Property Management Services for three years, commencing 8 July 2017. 3. Strategic Implications 3.1 Legislative/Legal Implications

Due to the value of the proposed contractual arrangement likely being greater than $200,000, Council called a public tender for the services through the LG Tender system in accordance with the Local Government Act 2009.


3.3 Policy Implications This tender has been called in accordance with the provision of the following documents:

• Council’s Procurement Policy 10-2150-006 • Local Government Act 2009 • Local Government Regulation 2012


PAGE 324

Agenda


PAGE 324 Agenda

Moreton Bay Regional Council ITEM 7.2 AWARDING OF SERVICE CONTRACT - COMMERCIAL LEASING AND PROPERTY MANAGEMENT - REGIONAL - A15437493 (Cont.)

3.4 Risk Management Implications The primary risk associated with this tender is probity. To mitigate this risk:

• An internal procurement advisor was involved in the tender process; and • The selected agent will be required to sign Council’s Confidentiality Agreement and Conflict

of Interest documents.

3.5 Delegated Authority Implications There are no delegated authority implications directly related to this report.

3.6 Financial Implications Based on forecast income and expenditure, the value of this service contract is estimated at $600,000 inc GST over the life of the contract. This will be covered by the relevant Property Services budget.

3.7 Economic Benefit The appropriate leasing and property management of Council’s commercial, industrial and residential real estate provides an economic benefit to the Council and region as a whole.


There are no environmental implications directly related to this report. 3.9 Social Implications

There are no social implications directly related to this report.

3.10 Consultation / Communication There are no communication implications directly related to this report.


PAGE 325

Agenda


PAGE 325 Agenda


SUPPORTING INFORMATION Ref: A15417332 The following list of supporting information is provided for: ITEM 7.2 AWARDING OF SERVICE CONTRACT - COMMERCIAL LEASING AND PROPERTY MANAGEMENT - REGIONAL Confidential #1 Tender Evaluation


PAGE 326

Agenda


PAGE 326 Agenda


8 GENERAL BUSINESS ANY OTHER BUSINESS AS PERMITTED BY THE MEETING CHAIRPERSON.


PAGE 328

Agenda


PAGE 328 Agenda


CLOSED SESSION (Confidential items) (Resolution the meeting be closed under s275 of the Local Government Regulation 2012) ITEM C.1 – CONFIDENTIAL THE MILL AT MORETON BAY - PROCUREMENT OF FILL MATERIAL - DIVISION 7 Meeting / Session: 4 ASSET CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE Reference: A15465846 : 21 June 2017 Responsible Officer: PH, Senior Project Manager - Civil (ECM Major Projects) Basis of Confidentiality Pursuant to s275 (1) of the Local Government Regulation 2012, clause (e), as the matter involves contracts proposed to be made by the Council. Executive Summary The Petrie Mill Redevelopment project requires filling to achieve development levels in accordance with the Master Plan for the site. Given the current market, failure to secure a source of suitable fill source could lead to lengthy project delays or inflated supply costs. It is recommended that Council select Boral Resources (Whiteside) as the preferred supplier of fill material for stage 1 of the Petrie Mill Redevelopment project.


PAGE 329

Agenda


PAGE 329 Agenda

Date post:	29-Dec-2019
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times